JP7611096B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that enhances the interest of a player by providing multiple parts (such as an introductory part, a win/lose determination part, an epilogue part, etc.) from the start to the end of a variable display (Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-118411 A

According to the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of making the flow of the series of effects executed look better.

The present invention has been devised in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that can make the series of effects that are executed look more suitable.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
A display means capable of displaying a performance video;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a notification part in which the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
An introduction part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is not made to the advantageous state are common,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to a scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a movable body movement luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The control of the light emitting means by the movable body moving luminance data table is performed by sequentially using the luminance data constituting the movable body moving luminance data table and then sequentially using the luminance data constituting the movable body moving luminance data table again;
The control of the light emitting means by the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching is ended after sequentially using the luminance data constituting the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching, without sequentially using the luminance data constituting the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching again;
the last luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching is set not to control the light-emitting means using the first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching again;
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part;
The light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data last used in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means emits light at a first luminance;
the light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data that is used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, so that the light-emitting means emits light at a second luminance that is lower than the first luminance;
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, (1) a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
A state control means for controlling a normal state and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means for performing a variable display;
A display means,
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state;
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the display can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled to the second special state, a special variable display is executed in which a display result becomes a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a variable display period is shorter than a fixed period from the end of a variable display to the start of a next variable display,
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed,
a proportion of a variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the variable display period
The performance execution means includes:
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating that the vehicle is controlled to the first special state can be displayed on the display means.
A first specific change performance that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating that the vehicle is controlled to the second special state can be displayed on the display means.
A second specific change performance that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The period during which the state of the second special display in the second specific change performance changes is shorter than the period during which the state of the first special display in the first specific change performance changes;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
According to such a gaming machine, when the display result becomes a predetermined display result, the period controlled to the special state has a high probability of selecting an extremely short variable display period, so that the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Also, in the second special state in which the special variable display is executed with a high probability, the cycle in which the state of the second special display changes is short, so that the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state can be emphasized.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board, the fourth pattern unit, and the relationship between the fourth pattern unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. 13 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery for a presentation pattern on the sub side. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of presentations. This is a diagram to explain the relationship before and after the decision on whether or not to win, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the starting part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the reel operation part (late development of SP). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a relief part. A diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after a button is operated) and the fanfare part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the reel operation part (when the SP develops in the second half). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an odd pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an odd pattern after button operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r24) to (r27). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r28) to (r31). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r32) to (r35). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A24) to (A46). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. FIG. 13 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout. 13A to 13C are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when a miss occurs and diagrams for explaining modified examples when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a detailed explanatory diagram of part (r48). 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the start part. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the reel operation part during the latter half development of the SP. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the promotion part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a part per relief. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in a re-lottery part. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). FIG. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (maintaining the pattern after operation promotion). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the fanfare part. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp and a grandchild table for a left panel lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for an Attacka lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left panel lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation prompting brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the miss luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the swinging pattern of the pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 at characteristic portion 152F. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for normal conditions. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern related to a high-speed time-saving small win. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of effects related to missed entry fluctuations. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of the effects related to pseudo-fluctuation misses. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a pseudo-variation miss. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a pseudo-variation miss. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a direct jackpot. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible RUSH). An explanatory diagram showing a control table after a win for each game state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the varying display of decorative symbols in Dream Rush. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a first logo periodic change presentation, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a second logo periodic change presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the variable display of decorative symbols in ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH. FIG. 2 is a front view of the movable body, the logo panel, and the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display, and FIGS. 13B1 and 13B2 are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. 13(B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode determination table for change presentations. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for determining whether or not to execute the first pre-reading performance, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the performance during a jackpot. This is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the performance during a small win. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a presentation when waiting for the start of a fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance determination process at the start of fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a performance during fluctuation. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a normal jackpot of pattern 3R occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal jackpot of pattern 3R occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a time-saving jackpot of pattern 10Ra occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a time-saving jackpot of pattern 10Ra occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a time-saving jackpot of pattern 10Ra occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of effects when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a normal small win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and reserved consumption periods. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption period, and second reserved memory number. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption period, and second reserved memory number. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption period, and second reserved memory number.

<Composition of pachinko machines, etc.>
Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Fig. 1 shows the layout of the main components of a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. The pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a flashing manner. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, on the game board 2 on the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that a game ball can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the V large winning port and preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V large winning port and allowing the game ball to enter the V large winning port more easily.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 6) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is configured with the character string "POWERFUL II". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The characters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful II) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 1. Specifically, the movable body 32 stops at a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER II" to fall diagonally (so that the "P" falls downward and the "II" falls upward). The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area as a control stick that the player can hold and tilt (in the forward, backward, left and right directions, or by pulling it towards the player). Inside the main body of the stick controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided that detects the tilting of the control stick. The stick controller 31A also has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A is also called a "trigger" because it can be pulled towards the player.

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22. In this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for various lamps, such as the frame lamp described below.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps (also called game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a role lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, an attacca lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that notifies the player that a round of a big win game state in which a V big winning hole is open and a V winning can occur, or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, a push button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. The V lamp may be for notifying the player that a big win has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a component labeled "POWER II" and included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled with the letters "POWER II", "POWER II" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. The main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the stick controller 31A. The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the push button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 6).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the gaming board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

Figure 4 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in Figure 4 (a), the special symbol LED board 20 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 22 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 23 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 24 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 25 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 26 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 30 encouraging the player to hit right, a probability-change display section 28 showing the presence or absence of a probability-change state, a time-saving display section 29 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 27 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 20 can prompt the player to make a right hit by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to make a right hit, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to make a right hit, that is, when the player is prompted to make a left hit, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 30, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 30. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 30 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 30.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of a jackpot, and in the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability variable state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 30 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and can obtain the right to play the second special game, or can make the game ball enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, during the round of the probability variable jackpot, the V large winning hole is opened, but the player can also hit the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed to make the game ball enter the V large winning hole and obtain the right to be controlled in the probability variable state. Therefore, by hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player may gain an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 which indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 52 which indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 53 which indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 54 which indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 55 which encourages the player to hit to the right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and a right hit instruction by turning on/blinking/going off using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 54 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 21 and the special pattern 1 variable display unit 53 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 22 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 55 is turned off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 55 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 55 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to the high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 55 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 4 (c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a front fluctuation pattern command and a rear fluctuation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the performance control commands, the fourth symbol unit 50 and the game effect lamp are made to differ in whether or not they switch their lighting state, such as on/blinking/off. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12, and the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 as a set. Hereinafter, the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are collectively referred to as the fluctuation pattern command.

Specifically, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special symbol 1 variable display 53 and the special symbol 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 1 variable display 53 from off, which indicates that the first special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates that the first special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 2 variable display 54 from off, which indicates that the second special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates that the second special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before the variation pattern command was received.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special pattern 1 variable display 53 and the special pattern 2 variable display 54) in the fourth pattern unit 50. For example, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 specifying that the pattern fluctuation is to end in the first special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 1 variable display 53 from blinking, which indicates the fluctuation of the first special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the first special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command. In addition, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 specifying that the pattern fluctuation is to end in the second special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 2 variable display 54 from blinking, which indicates the fluctuation of the second special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the second special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before the pattern determination command was received.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp (LED) in the fourth pattern unit 50 changes in response to receiving a variation pattern command or a pattern determination command. In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is maintained before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the pattern determination command has been received. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving a variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 from the lighting state in the normal state to the lighting state in the time-saving state in response to receiving a variation pattern command that starts the time-saving state.

Figure 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first pending memory display area 5D capable of displaying the first pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U capable of displaying the second pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

A fourth pattern 5J is displayed at the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that the special pattern is being displayed variably. Below the fourth pattern 5J, numbers are displayed indicating the first and second reserved memory numbers. The numbers indicating the reserved numbers indicate the first and second reserved memory numbers on the left and right, respectively. Below the display indicating the reserved numbers, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than each decorative pattern, are displayed. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged horizontally. The small patterns 5M are also the patterns that are not hidden during the variable display and are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

<Board configuration>
6 is a diagram for explaining various boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on, for example, in response to pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image, and supplies brightness data (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the LED driver in order to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The performance control CPU 120 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

As will be described in more detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board equipped with an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED. The LED driver adjusts the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on brightness data from the performance control CPU 120, thereby turning the game effect lamp 9 on/blinking/extinct. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the turning on/blinking/extinction of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, and luminance data signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 50 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the performance control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 21 of the special game LED board 20.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special game 2 variable display unit 22 of the special game LED board 20.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special symbol game, a "jackpot" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 corresponds to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot described below). The lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, a "loss" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 corresponds to a special symbol (loss symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. In addition, the lighting state of the multiple LEDs provided in the special chart 1 variable display section 21 and the special chart 2 variable display section 22 of the special chart LED board 20 that corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the jackpot pattern is also referred to as the "losing display result."

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It may also be controlled to a small win game state as an advantageous state. Here, a small win is a win in which the number of times the big prize opening is allowed to open is smaller than that of a big win. It should be noted that when the small win game state ends, the game state does not change. In other words, there is no transition from a special win state to a normal state or from a normal state to a special win state before or after the small win game state. Also, like the big win types, a small win type may be set for a "small win".

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as a certain number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. A state in which the end condition is that a certain number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or using any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed in which the rate at which the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becomes a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) differs according to the performance state. Reach performances include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach that has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. In addition, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that in the following, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "SP first half (SP first half reach)," "the second half of the Super Reach" as "SP second half (SP second half reach)," and "the final reach" as "SP final (SP final reach)."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, the odd numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and the even numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability jackpot symbol, a promotion effect that finally results in a "probability jackpot" may be executed. As a promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability jackpot symbol after a non-probability jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is temporarily stopped as a jackpot display result. Also, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state to promote from a non-probability jackpot to a probability jackpot.

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

<Various tables related to jackpots>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8.

[Winning Type]
7 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 7, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In variable jackpot 1, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot 6, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
Fig. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later variation pattern) that determine the variation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later variation pattern) (variation time) that corresponds to the later variation among the variation patterns. Later variation refers to the latter half of the variation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later variation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 up to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later variation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1 from 1 up to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. The previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether a win is generated based on a normal pattern) that determines whether or not a win is generated based on a normal pattern. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table]
9 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values than the normal jackpot determination table, as it is a combination of the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination values specific to the special jackpot state. This means that in the special jackpot state, a jackpot determination is made with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 9(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) is a numerical value to be compared with the Random 2 value for jackpot type determination, and the determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100.

In the second special symbol jackpot type judgment table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the judgment value numbers corresponding to each of the special jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special symbol, special jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

<Performance control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Note that, in the following, "(H)" indicates hexadecimal, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

The front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command are sent as a set from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 cannot identify the variation pattern by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, but can identify the variation pattern by receiving both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07(H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability change jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability change jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability change jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability change jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability change jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability change jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 9 has been determined. The miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and special jackpot 1-9 designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state specification command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special-variable state specification command that specifies the background of the special-variable state. The normal state specification command, time-saving state specification command, and special-variable state specification command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 95 series commands or background specification commands.

Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command that designates a transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is no currently reserved ball due to the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a video for demonstration on the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a demonstration lamp mode 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (high brightness, many flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. This allows the player to see the appeal of the pachinko game machine 1. In the customer waiting demonstration display, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, during the demonstration display while waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of part of the presentation may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 designation commands, or these collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values for the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern. Then, a value designating a jackpot and a value designating the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the designation command, and control is performed to send this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value designating the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control is performed to send this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

<Fluctuation pattern>
The contents of the fluctuation patterns and how the fluctuation patterns are determined will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each fluctuation pattern is managed by a main fluctuation number and is composed of a combination of a front fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a front fluctuation and a back fluctuation pattern that is a back fluctuation, and each combination contains different contents. The front fluctuation pattern corresponds to the front fluctuation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 10, and the back fluctuation pattern corresponds to the back fluctuation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 10.

[Main side front fluctuation pattern]
11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or SP first half) (a reach that ends in a normal reach or SP first half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (SP second half development) (a reach that develops into an SP second half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after entering a reach state).

Previous variation number 7 is a previous variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. A pseudo variation is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then resumed from the start of the variable display (variable display) until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Such a performance in which pseudo variations are repeated is also called a pseudo consecutive. By executing a pseudo consecutive, a variable display based on one reserved memory can be made to look like multiple variable displays to the player in a pseudo manner. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display". Previous variation number 8 is a previous variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) is executed after one pseudo variation. Previous variation number 9 is a previous variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or first half of SP) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (second half of SP development) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

[Main side rear fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive, but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Later change number 5 is a later change pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and becomes a miss state). Later change number 6 is a later change pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach but becomes a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 7 is a later change pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach but becomes a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 8 is a later change pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach but becomes a miss state in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

[Determination of subsequent fluctuation pattern]
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 8. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When there is only one reserved memory after consumption, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is two, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 2, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

If the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 14, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 8. Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

[Determination of previous fluctuation pattern]
15 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of random 5 determination values that differ according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number that is determined also differs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, then the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, then the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, then the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

[Total variation pattern]
Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Figs. 13 to 15, the fluctuation pattern becomes one of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 16.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of the lottery of the presentation pattern on the sub side. As shown in Figure 17, the presentation control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the presentation pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B miss pattern performance. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B hit pattern performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B miss pattern performance. When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B hit pattern performance.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
18 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to judge in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors to judge whether the recovery condition can be satisfied.

When the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes a restoration process (step S4) and then executes a setting confirmation process (step S5). The restoration process in step S4 causes the CPU 103 to set a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when the power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, a specific image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a specific sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of Fig. 19. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the special state has been entered) that is supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes a process of making settings to change the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol started to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less, or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to a probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the processing of step S59, the start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special pattern process is completed.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether the special pattern process is being performed on the first special pattern or the second special pattern) (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special pattern pointer (step S1006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 indicated by the special pattern pointer based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads out Random R (random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot, and if they match, determines that there is a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining whether or not there is a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, it performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, it performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not to set the stopped symbol in the special symbol as a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a front fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the front fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the selected front fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of the random 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (front fluctuation pattern and rear fluctuation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in Fig. 24, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). When the variation time timer does not time out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big win flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), is set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display that results in a miss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the time-saving counter value is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 26, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by -1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in the RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
27 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
28 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in Fig. 28, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time at which the image display device 5 notifies the user that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the high probability flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step S1707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the high probability flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (step S1705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Performance control main processing)
When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main process. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 30 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing processing for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, in the effect setting process of step S7106, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a jackpot (inciting whether or not it is a jackpot). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. 128 (r41) described later as an effect suggesting a jackpot (inciting whether or not it is a jackpot). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not it will develop into a final reach based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into a final reach, specifies whether or not it is a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect based on the result of whether or not it is a jackpot, and if so, the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) if executed. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the variation pattern command and the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control contents of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance patterns in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the change in the performance patterns begins to when the final performance pattern is stopped and displayed, the display operation in a reach performance, the display operation due to a pseudo consecutive performance, and the display operation in a preview performance.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the switching timing of the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variable pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing in the right direction, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 30 of the special symbol LED board 20 and the right-hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This will encourage the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending performance following the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) of fluctuations that are controlled to the time-saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 30, and the right-hit display unit 55. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to improve the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. If the result of the second special game is that the special game 2 variable display section 22 shows a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 30, and right-hit display unit 55 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 30, and the right-hit display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 30, and right-hit display unit 55 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

<Flow of the production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, a notification effect is executed from the start of the variable display until the variable display stops. The notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the variation of the special chart and the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The notification effect is formed of a plurality of parts of effects, and in this embodiment, includes a start part, an instigation part, a winning epilogue part, a losing epilogue part, a role operation part, a relief winning part, a re-draw part, and a fanfare part. After the re-draw part, it becomes a fanfare part that is executed until the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. The instigation part is also called an introduction part. The winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are also collectively called an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part where the performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the variation starts to when the pseudo consecutive or normal reach is executed until the SP reach starts. The start part also includes variations that are not reach misses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The teasing part (introduction part) includes the start of the SP reach (also called super reach) (the start timing of the SP reach title display) to the timing of the branching off into a big win or a miss. The teasing part is a part that teases whether it will be a big win or a miss depending on the performance that is executed. The teasing part includes a part corresponding to the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, and a part corresponding to any of the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Note that the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP first half, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part which notifies the player that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a losing epilogue part which notifies the player that a losing display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a winning display result and the game will be controlled to a winning game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a losing display result and the game will not be controlled to a winning game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result may be made by moving the role when the win/loss notification is made after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, or by the story development on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using the role, as in the SP reach other than the final reach. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that notifies by moving the role is also called the win/loss notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the losing epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. The initial story development in the story presentation may suggest whether or not there is a win. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled by the operation of the jackpot game device by the hit/miss notification part (device operation part), and then, if a jackpot occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the jackpot game state will be controlled as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the miss epilogue part notifies that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. In this way, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes a hit/miss notification part and a hit epilogue part or a miss epilogue part that comes afterwards.

In addition, in response to SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. In response to SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. In response to SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and the missing epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. In response to SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and the missing epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. In response to SP final reach, the winning epilogue part of SP final reach and the missing epilogue part of SP final reach are executed.

[Role actor movement part]
The reel operation part is a part corresponding to the period during which the performance indicating the progression from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32. The reel operation part is executed after the provocation part of the SP first half reach A or the provocation part of the SP first half reach B. After the reel operation part, either the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, or the provocation part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Relief part]
The rescue hit part is a part where a rescue hit performance is executed that initially appears to be a miss and then suggests a big hit. The rescue hit part may develop from any of the miss epilogue parts of the SP latter half reach A, the miss epilogue parts of the SP latter half reach B, or the miss epilogue parts of the SP final reach.

[Re-draw part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part in which the big win display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is executed after the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, and the rescue winning part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, rescue winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery performance part is not shifted to. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the rescue part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the re-lottery part may not be executed when a probability variation pattern (an odd number pattern indicating a probability variation) is derived as the big win display result.

[Relationship before and after the decision]
Next, an example of a case where a series of performances is divided by the timing before and after the hit/miss determination will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the hit/miss determination, the SP first half reach A big hit, and the SP final reach big hit. Here, the hit/miss determination is a performance that indicates a branch of whether the result will be a big hit or a miss display result at the final stage of the hype part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the hit/miss determination at the timing before and after the hit/miss determination from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. The part before the hit/miss determination includes a start part and a hype part. In addition, the part after the hit/miss determination includes an epilogue part (hit, miss), a relief hit part, and a re-draw part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is made up of multiple parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of the SP reach (start of post-fluctuation). In such a case, the period before the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the pre-fluctuation described above, and the period after the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post-fluctuation described above.

Next, using Figure 34 (B), we will explain the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the instigation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the win/loss determination. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the win/loss determination. Then, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is from the win/loss determination to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the variation pattern of a SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is set to 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) to 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) to 15 seconds, and the re-draw part to 20 seconds.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34 (C). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the provocation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the development of the second half of the SP. Then, the provocation part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. Then, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, the fluctuation pattern for the SP final reach jackpot is set so that the start part is 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the teasing part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is 30 seconds, and the re-draw part is 20 seconds.

As shown in Figures 34 (B) and (C), the SP Final Reach, which has a higher expectation than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer fluctuation time. Also, the SP Final Reach, which has a higher expectation than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer total teasing part time and epilogue part time. This means that the higher the expectation of the fluctuation, the longer the period of excitement for the player can be, and the longer the afterglow time when a hit is achieved, which enhances the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in the series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using the scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script summarizing the content of each scene in the series of performances. The scenario for each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the performance mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. The contents of the performances executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamps 9 will be described in detail using diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later. Below, the correspondence between the diagrams for explaining the scenarios for each part and the diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later, will be explained.

Figure 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 55 to 61 described later. Figure 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 62 to 67 described later. Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 68 to 69 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 70 to 71 described later.

Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 72 to 77 described later. Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 78 to 80 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 81 to 82 described later. Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development). The scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development) corresponding to number 8 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 83 described later.

Figure 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 84 to 96, which will be described later. Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 99 to 100, which will be described later.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 101 to 109, which will be described later. Figure 44 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 113 to 114, which will be described later.

Figures 45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the stimulating part (SP final reach). The scenario of the stimulating part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 115 to 132 described later. Figure 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 133 to 136 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 137 to 138 described later. Figure 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the rescue winning part. The scenario of the rescue winning part corresponding to number 18 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 139 to 140 described later.

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 141 to 156 described later. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 157 to 159 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 160 described later. Figure 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving even symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario for the re-draw part (deriving an even number after pressing a button) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIG. 161 to FIG. 163, which will be described later. The scenario for the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/extinguishing one or more lamps (LEDs) among the multiple lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/extinguishing a lamp such as an LED by the performance control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120 in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store brightness data tables in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data tables include an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used in each part during the SP reach (such as the instigation part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, and role operation part), and a background brightness data table.

The background brightness data table further includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare performance is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending performance is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability variable background brightness data table used in a high probability high base state (probability variable state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and probability variable state, the game is controlled to. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and the game progresses to an SP reach, it uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and the game progresses to an SP reach, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the game returns to the normal state after the SP reach ends, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when a jackpot is hit and the game progresses to a fanfare state, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to an SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

For example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game state returns to the SP Reach state, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP reach, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error in preference to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

<Lighting status of the game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting state of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 53 and 54. Figures 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms such as "off," "almost off," "on," and "flashing" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, role lamp 9A, left panel lamp 9B, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H. Also, as mentioned above, the state of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" is also referred to as the "lighting state."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) data defined as the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A is "0000", the reel lamp 9A is "off". Also, when the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A (RRRR data) is "1111", the reel lamp 9A is lit in red with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the reel lamp 9A when the RRRR data is "1111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the board left lamp 9B is "00000", the board left lamp 9B is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B when the WWWWW data is "11111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacca lamp 9E is "000", the attacca lamp 9E is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "111", the attacca lamp 9E is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacca lamp 9E when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacca lamp 9F is "000", the V attacca lamp 9F is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "111", the V attacca lamp 9F is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the V attacca lamp 9F when the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric choke lamp 9H is "000", the electric choke lamp 9H is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric choke lamp 9H is "111", the electric choke lamp 9H is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric choke lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that the brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA," the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit," and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA," the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit," and in this particular case, because the brightness is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the reel lamp 9A is "AAAA", the reel lamp 9A is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the reel lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the board left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacca lamp 9E "turns on", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the attacca lamp 9E turns on brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacca lamp 9F "turns on", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the V attacca lamp 9F turns on brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric lamp 9H "turns on", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the electric lamp 9H turns on brightly.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on", and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

<Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during a game will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 164. In this embodiment, the performance when any one of the main variable numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. 33, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part (2) of the SP first half reach A, and the miss epilogue part (4) of the SP first half reach A, or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part (5) of the SP first half reach B, and the miss epilogue part (7) of the SP first half reach B.

When the variation pattern of main variation number 12 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach A miss epilogue part (11), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B miss epilogue part (14). ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the hype part of the SP first half reach B (5), the device operation part (8), the hype part of the SP second half reach A (9), and the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B (14), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the hype part of the SP first half reach B (5), the device operation part (8), the hype part of the SP second half reach B (12), and the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B (14).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 15 is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17), or the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), and SP first half reach A winning epilogue part (3), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach A winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13). ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach winning epilogue part (16), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach winning epilogue part (16).

The figure also shows the state of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the sound effects output from the speakers 8L, 8R. Note that in this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. Also, in the example of the total variation pattern, the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue hit part is omitted, but the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue hit part will also be explained. Note that since the variation time is longer in the case of a hit than in the variation pattern of a miss, the rescue hit part, which appears to be a miss but is actually a hit, may use that variation time to execute the effect of the rescue hit part.

[Direction in the starting part]
The presentation mode in the start part will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when variable display (changing display) starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a flying girl named Yume Yume-chan is displayed as the character that appears in the change during the normal game state. Yume Yume-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1.

When the variation starts, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. During the variable display, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R as appropriate, but the sound effects are only shown in some of the drawings. The lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, is referred to as "yellow background lighting." The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, and hazy lighting, as described with reference to Figures 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following explanations.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols reach a reach state where they temporarily stop at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the center symbol. The "NEXT" symbol stops, indicating that the second pseudo variation will begin. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Note that "flashing" here includes the lamp repeatedly turning on and off, as explained with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, and this also applies to the following explanation. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the letters "x2" are displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), the re-change is performed as the second change of the pseudo-change. The letters "x2" are displayed in small letters in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that this is the second variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with a yellow background. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the reach state is reached, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the middle symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates that the third change of the pseudo-change will start. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-change is performed as the third variable display. In the upper left corner of the screen, the letters "x3" are displayed in small letters to indicate that this is the third variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with the background lit yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), a "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state called reach tenpai. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen goes dark while the middle pattern remains variable in the reach tenpai state. When the background starts to darken, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter simply referred to as the shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yume Yume's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yume Yume character layer. High priority means that the image layer is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed closing from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. The shutter image makes it impossible to see the image behind the shutter. Also, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed as shown in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually decreasing in brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter closes further and the screen brightness drops below that at time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed at (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 drops further from that at time (a10) and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter closes further and the screen brightness drops below that at time (a11). In the state where the shutter is closed at (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 drops further from that at time (a11) and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually drops from (a10) to (a12) so that, for example, the relationship is (a10) 75% > (a11) 50% > (a12) 25%. Also, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually drops from (a10) to (a12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter closes completely. With the shutter in the closed state at (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59 (a14) to (a15). With the shutter remaining closed at (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a13).

After that, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60. When the shutter is open at (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to (a16). When the shutter is open at (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to (a17). When the shutter is open at (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) so that the relationship is, for example, (a16) 25% < (a17) 50% < (a18) 75%. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is fully opened, a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter is open at (a19), the screen brightness is 100%. Also, when the shutter is open at (a19), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Note that it may be "almost turned off" instead of "turned off". Also, when it is determined to move to the SP first half reach B as the shutter opens, a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach B is displayed. If SP first half reach A is executed from the (a19) state, the performance will transition to that of Figure 62 (b1), and if SP first half reach B is executed from the (a19) state, the performance will transition to that of Figure 72 (e1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach A)]
With reference to Figures 62 to 67, the presentation in the teasing part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume Yume, an ally character, chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP first half reach A), a story unfolds in which Yume Yume will win if she can catch Bakuchu, and will lose if she cannot.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach A is executed, the title "Catch Bakuchu!" corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP first half performance that will be executed. When the title display of (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing an enemy character called Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display of (b2) is erased, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Also, when the image related to the title display of (b2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. When the enemy character of (b3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), an image of a confrontation between friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b6), the subtitle "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found." In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red, corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume Yume, an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b7), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!". Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Then, as shown in (b8), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking the line "Too". Then, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the room background is displayed on the screen. In the room background state of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait" is displayed on the Yume Yume chasing screen. In addition, Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green in response to Yume Yume speaking. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Tatatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, along with part of Yume Yume's hand, and the screen changes to one in which Bakuchu runs away from Yume Yume. As shown in (b13), on the screen in which Bakuchu is running away, a subtitle "I won't get caught!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!". In addition, the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta ta ta ta" is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (b13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image is displayed of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yume-chan on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output as an artificial sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) to accompany the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white to indicate that Bakuchu is jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b15), on the Bakuchu up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red to indicate the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), the ally character Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b16), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Then, as shown in (b17), an image of Yume Yume jumping and pounces on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), on the Yume Yume Jump screen, Yume Yume's line "Got it!" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (b17), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen in which Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed at the time of deciding whether or not the win has been determined is displayed. Also, in the scene before the win/loss decision in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the win/loss decision scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the win/loss decision, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for winning/loss decision. If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a big win in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (c1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a miss in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (d1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a development to the latter half of the SP reach, the performance transitions to (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (first half of the SP Reach A)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 68 (c1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume catching the tail of a Bakuchu with her hand is displayed. Also, in the state of catching a Bakuchu in (c1), the physical sound of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu, "Bam!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the state of catching a Bakuchu in (c1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a white lighter than the white light of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Easy win!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Easy win!". Also, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to indicate a big win. Hereinafter, the smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (c4), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a bright white color. After that, as shown in (c5), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the pattern display state of (c5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (c6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (c5). In the two pattern (normal size) state of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 70 to 71. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's failure to catch the Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 70 (d1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu, "Skatch", is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, kneels in disappointment while Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (td1) showing the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach B)]
With reference to Figures 72 to 77, the presentation in the hype part (SP first half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Boingo face off in hockey. In the hype part (SP first half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Yume Yume beats Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if she loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach B is executed, the title "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance of the SP first half that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. When the screen is cracked and the title display is erased in (e2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the appearance of the opponent characters is displayed, in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. When the opponent character appears in (e3), the game effect lamp 9 is lit green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume Yume, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the left side of the game effect lamp 9 where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume. Also, the right side of the game effect lamp 9 where Boingo is displayed lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo. Also, when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e6), the subtitle "Come on!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yume Yume, an ally character, shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen during Yume Yume's turn, Yume Yume's line "Yaaa~" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume turn state of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume's line. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck shot by Yume Yume is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the puck display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice corresponding to the physical sound "shoo" of the puck moving. Then, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yume Yume's puck is displayed. Also, in the Boingo blocking state of (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying through the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) of flying through the puck, the physical sound of the puck spinning, "Shuururu," is output. Also, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image of the enemy character Boingo hitting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), on the screen during Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Also, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Also, in the puck display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the physical sound of the puck moving, "shoo."

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yume Yume receives damage by receiving the puck directly, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed. As shown in (e13), in the Yume Yume damage state, Yume Yume's line "Wow" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same content as (e13). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), Yume Yume is damaged, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same manner as in (e14). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e16), the background music is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, in which the state of Yume Yume receiving damage is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the win/loss determination. Since the scene before the win/loss determination is muted, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene of the win/loss determination. If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a big hit from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (f1). If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a miss from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (g1). If it is determined that the game will progress from state (e17) to the second half of the SP Reach, the game will transition to the performance shown in (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (first half of SP Reach B)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 80. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's victory over Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 78 (f1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume hitting back the puck is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume attack state of (f1) where Yume Yume attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle "Go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Go!". Also, in the Yume Yume attack state of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17), in response to Yume Yume attacking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yume Yume's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), when Boingo is attacked, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating a big win. Also, in the state of (f2), a background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of a Yume Yume victory is displayed, in which Yume Yume pumps her fist and Boingo falls down. As shown in (f3), when Yume Yume victory is displayed, a subtitle display "Easy win!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

Then, as shown in (f4), the image of the dream victory is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in rainbow (smooth). Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (f5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Then, as shown in (f6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). In the pattern display state of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (f6). In the (f7) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) state.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's defeat by Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 81 (g1), in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, an image of Yume Yume being blown away by Boingo's attack is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state where Yume Yume is blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yume Yume being blown away further than in the state of (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in disappointment while Boingo smiles. As shown in (g3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) which indicate the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (g5) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance during the role action part (later development)]
With reference to Figure 83, the presentation mode in the reel action part (later development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B develops into any of the latter half SP reaches among SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP strongest reach, the movable body 32 as the reel moves. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the reel's fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (h1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the reel's fall.

After that, in the state (h2), the reel falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state (h3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. From the state (h3), a performance in which the reel rises is executed. If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP second half reach A after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (i1). If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP second half reach B after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (n1). If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP final reach after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (r1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to Figures 84 to 96, the presentation in the teasing part (SP latter half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume Yume and Jam chase enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP latter half reach A), a story unfolds in which if Yume Yume and Jam can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, but if Yume Yume and Jam cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a miss.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the teasing part where SP latter half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to SP latter half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP latter half reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan (the characters on the left side) and the enemy character Bakuchu, facing each other in the center of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white on the left side where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. In addition, when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP latter half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle "I won't let you get away!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't let you get away!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu's character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up white corresponding to the two characters Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu's line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!". In the Jam-chan display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!". In the Yume-Yume display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-Yume speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Bring it on!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Bring it on!". In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam's line "Wait!". In the Jam chasing state of (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, which corresponds to Jam speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Also, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen chasing Jam. As shown in (i12), the sound of Jam-chan's footsteps "Zzzzzzz" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Jam-chan. Additionally, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i13), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Jam-chan. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the Jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the unable to catch Bakuchu state of (i16), the subtitle "I can't catch it" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch it". Also, in accordance with the image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Jam-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output. Also, in the (i16) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume Yume is displayed, the subtitle "I'm next!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'm next!". In the Yume Yume display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume taking action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume Yume. Also, as shown in (i21), the sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazz" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. Additionally, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i22), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Tatatatata," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yume Yume jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the Yume Yume jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the unable to catch Bakuchu state of (i25), a subtitle display "I can't catch it" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "I can't catch it". Also, in accordance with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output. Also, in the state of (i25) where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yume Yume and Jam, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two allies are displayed, a subtitle "Two people next!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Two people next!". In the state of displaying two allies in (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume Yume up state in (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is displayed enlarged on the left side of the screen, and Yume-Yume-chan is displayed enlarged on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), when Yume-Yume and Jam-chan are up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green, corresponding to Yume-Yume-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image is displayed of Yume-Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i29), when the two are chasing each other, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white, corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yume Yume and Jam on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen continues to be displayed. In (i30), an image is displayed in which the two are closer to Bakuchu than in (i29). As shown in (i30), the physical sounds of Yume Yume and Jam's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," are output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the state of the two chasing each other in (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Then, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pounces on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Also, in the Jam Jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i33), in the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yume Yume-chan jumping and pouncing on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume Yume-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yume Yume Jump screen. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of both Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait!" is displayed. In the two-person jump state (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 1. In the two-person jump state of (i36), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 2. In the two-person jump state of (i37), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 3. In the two-person jump state of (i38), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the scene advances to the pre-decision scene where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping, and still image 4 is displayed. In the pre-decision scene of (i39), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the decision of whether or not the winner is determined. As the sound is muted in the scene before the decision of whether or not the winner is determined, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for deciding whether or not the winner is determined. If it has been determined from the (i39) state that there will be a jackpot in the second half of the SP Reach A, the performance transitions to (j1). If it has been determined from the (i39) state that there will be a miss in the second half of the SP Reach A, or that there will be a rescue hit, the performance transitions to (k1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 97 to 98. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 97 (j1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed of Yume Yume and Jam catching the tail of a Bakuchu with their hands. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the physical sound of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu, "Bam!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting state of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yume Yume, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam sitting on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Too bad!" corresponding to Jam's line "Too bad!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating that a jackpot has been hit. Also, in the state of (j2), background music for a hit is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yume Yume, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam sitting on the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (j4), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (j4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). In the pattern display state of (j5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (j5). In the two pattern (normal size) state of (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 100. The miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 99 (k1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume Yume and Jam fail to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the onomatopoeic sound of failure to catch "Skatch" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting mode of (i39), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (k2), the Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Ushishishi!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Ushishishi!" is displayed on the Bakuchu up screen. In the Bakuchu up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tk1) showing the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, who were unable to catch the Bakuchu, kneel down in disappointment. As shown in (k3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tk1) showing the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (k5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. While the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background pattern, which is the same as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it is determined that a rescue win will occur from the (k5) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to Figures 101 to 109, the presentation in the hype part (SP latter half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against an enemy character, a crab robot. In the hype part (SP latter half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan's crab robot beats Boingo, it will be a big win, but if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the teasing part where the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekishin Robo Battle", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP second half that will be executed. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot probability for this reach. Note that this display indicating the expected jackpot probability may be displayed in other SP reaches. When the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (the characters on the left) and the enemy character, a crab robot, is displayed. As shown in (n2), a subtitle display "I won't lose!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "I won't lose!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in white in response to the two characters uttering their lines. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the crab character. Also, when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP second half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character, a crab, shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab's attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the words "Kyaa!" spoken by the two allies is displayed. In the state where the two are running away of (n4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan run into a depression in the rocks to escape the crab's beam. In the state of two people jumping in (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image is displayed in which the beam passes over the rocks. In the state of the beam passing in (n6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan look relieved in the shadow of the rocks. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Haa haa" corresponding to Jam's line "Haa haa" is displayed on the screen in which the two are relieved. In the state of confrontation in (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in pink in response to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle "It's your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with the technique called Delta Break is displayed. Also, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the crab uttering the line "Grrr". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white in response to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice in response to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" is displayed, which corresponds to the lines of the two allies saying "Kyaa!". In the state where the two are running away in (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state in (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being hit by the crab's beam and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state where the two are receiving damage in (n15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the two receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of the damaged Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two stand up, a subtitle "It's about to begin!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies "It's about to begin!" In the state where the two stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Nana up state in (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen is displayed where Nana-chan is praying. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a performance to confuse the enemy. Also, in the Nana Prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab becoming confused due to Nana's prayer is displayed. Also, in the crab confused state of (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the crab's confused movement. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab getting angry after recovering from confusion is displayed. In the crab angry state of (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attacking state of (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana being attacked by a crab and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state of Nana receiving damage in (n22), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to Jam's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed on the screen of Jam remote control operation. Also, in the state of Jam remote control operation in (n23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple in response to Jam speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the state of Jam remote control operation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), a performance in which a hand comes out of the sky is executed. As shown in (n25), when the hand comes out of the sky, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), when the hand goes to catch a crab, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, in which an enlarged image of a crab and a hand is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (n27), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the win/loss determination. Since the scene before the win/loss determination is muted, it is easy to understand that it is a branching scene for the win/loss determination. If it has been determined that a jackpot will occur in the SP latter half reach B from the state of (n27), the performance transitions to (o1). From the (n27) state, if it is determined that there will be a miss in the second half of the SP, Reach B, or that there will be a rescue hit, the performance will move to (p1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 112. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan's victory over the crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the epilogue part of the winning round in the second half of the SP, Reach B, an image of a hand reaching down from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the screen where the crab is caught displays a subtitle "You got me" corresponding to the crab's line "You got me". Also, in the crab catching state of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (tn27) which indicates the lighting state of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab set up as the store's signboard is displayed. Also, in the state of (o2) where the crab has become the store's signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has occurred. Also, in the state of (o2), background music for a win is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle "Nice sign" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Nice sign" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o3), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard, and continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle "Work hard" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o4), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), the image of the store with a crab as its signboard is displayed as a still image in a comic-style style. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow pattern (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (o6), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (o6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the pattern display state of (o7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in normal size. In the state of two patterns (normal size) of (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach B)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 113 and 114. The failure epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by a crab robot, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the failed epilogue part of the SP's second half Reach B, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. Also, in the crab-cannot-be-caught state of (p1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the failure to catch the crab. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab-running state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who have been escaped by the crab, looking down in disappointment is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "What a shame" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies saying "What a shame". Also, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) which shows the lighting state of (p1).

After that, the screen goes dark as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). In the dark screen state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (p5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the state of (p5), the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP final reach)]
With reference to Figures 115 to 132, the presentation in the teasing part (SP final reach) will be described. The teasing part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP final reach), a story unfolds to tease that if the six can catch Bakuchu, they will win, but if the six cannot catch Bakuchu, they will lose. The teasing part (SP final reach) is also the reach with the highest chance of winning of all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the teasing part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach, "Six people, catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), an image of a confrontation between the six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yume-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu, facing each other in the center of the screen, is displayed. On the screen where the characters are confronting each other, the lines of the six friendly characters, "This is the last one," are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in white in response to the six characters uttering lines. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side is lit in red in response to the Bakuchu character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line "I'm going to run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side is lit in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange corresponding to AD's line. After that, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "Watch me" corresponding to Maid A's line "Watch me" is displayed. In the Maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue corresponding to Maid A's line. After that, as shown in (r6), when maid B is displayed, the subtitle "I'll do my best" is displayed, which corresponds to maid B's line "I'll do my best." In the maid B display state of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes Hawaiian blue, corresponding to maid B speaking the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'm going to catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display in (r7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "No problem" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "No problem" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display in (r8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everyone's going!" is displayed. In the state of Yume-chan display in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's line being spoken.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Come on, anyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Come on, anyone!". In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Maid A's line "Wait!". In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to Maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait, wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!". In the (r12) AD & Maid A chasing state, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes orange to indicate that the AD character is speaking. The right game effect lamp 9 flashes blue to indicate that the maid A character is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchuu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display "Will you catch me?" corresponding to Bakuchuu's line "Will you catch me?" is displayed. Also, the sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchuu escaping in (r13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchuu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchuu escaping and running away from the screen is displayed. Also, the sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchuu escaping in (r14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up red. After that, as shown in (r15), a city background is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when an image of Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Nana chasing state of (r16), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the Maid B & Nana chasing state of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes Hawaiian blue in response to Maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink in response to Nana's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Whoa!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Whoa!". In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escaping in (r18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when an image of Yume Yume chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Wait!". In the Yume Yume chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume Yume and Jam chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!". In the Yume Yume & Jam chasing state of (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Yikes!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "That's bad!" is displayed. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, in the state of Bakuchu escaping of (r23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to indicate that Bakuchu is escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), in a scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as the AD's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where the maid A's character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as the maid A's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the character of maid B is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, which corresponds to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), when Nana-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana-chan's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam's character is shown up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam's voice, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Yume Yume's voice, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image showing a close-up of the faces of the six characters is displayed on the split screen. As shown in (r36), when the close-up image of the six allies is displayed, the subtitle "This is the last time!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the six allies "This is the last time!". Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r36), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the close-up image of the six allies continues to be displayed. Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r37), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed against the background of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is displayed in an enlarged form. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu up is displayed, the subtitle "Yabe!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabe!!!" is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed with a concentration line superimposed on the image of the explosive chocolate up. Also, in the explosive chocolate up + button display state of (r40), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white. After that, if the player operates the button within the button operation effective period, a cut-in display of Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, the three main characters of the pachinko game machine 1, is displayed on the screen as shown in (r41). A cut-in display is a presentation in which another image is displayed by interrupting a displayed image. Also, the color of the cut-in display can indicate the probability of a jackpot. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the probability of a jackpot is higher than if it is green. Also, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is cleared, an image of six people jumping at the explosive chu is displayed. Also, when the cut-in display is cleared in (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), when the screen shows six allies, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in (r44), when the screen shows explosive chu, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), when the explosive chu is displayed larger than in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r45), the subtitle "I've got you cornered!" is displayed, corresponding to the six allies' lines "I've got you cornered!". Also, in the state of (r47) where six allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of the six allies are displayed alternately. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathering in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathering more in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r50) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), an image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. When the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output to encourage the player to operate the game. Also, when the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with the words "Pull!". The time gauge is smaller than in (r51). When the pull-out display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in (r53), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with the words "Pull!". The time gauge is smaller than in (r52). When the pull-out display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the winning or losing decision is reached, where an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4. At this time, the image of the Bakuchu is superimposed with the words "Draw!" along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased compared to (r53). In the state where the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. If it has been determined from the (r54) state that the SP final reach will result in a big win, the performance transitions to (s1). If it has been determined from the (r54) state that the SP final reach will result in a miss or a rescue win, the performance transitions to (u1).

[Performance in the winning epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 133 to 136. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which the story of six people catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the drop of the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when developing into the latter half of the SP reach. In addition, this effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in response to the drop of the reel.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the reel falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state of (s3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. A performance in which the reel rises from the state of (s3) is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the reel rises, a scene in which Yume-Yume-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to the Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in state (s4), the winning background music is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Good job, everyone!". In the Bakuchu catching state of (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed. In the Bakuchu catching state of (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed in a comic-style still image. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (s8), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (s8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (s9), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). In the pattern display state of (s9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced from the state of (s9). In the (s10) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the failed epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. The failure epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which the story unfolds in which the six players fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu escaping state of (u1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to not being able to catch Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed of the Bakuchu running away far away, and the six players who were unable to catch Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "Sorry~" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Sorry~". As shown in (u2), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the (u4) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the rescue part]
The presentation in the rescue hit part will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 140. The rescue hit part is a part where a story of rescue performance that becomes a big hit develops after the development of a losing story. In the rescue hit part, a premium character corresponding to rescue (revival) named Drum-kun, who did not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the rescue hit part, a rescue effect is executed in which a character called Drum-kun is displayed on the screen. By seeing Drum-kun, the player can recognize that it is a revival hit disguised as a miss. In the rescue effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, the screen goes white out as shown in (v3). In the white out of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (v3), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (v3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). In the pattern display state of (v4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (v5), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the two pattern (normal size) state of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 141 to 156, the flow of a series of performances from the detailed performance of the symbol output in the fanning performance to the button operation in the re-draw performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the "222" pattern is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (A1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-pattern reduced state of (A3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a further reduced size. In the two symbol reduced state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two symbol normal size state of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery performance starts. In the (A6) state, a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal positions to the top. In the two symbol shaking state of (A6), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

Here, the period during which the symbols are shaking is omitted from the state (A5) to the state (A6). Specifically, the symbols are shaking when they are normal size. After they become normal size, the symbol shaking for the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol release (for example, including the timing just before the symbol becomes normal size, the timing after the symbol becomes normal size, and the timing when the symbol shaking starts), the game effect lamp 9 switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting up in rainbow colors. This allows the smooth symbol release from the symbol release to the re-draw performance, the smooth transition to the shaking period, and the celebration of the symbol alignment to be performed by the illumination of the screen and lamps. After that, during the symbol shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbol has moved downward from the normal position is displayed. During the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the pattern shaking period, a screen with the pattern displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), in the state of two-pattern shaking, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (A9), during the period when the movement due to the re-draw performance starts, the two patterns are displayed smaller than in the state of (A8). In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), the two patterns are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, the numbers used as decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), and the display is switched. When the display is switched, the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, and the decorative symbols are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), symbol 2 is displayed lightly during high speed fluctuation. In the state of fluctuation of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, in the state of 3 symbols in (A12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, from FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the symbols are switched while fluctuating at high speed, such as symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, symbol 7, and symbol 1, and light and clear displays are repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, in Fig. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started with the 2 symbols has completed one cycle and the 2 symbols are displayed clearly again, the button image and the time gauge are faintly displayed under the 2 symbols. After that, as shown in Fig. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed while the 2 symbols are displayed faintly during the high-speed fluctuation. From then on, from Fig. 149 (A26) to Fig. 156 (A46), the symbols are switched while fluctuating at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbols, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols, and the faint and clear displays are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From Fig. 148 (A24) to Fig. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, when push button 31B is operated from the (A46) state, if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be generated, the display will transition to (B1). When push button 31B is operated from the (A46) state, if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be generated, the display will transition to (C1).

[Performance in the re-draw part (odd number pattern derived after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 157 to 160, the performance in the re-selection part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated in the re-selection performance until odd symbols are derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "333", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the 3-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the pattern combination "333" is displayed larger than in the state of (B1). In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the pattern combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the 3-pattern reduced state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the three symbol reduced state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the three symbol normal size state of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B6), the symbol combination "333" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (B6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the three symbol swing state of (B6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol swing period continues even in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background swing state of (B7), a screen in which the symbols have fallen downward from their normal positions is displayed. In the normal background shaking state (B7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern of "333" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (B8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the pattern fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting state of flashing rainbow colors. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting state of the fanfare state.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving even numbers after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 161 to 164, the performance mode in the re-selection part (deriving an even number symbol after a button operation) will be described. In Figures 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button operation is performed in the re-selection performance until an even number symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter and the "222" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (C1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-pattern reduced state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the two-symbol reduced state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two-symbol normal size state of (C5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and the symbol combination "222" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (C6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the two-symbol swing state of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol swing period continues even in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the screen shows the pattern lowered from its normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern of "222" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (C8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "222". During the pattern fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 is smoothly lit in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its smooth rainbow lighting. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the fanfare state.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in the Presentation Mode of the Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible when closed, and makes the image of the performance being performed visible when opened after closing. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is in a closing state, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is in a opening state, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes it possible to make the flow of the performance look favorable by making the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic. Note that the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, but an image other than the shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a role object.

(Start 6)
The shutters described above are designed to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal manner. The shutters may be designed to close from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. The shutters may be designed to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in Fig. 58, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in Fig. 58 (a12), and eliminates the sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in Fig. 60 (a16).

(Start 8)
As shown in Figures 60 and 61, after the shutter opens, the SP first half reach begins. Until the shutter is fully open, the SP first half reach effect does not begin, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and the SP first half effect progresses after the shutter is opened. This prevents dissatisfaction by the SP first half reach effect being executed before the shutter opens, since the SP first half reach effect is something that players want to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
Also, as shown in Fig. 57(a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is completely closed at the same time. If the brightness of the screen is lowered at the same time as the shutter closes, the speed at which the screen goes dark may be too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the brightness of the screen in advance, the speed at which the screen goes dark can be made appropriate, and the series of effects can be made to look good.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the shutter is opened. This allows the player to have high expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
The above-mentioned shutter effect may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development to the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo consecutive. Also, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating a change in the active reserved, which is the reserved display of the relevant variation, may be displayed, and the active reserved may change in response to the icon image (e.g., from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can improve the interest of the shutter effect.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, increasing the interest of the shutter effects.

(Incitement 1)
In addition, the provocation part, which is the aforementioned provocation of winning or losing, has a performance in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternate in their battles (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character takes damage. In addition, in such a provocation part, the image display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

(Incitement 2)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the lines of the friendly characters are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. This allows the friendly characters to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

(Incitement 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part, so that the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Incitement 4)
Also, as shown in Fig. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines while still displaying the subtitles of the ally character that is displayed first.

(Incitement 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned provocation part, there are SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which the ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the ally characters' lines are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to those lines are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be recognized in an appropriate manner in both provocation parts.

(Incitement 6)
In the above-mentioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the character Yume Yume plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, the characters Jam and Nana play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the first ally character Yume Yume speaks a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the first ally character Jam and Nana speak a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in each provocation part. The number of characters that play an active role may be one or more. The characters that play an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

(Incitement 11)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63 (b5) and (b6) above, there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is of a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

(Provocative cut-in 2)
127 (r39) to 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed appropriately.

(Teasing cut-in 3)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, a line is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that line. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, making for an ideal cut-in display.

(True or False 1)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the winning or losing was decided was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. And, in the winning or losing decision scene, the player was notified of whether or not it was a big win by operating the trigger as the operating means. Also, in the winning or losing decision scene, if it was a big win, the role-playing device moved after the trigger was operated. According to this, the interest of the presentation is improved by making the winning or losing decision scene suitable for using the operating means.

(True or False 2)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by ally characters, and then the effect that was being executed cannot be seen on the screen corresponding to the operation means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operation means. In this way, the introduction of the operation means is displayed on the entire screen to give an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed firmly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, making the progress of the effect look good.

(True or False 3)
As shown in Fig. 130 (r48) to Fig. 131 (r51) above, the presentation is in progress even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operation means are being displayed. By having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the presentation.

(True or False 4)
Also, in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54), when a trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moves slightly each time the image changes. In this way, the performance may be progressed while the promotion display is displayed. Here, the progress of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This allows attention to be drawn to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(5 correct or not)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the performance that was executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to pay attention to the prompting display for operating the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed can be set to progress slower than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is displayed. This allows a difference in the progress speed of the performance between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introduction image is displayed.

(True or False: 6)
It is also preferable to echo the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed as shown in Fig. 130 (r47) above. This makes it possible to get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(True or False: 7)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(14 correct or not)
In addition, from the above-mentioned FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if there is a big win, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the image of the losing epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period, one image can be reused, so that the winning/losing decision scene can be favorably stirred up while reducing the data capacity. Note that, during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39).

(16 correct answers)
Also, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which an image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning or losing, an image of the winning epilogue part is played if it is a big win, and an image of the losing epilogue part is played if it is a loss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the image appears to be moving is performed. This allows a series of performances to be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(18 correct or not)
In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the winning/losing decision scene shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and Figures 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, the image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the role-playing action. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that multiple images are switched after the winning/losing decision scene, it is possible to achieve a suitable flow of performance.

(Epilogue 1)
The aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a miss occurs, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the performance is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate performance to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of performances can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in Fig. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocative part. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (the scene where he catches a crab). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the provocative part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the feeling of celebration.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in (s5) to (s6) of FIG. 134, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of celebration can be emphasized. In addition, when displaying the subtitle display, the display may be designed so that the display period for the winning epilogue part is longer than that for the case where the number of characters is larger than that of the case where the number of characters is smaller. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), the display period for the subtitle display in the winning epilogue part may be designed to be longer.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in Fig. 134 (s6) to Fig. 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered by the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. Therefore, the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in Fig. 136 (s10) described above, when the symbol presentation is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background are still images. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see due to the background of the decorative symbol being animated.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the pattern release starts.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect like a comic strip. By adding a special effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is preferable that the subtitle display before the pattern display shown in Fig. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. However, the subtitle display displayed at other times may have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. In this way, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display other than the final one, it is possible to effectively switch, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the final subtitle display from being covered by a decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern display performance. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern, and can be a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the display of the decorative pattern is completed and the pattern is swinging up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative pattern. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. 158 (B5), when the re-draw part produces a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is given an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not given an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to increase the production effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern, while letting the player recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be changed again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be displayed in a synchronized manner.

(Re-draw performance 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release performance in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery performance as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to an off state. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-lottery performance, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, and the background and lamp are designed to switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance started from.

(Re-selection effect 6)
As shown in the above-mentioned flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5), in the re-lottery presentation, a symbol feed is performed with a reduced-sized decorative symbol, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a symbol release presentation is performed in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol that will be finally notified is enlarged and displayed from the moment the symbol is released. In this way, since the symbol that will finally be notified starts to be enlarged, it is possible to easily show the player what the final notification symbol will be.

(Re-draw performance 16)
The above-mentioned pattern display in the FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using approximately the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made approximately the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the game has not been promoted to the probability variation pattern. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, exactly the same.

(Re-draw performance 17)
In the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of performances is executed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then returned to the normal size at the center of the screen. This allows the series of pattern display performances to be displayed in a favorable manner by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

(Re-draw performance 18)
In the above-mentioned pattern display performance, the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use the same pattern display data. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity while making the pattern display performance look good. Note that the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use substantially the same data.

<Detailed explanation of the performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 165 to 191, the following will explain in detail the characteristics and variations of the above-mentioned presentation aspects that should be particularly mentioned.

[Regarding instigation 12, 13, and 15]
In Figure 165, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b11) to (b13) portions of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu. Also, in the (b11) state, Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as a physical sound.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Bakuchu is in front and Yume Yume-chan is in the back. From the player's perspective, their positions are such that Bakuchu is close by and Yume Yume-chan is far away. In contrast, the relationship in terms of volume is as follows: Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, the volume data is set so that the line sound of Yume Yume-chan, which is far away, is louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, which is closer.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right and front-back directions. In (b12), no dialogue sounds are output, and the physical sounds of Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output. The volume relationship is Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, when no dialogue sounds are output, the volume data is set so that the closer Bakuchu's footsteps are louder than the farther Yume Yume-chan's footsteps to match the front-to-back relationship on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. Also, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zzz za za" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata tata" are output as a physical sound. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is in front and Bakuchu is behind in the front-to-back direction. The positional relationship as seen by the player is such that Yume Yume-chan is close and Bakuchu is far away. In contrast, the relationship in volume is such that Bakuchu's line sound "I won't get caught!" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zzz za za" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata tata". In this way, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's lines, which are far away, are louder than Yume-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Incitement 12)
In the provocation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there is a scene where the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also called the operation sound) are output at the same time. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same time, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L, 8R. By outputting the physical sound as part of the presentation, the reality of the presentation is brought out, and by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player. As a result, the presentation in the provocation part can be made to look better.

(Incitement 13)
Here, the work process when various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are actually created will be described. First, an image for each effect corresponding to a variable time such as SP reach is created in the pachinko game machine 1. In accordance with this image, sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software. The completed image and sound are played, and the sound is further strengthened. In this series of work processes, sound data is set so that a sound that ignores the actual distance feeling that is easily conveyed to the player is output, abandoning reality, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual distance feeling on the image. This allows a series of effects to be displayed in an appropriate manner.

(Incitement 15)
In addition, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards reality and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Regarding Provocation 14 and 16]
In Figures 166 and 167, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in Fig. 166(A), the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and BGM for SP reach among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. The output volume levels have the relationship dialogue sounds>physical sounds (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. In addition, when these three sounds overlap, the way in which the sounds are output differs between dialogue sounds with subtitles and dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sounds with subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) are output at a timing when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of the BGM for the SP reach is controlled to be output at a lower volume. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sounds without subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (without subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of none of the sounds is changed while maintaining the relationship of dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > BGM for the SP reach.

(Incitement 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and outputted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, as shown in Fig. 166(B), the background music of the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player while creating a sense of reality.

(Incitement 16)
166(B) and (C), when comparing a case where the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles and a case where the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the BGM for the SP reach. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 167 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. Fig. 167 explains a method for effectively outputting volume using a method different from that of Fig. 166. In Fig. 167 and Fig. 166, the relationship of the output volume levels is the same, that is, dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. However, as shown in Fig. 167(B), when the physical sound of a character and the dialogue sound are output overlapping, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Incitement 16)
167(B) and (C), when there is a dialogue sound overlapping with a physical sound and there is a subtitle, the volume is adjusted to be louder only when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound. This makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by loudly outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About provocations 7 and 8]
In Figures 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, which corresponds to the AD. After that, as shown in (r25), when the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as the AD's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of maid A is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), when maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as the voice of maid A, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), when maid A leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

(Detailed explanation of (r28) to (r31))
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the character of maid B is in close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A's "Too!" is output as maid B's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), when maid B leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

After that, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, corresponding to Nana. After that, as shown in (r31), in a scene where Nana jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's spoken line, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in a scene where Nana leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when the Jam character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, which corresponds to Jam. After that, as shown in (r32), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), when Jam leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

After that, as shown in (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. At this time, "Oryah!" is output as Yume Yume's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), when Yume Yume leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the lines output are one-liners that seem to express enthusiasm. In these particular scenes, the scene changes faster than in other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the storyline compared to other scenes with subtitles. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Incitement 7)
As shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where the character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to preferably execute the effect corresponding to the character, and to preferably show the teasing part to the player.

(Incitement 8)
Also, as shown in FIG. 168 to FIG. 170, in the scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/blinks in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before the scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/blinks in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B character. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in pink corresponding to the character Nana-chan. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in green corresponding to the character Yume-Yume. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character, and then control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in the color corresponding to the character. Therefore, the change in the displayed character and the fact that the changed character is easily indicated to the player can be expressed by the lamp, making it a suitable entertainment part.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The characteristic parts of Figures 171 and 172 will be numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role operation in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the role in (b18) to (i1). In the scene before the winning or losing decision shown in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting state. After that, when the game progresses to the SP second half reach, the movable body 32 as the role operates. Specifically, the role falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen to the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in accordance with the start of the role fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the role fall.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Also, a reel-related sound corresponding to the falling of the reel is output as a sound effect. After that, in state (h3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (h2). In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (h4) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the retreating state (h4), the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP latter half reach A (teasing part) changes. After that, in the (h5) state, the reel rises further. In the (h5) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow.

Figure 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role operation in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the role rises further. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), the effect image displayed corresponding to the role becomes lighter when the role rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A begins to be faintly seen. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. In addition, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach, is output. Note that sound effects related to the title of the second half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the role rises further from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state of (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, in the (h9) state, the reel rises further. In the (h9) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h8) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (h9) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (h10) state, the reel rises further. In the (h10) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h9) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (h10) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (i1) state, the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of the SP second half Reach A is clearly displayed. In the (i1) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the reel is rising. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM of the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the latter half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the role switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the role, the "2" symbol is displayed in a reduced form in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the role operates, the role falls so that the "P" character among the letters of the role is located at a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the role falling, an effect image corresponding to the role action is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the role rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the role, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being unsightly due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the action of the role. In addition, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the rise of the reel, it is possible to switch to a suitable performance according to the reel action.

(Start 3)
As shown in Fig. 171, the effect image is displayed before the reel moves and reaches the bottom of the drop. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, allowing for a suitable switching of the performance with the reel.

(Start 4)
In addition, when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that develops in the latter half, an image related to the reel may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the reel rises, the word "POWER II" or images of the main characters Yume Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan may be displayed. In this way, by providing linkage when the performance is switched, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance that includes the reel.

[About Epilogues 7, 8, 10-14, and 20]
In Figures 173 to 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the accessory in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the winning/losing decision in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. In addition, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation prompt display for prompting the operation. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the movable body 32 as the accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting obliquely from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory falls in the winning/losing notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory falls in the scene that develops into the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), as the reel starts to fall, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when the reel develops into the latter half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the win/loss notification scene like (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene developing into the latter half of the SP is blue or red. Also, the effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors as the reel falls.

After that, in state (s2), the reel falls so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, in state (s3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (s2). In state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (s3-2) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. When changing from the (s3) state to the retreating state (s3-2), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation in the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part. After that, in the (s3-3) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-3) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

Figure 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role operation in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state (s3-4), the role rises further. In the state (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), the effect image displayed corresponding to the role becomes lighter when the role rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly seen. In the state (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. In addition, as a sound effect, a winning epilogue part corresponding sound, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output. After that, in the state (s3-6), the role rises further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In state (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, in the (s3-7) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-7) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (s3-6) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (s3-7) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, in the (s3-8) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-8) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (s3-7) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (s3-8) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, in the (s4) state, a scene in which Yume-Yume catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, a sound that indicates a successful performance is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line, "Uuu, I got it." In the (s4) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in Figs. 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the reel moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return action to the initial position.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the reel will perform an action to return to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be the timing during the ascent related to the timing of the start of the return action. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at the timing related to the start of the return action, the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel action ends before the reel returns to its initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and the aesthetics of the presentation are not impaired. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. Also, the reel may perform a rotation action or a movement action at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the sound effect, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 12)
The device may be adapted to output background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the background music and sound effects, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 13)
When the reel returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the reel returns to its initial position and the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This makes it possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a time when they are difficult to see, and to execute the epilogue part in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 14)
When the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound can be output in the epilogue display and subtitles can be displayed. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed appropriately.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIG. 173 to FIG. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel is changed to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. In FIG. 175, for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach, the number of lines of the character during the performance and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines are shown. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles.

In the case of SP first half reach B, there are 5 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles. In the case of SP second half reach A, there are 16 lines and 14 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

In the case of SP second half reach B, there are 9 lines and 7 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of SP final reach, there are 27 lines and 19 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP final reach, there are 2 lines and 2 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP final reach, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the lines of the characters in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the characters in the SP reach, which is the provocative part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles clearly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time is shorter, so that the auxiliary subtitle display does not interfere with the performance, and the primary focus is on conveying the performance by switching images. This allows for a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in Fig. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. This makes it possible to emphasize the sense of celebration by clearly showing what the characters are saying in the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are several types of SP reach, which is the provocative part, and each type has a different development of the performance and the number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character during the SP reach. According to this, in any SP reach that is executed, by displaying subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of celebration. In addition, since the screen is switched more frequently in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prioritize conveying the performance by switching images and prevent the performance from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. This allows a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

[About re-draw performances 1, 4, 5, 7 to 18]
In Figures 176 and 177, the characteristic parts of the re-selection part are numbered and explained.

(Details of the re-draw part)
Fig. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A1) to (A23) parts in the re-selection part. Fig. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A24) to (A46) parts in the re-selection part.

When the big win display result is derived, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, the pattern becomes normal size as shown in (A5). Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-draw performance and the re-draw performance starts. Here, the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted from the state (A5) to the state (A6). Specifically, the pattern is shaking when it is normal size. Then, after it becomes normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the pattern output (for example, including the timing just before it becomes normal size, the timing after it becomes normal size, the timing when the pattern shaking starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 switches from flashing white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. This allows for a smooth pattern appearance from the time the patterns are released until the re-draw performance, a smooth transition to the shaking period, and a celebration when the patterns line up, all through the illumination of the screen and lamps.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a period of oscillation in which the symbols oscillate up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol in the center is temporarily reduced in size. After that, high-speed oscillation occurs in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols from (A11) to (A23) are all displayed. After that, high-speed oscillation occurs again in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols from (A10') to (A23') are all displayed.

Then, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have completed two cycles, the button image is faintly displayed along with the initially displayed "2" symbol. Then, from (A25) to (A46), the decoration symbols change rapidly from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", to "1", while the time gauge displayed below the button image decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display that indicates the valid period for button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid button operation period ends, an odd number symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed as shown in Figs. 157 to 164, and the game moves to a jackpot.

(Re-draw performance 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the symbol-sending performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped at the start of the re-lottery performance, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-selection effect 4)
When the symbol transfer performance in the re-lottery performance starts, the decorative symbols that have been displayed since the winning epilogue part start to change from a reduced state. This makes it possible to show the flow of the series of performances well without executing a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

(Re-selection effect 5)
In the symbol forwarding performance, the movement starts with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the movement is a uniform reduced size. This makes it possible to make the movement during the symbol forwarding performance look smooth, and makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-draw performance 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then the symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of multiple types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of the series of performances can be made to look good by the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed without the final display result being displayed immediately.

(Re-selection effect 8)
In the symbol transfer performance in the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then all the decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, so that the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-draw performance 9)
In the symbol forwarding performance in the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it is temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched such as a "2" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "2" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0%, and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, since all symbols can be displayed with a low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to grasp what symbol is being sent.

(Re-draw performance 10)
In the symbol-transfer effect in the re-draw effect, all the decorative symbols are transmitted in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1." However, the time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

(Re-draw performance 11)
During the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed of a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position where it does not overlap with the position where the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to make the symbol forwarding easily visible to the player. Note that a part of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

(Re-draw performance 12)
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after all the decorative symbols in the symbol forwarding effect have been displayed twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol forwarding pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to recognize the symbol forwarding effect clearly.

(Re-draw performance 13)
In addition, the symbol at the start of the re-draw performance may be other than the 2 symbol. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt display is constant. For example, in the case of the 2 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt display is displayed is the timing at which the 2 symbol is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the 5 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt display is displayed may be the timing at which the 5 symbol is displayed again. In other words, regardless of which symbol starts the re-draw performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by making the control constant.

(Re-draw performance 14)
In the lottery performance, a pattern of displaying an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) and a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) are provided. In addition to this, a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) may be provided. In the performance of sending symbols from an odd number symbol to an odd number symbol, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbol is sent when sending symbols. However, in either pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol sending period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for a suitable re-lottery performance in either pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 15)
In the lottery performance, common data is used whether the pattern is an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol), an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3 symbol), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol), etc. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for a dedicated pattern, and reduces the amount of data.

[About provocations 21-27]
In Figures 178 to 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b4) to (b6) parts in the provocative part and a comparison diagram during the big win round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in where the display gradually becomes clearer, and a fade-out where the display gradually disappears. FIG. 178(A) describes a part of the performance with a fade effect applied in the provocative part, the SP first half reach A.

In the (b4) state, a screen is displayed in which Yume Yume and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is applied when the subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. Note that in the (b4') state, the sound of the line "I found you" is not output, and the sound of the line is output when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the (b5) state.

After that, as shown in (b5'), the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a fade-in effect on a layer below the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line with a 0% transparency, as shown in (b5''). Then, as shown in (b5"), the subtitle "Found it" and the subtitle "Found it" are both displayed with a 40% transparency. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a 0% transparency. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). In contrast, the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). In addition, in the (b5') and (b5'') states, the dialogue sound of "Found" is not output, but is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%, as in the (b6) state.

As shown in Figure 178 (B), during the jackpot round, an effect is executed in which the characters sing along with the music. For example, in Figure 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed in time with the song sung by Nana, saying "Someday I'll get it," followed by subtitles (lyrics) "I'll grab it with these little hands," in time with the song. When subtitles (lyrics) like this are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to tell when the subtitles (lyrics) are to be switched without a fade effect.

(Incitement 21)
In the provocative part, as shown in Fig. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. This makes it possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, by making it easier to understand the change in subtitles.

(Incitement 22)
As shown in Fig. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out and the second subtitle fades in and is displayed with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching over due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

(Modification of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at a timing where they overlap, the fade effect may be applied to one of the two subtitles instead of to both of them. Specifically, a pattern in which the fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is not applied to the second subtitle display may be considered. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the above-mentioned pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. In addition, when the fade effect is applied, the second subtitle display may be overlapped on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be overlapped under the first subtitle display.

Also, in the above, subtitles for lines of a first character and a second character are described as being displayed at the same time. However, when the same character speaks lines consecutively, the subtitles for the first line may be displayed so that they overlap with the subtitles for the second line. In such a case, a fade effect may be applied to the subtitle display.

(Incitement 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the big win round, a performance in which the character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progression of the song. However, during the big win round, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm while the music is playing, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without the fade effect, the timing of the switch is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the big win round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without the fade effect. This allows the task of applying the fade effect to be omitted during the big win round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(Relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for lines and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume Yume's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at a transparency of 70% one frame after the transparency of 100%. Furthermore, one frame after that, it is displayed at a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. The sound of the line "I found it" is not output during this period.

After that, while the sound of "I found it" is being output, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of "I found it" has ended, the subtitle "I found it" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. This causes the subtitle "I found it" to be displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

In addition, during the period T1, the sound of the line "Found" is not output, but starting one frame after the start of the period T1, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 70% one frame after changing from 100% transparency. Then, one frame after that, it is displayed with a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, for the period during which the sound of the line "Found" is being output, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T2, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "Found", the subtitle "Found" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Yume Yume character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Bakuchu character are given the same fade-in and fade-out fade effects. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, while the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Incitement 23)
As shown in Fig. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood by both sight and sound.

(Comparison of subtitles in the promotional and epilogue parts)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part. FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B) have in common the fact that subtitles are displayed consecutively to the lines spoken by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in the (b4) to (b7) portions, Yume Yume and Bakuchu are displayed facing each other in (b4). Then, in (b5), a first subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6'), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Then, a subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180(B), in the (o3) to (o5) sections, a shop with the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) is displayed as its signboard, and a first subtitle corresponding to Jam-chan's line, "Nice signboard," is displayed. Then, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard is displayed without subtitles. Then, in (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana-chan's line, "Work hard," is displayed. Then, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in Figures 180(A) and 180(B), in the promo and epilogue parts, subtitles corresponding to lines may be displayed multiple times in one scene (the period from 0 to t1 or the period from 0 to t2). When subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is ample time, it may be possible to make the change in subtitle display easier to see by erasing the subtitle display once. However, if there is not enough time, such as in the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to take the measure of erasing the subtitle display once. For this reason, as shown in Figures 178 and 179, a fade effect can be applied to the subtitle display to make the change in subtitles easier to see.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the video is created first, and then the dialogue and other sounds are added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. If the video were to be remade with a longer period for erasing the subtitles during the period from 0 to t1, when there is not much time available, it would be time-consuming. By adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to remake the video. Even in cases where there is ample time available, such as the epilogue part where the shop with the crab sign is displayed, the fade effect can be applied uniformly to reduce the overall workload and prevent any awkwardness from occurring when the subtitles are changed.

(Incitement 26)
As shown in Fig. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in a specific scene in the portion (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display uniformly, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

(Incitement 25)
Although not shown, there are cases where the subtitle display timing overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the performance progresses quickly in the teasing part, and not as quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where the subtitle displays overlap than the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when the subtitles are switched.

[Regarding Incitement 27]
In Figure 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Incitement 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding the subtitle display for a long line or a line that progresses quickly, there is a possibility that an awkward feeling will occur if the subtitle display is switched without a blank period. In such a case, the awkward feeling can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it becomes difficult to see the subtitle display by not applying a fade effect. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such a case, the display area for the effect is reduced by the subtitle display, which interferes with the effect in areas other than the area in which the subtitle display is displayed. By contrast, this embodiment can solve this problem by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). With reference to Figure 182, the correspondence between the effects using the decorative symbols and small symbols on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9 will be explained. As shown in (B4), in the effect of the re-selection part's symbol display, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed shaking slightly up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the re-draw background to the normal background, and the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with a slight up and down movement on this normal background. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, based on receiving a symbol determination command, the decorative symbol and small symbol are fixed and stopped as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow flashing illumination.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after about 33 msec to change to a state in which "FEVER" is displayed. Specifically, as shown in (D1), during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received, the screen maintains the state of (B9). In contrast, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the state of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen in which the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, are displayed, with a delay after the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighted state corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. In the modified example, the pattern display may be performed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), in the scene where the Bakuchu is caught, the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) are aligned in the upper left corner of the screen in the form of "222". The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state. Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced patterns flicker slightly up and down. The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state.

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern in the upper left corner of the screen is erased. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a rainbow light (smooth) state. Next, as shown in (Y4), the "222" decorative pattern that was erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state. Next, as shown in (Y5), the "222" decorative pattern is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state. Next, as shown in (Y6), the "222" decorative pattern is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state. Next, as shown in (Y7), the "222" decorative pattern is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state.

In the modified pattern output, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins, and the patterns line up during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, after the reduced pattern oscillation period as shown in (Y2), the reduced pattern is deleted, and is enlarged from the center of the screen, and the second pattern performance is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol, and the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the winning epilogue part video is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue part video, and when the winning epilogue part video ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the big win symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, the scene change can be made to look good, and thus the epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that the big win display result has occurred due to the reduced decorative symbols even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at an edge position in the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and to prevent the user from mistaking the display of the pattern for a message, and makes the winning epilogue part look good.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach starts. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance during the SP reach, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

Figures 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of re-drawing. In the modified examples, for example, a case will be explained in which the re-drawing is performed from the pattern display in the order of (F1) to (F12). Specifically, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), and then reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, the pattern returns to normal size as shown in (F5). Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to a background for the re-drawing performance, and the re-drawing performance starts. After that, a shaking period occurs in which the pattern shakes up and down as shown in (F7). After that, the "3" pattern is displayed in a reduced size from (F8) to (F9).

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge indicates the valid period for which the button operation is active.

Figure 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 185, the re-draw effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state, high-speed fluctuation is performed in a mode in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13) are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). The pattern then returns to normal size as shown in (G19). The background is then switched to a pattern swing background. Here, the pattern swing is performed by rotating the pattern back and forth on the screen. Specifically, the pattern swings back from (G20) to (G21), and then swings forward from (G22) to (G23), changing to the initial position. The pattern swings forward from (G24) to (G25), and then swings back from (G26) to (G27), changing to the initial position.

Figure 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 186, the re-draw effect executed from (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state, the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases as time passes. After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and then erased. After that, from (H8) to (H20), high-speed fluctuation is performed in a mode in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols are all displayed. After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). Then, the symbols return to normal size as shown in (H26). Then, the background is switched to the background shown in (G20) to (G27) as shown in (H27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the time that the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period during which the performance of shaking the three symbols is executed. In other words, regardless of when the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the performance of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-draw effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen goes white for a moment as shown in (J1). Then, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the (J2) state, it rotates counterclockwise around the vertical axis of the "3" symbol, from (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), to (J9). The rotation is fast, so the symbol appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and then the symbol swings backward from (J11) to (J12), and then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to its initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to its initial position. The movement of the symbol swing from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol swing from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly in its normal position.

[About Losers 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of winning/losing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. Details of the pattern determination period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part are explained in (X2) to (X5). Also, details of the pattern determination period when moving from the (X1) state to the losing epilogue part are explained in (X6) to (X9).

When moving from state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which a Bakuchu has been caught is displayed as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), the screen is controlled to the normal screen, followed by a pattern determination period in which the pattern as shown in (B8) is determined and stopped. The pattern determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the pattern determination command is received. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period as shown in (B11) occurs. After that, as shown in (X5), the jackpot round period begins.

When moving from the (X1) state to the failure epilogue part, an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed as shown in (X6). After that, as shown in (X7), the background goes black and a symbol combination showing the failure display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. After that, the screen is controlled to the normal screen, and then a symbol determination period occurs in which the symbol as shown in (X9) is determined and stopped. The symbol determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the symbol determination command is received. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol determination period ends, the next variable display will begin.

(Detailed explanation of the blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the blackout. Details of the blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the blackout background is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", one of the decorative patterns displayed in the center, is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency. By decreasing the transparency, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the middle pattern appears gradually and clearly.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 70% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 100%. Then, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 60% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 90%. Then, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 50% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 80%. Then, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 40% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 60%. Then, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 30% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 40%. Then, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 20% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 20%. Then, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 10% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and the center pattern is displayed with a transparency of 0%.

After that, a pattern fluctuation period occurs in which the middle symbol "3" fluctuates up and down from (X19) to (X20). After the pattern fluctuation period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). Then, a pattern determination period occurs as shown in (X22). As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout begins earlier than the middle symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transparency change than the middle symbol fade-in.

(Lose 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the winning/losing result is a loss after the winning/losing determination, a loss pattern is displayed against a black background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. This allows the screen transition at the time of a loss to be viewed in an optimal way by the eye-catching screen.

(Lose 2)
As shown in Fig. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background of the losing lottery gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, the image and the middle pattern of the losing lottery are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, so that the display of the losing lottery can be made to look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Missed 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background blacks out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the middle pattern fades in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of steps of the change in transparency is different, so that the display when losing can be made to look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 4)
As shown in Fig. 189, the change of the background to black out when a winning combination is lost starts before the change of the center pattern to fade in. According to this, the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the black out and the fade in, and since the black out is faster than the pattern fade in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

(Loss 5)
In the image before the blackout, the displayed image changes, whereas in the image at the time of the blackout, the displayed image does not change. In this way, the blackout can be made to look good by starting with an image that does not change. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. In addition, no change in the image includes the same still image, and even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(6th place)
As the background of the loss is blacked out, the middle pattern fades in, and as a result, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transparency of 0% and the blacked-out background with a transparency of 0% are displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period in which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. In addition, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. According to this, since there is a predetermined period during which the middle pattern is displayed in a clear state in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transparency of 0%, it is possible to appropriately show that it is a loss.

(Loser 7)
188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About losers 8, 10-17]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp when it is a miss and a diagram for explaining a modified example when it is a miss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50. FIG. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when it is a miss, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when it is a miss. Note that the example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when it is a miss in the SP final reach, but the technology shown in FIG. 190 may be applied to the performance when it is a miss in other reaches, such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table for a miss is used from the scene where the six friendly characters look disappointed at (X30) to the scene where the background image goes black at (X31). Note that the brightness data table for a miss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified at times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the miss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

After the background image goes black, an eye-catching image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in the SP reach, the eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen.

The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period when the eye-catching screen is switched to (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, the brightness data table for background is used from the period when the eye-catching screen is switched to (X34) and the period when the pattern is determined (X35) to the next variation (X36) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold. Note that the brightness data table for background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the miss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 described later.

The background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there are no reserved balls after the pattern determination period (X35). In response to receiving a customer waiting command, the performance screen may be switched to a demonstration display, and a demonstration brightness data table may be used.

In relation to the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 flashes from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving a pattern determination command, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 goes off in the (X35) state. After that, by receiving a variable pattern command when there is a reserved ball, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 flashes in the (X36) state. Note that if there is no reserved ball after the pattern determination period of (X35), the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 will remain off even if a customer waiting command is received.

As a variation for when a win occurs, the brightness data table for each state may be different from that of this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table for when a win occurs is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) may be used for the eye-catching screen switching period of (X42), the eye-catching screen of (X43), the normal screen switching period of (X44), and the pattern determination period of (X45). Then, in the next variation of (X36), the brightness data table for the background may be used.

Here, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching is displayed (when it misses). Also, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (not including off) that corresponds to the background when the change starts.

(8th loss)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of failure will be explained. The performance screen is switched to the image at the time of failure after the performance of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning or losing decision to the brightness data table at the time of failure. Then, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the start of the variation. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. And, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the next variation pattern command is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern determination command is received. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and the brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern determination command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance at the time of failure to the next variation, and the series of performances can be displayed appropriately.

(Missed 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no reserved memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, since the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, the lamp performance can be shown without discomfort, and the series of performances can be shown appropriately.

(Loser 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from blinking to off upon receiving a symbol determination command which is a trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Lose 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to blinking upon receiving a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 13)
A modified example of a miss will be described. From the performance where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the performance where the background image is blacked out at (X41), the brightness data table at the time of miss is used. After the background image is blacked out, the eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45), the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. That is, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, the miss can be made to look good.

(Missed 14)
The final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is data for turning off and maintaining the brightness. The background brightness data table does not use data for maintaining the brightness off. According to this, since the background brightness data table does not use brightness data for maintaining the brightness off, turning off when the background is displayed is unique to a failure, making it easier to recognize that it is a failure.

(Missed 15)
If there is no reserved memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. According to this, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

(Loser 16)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) of the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when it is a miss). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated with a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

(Loser 17)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data of the brightness data table (not including the off state) corresponding to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[About 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts related to the decision on whether or not a prize is awarded will be numbered and explained below.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene where the final teaser before the winner is decided is executed. FIG. 191 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the switching of the screen, and FIG. 191 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the switching of the screen and time. As shown in FIG. 191 (A), in the (r48) portion, after the display of the explosive chocolate as in (r48-1), the display of the six allies as in (r48-2) is performed. After that, the display of the explosive chocolate as in (r48-1) is performed again, and the display of the six allies as in (r48-2) is performed. After that, the switching of the still images between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191 (B). The images of the ally characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or False: 8)
The scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. In addition, the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, while the performance executed in (r48) is executed using the image of Bakuchu and the images of the six allies. The images of the ally character and the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make the characters look like they are moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as during the period other than the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movement will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to make the movement during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the character look like he is moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used during the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used during the period other than the slow-motion period.

(9 correct or not)
As shown in Fig. 191 (B), the speed of switching between the images of the ally character and the enemy character gradually increases. In this way, after the image switching speed reaches its fastest, a prompting display for trigger operation is displayed, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will develop, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it becomes difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the ally character and the enemy character.

(10% correct)
The slow motion period performance in (r48) may be executed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach, or the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be executed appropriately even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

(11 correct answers)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly character and the enemy character may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for a friendly character, four images may be repeatedly used, such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, the data of the character itself is reused while only a portion of the data is changed, thereby reducing the amount of work required for data change and more faithfully expressing the character's movements.

(12 correct answers)
In the slow-motion period in (r48), when the character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movement in order to make the movement appear smooth during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow-motion period, the movement does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and the movement can be more faithfully expressed while reducing the data capacity.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 192 to 260.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using a brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 msec) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the promotion part), the display control unit 124 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122. The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it sends an extension command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A.

The parent table stores information specifying the lamps (lighting locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information specifying the child table that is referenced when lamp control is performed for each lamp (designated address of the child table). Note that in the parent table, only the lamps that are the subject of lamp control are designated, and lamps that are not the subject of lamp control are not designated. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192 described later, the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H are designated as the subjects of lamp control, and 600,000 msec is designated as the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the reel lamp 9A, child table LD1 is specified for the left panel lamp 9B, and child table AD1 is specified for the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H.

Details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control of the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec to time this 600,000 msec (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is timed. In the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table stores information specifying the lamp (illuminated location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced at each time when the lamp control is performed (specified address of the grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193 described later, the grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) to be referenced for each time such as ta1 to ta19 are specified.

Details will be given later using Figure 206, but as shown in Figure 272, in child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control of the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by child table WD3 until the count reaches 3000 msec. In child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, W4 is specified as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the brightness data used at each time that the lamp control is performed. For example, grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, stores brightness data that corresponds to RGB used every 30 msec.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through each of the RGB elements. The frame lamp can also be lit in a color corresponding to each of the characters mentioned above by emitting light based on the brightness data. As an example, in a performance in which Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. In a performance in which Maid A appears, the data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in blue. In a performance in which Maid B appears, the data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in Hawaiian blue. In a performance in which AD appears, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow. In a performance in which Jam-chan appears, brightness data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up purple. In a performance in which Nana-chan appears, brightness data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up pink. In a performance in which Bakuchu appears, brightness data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, brightness data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up cream.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 counts up the time specified by the child table, 3000 msec, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 300 msec. Then, based on the received brightness data, the LED driver passes a current corresponding to the brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timer at regular intervals (for example, 10 msec intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

Timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 273, in the child table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp. For ease of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec will be referred to as data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 3, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 4, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 counts the 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs the brightness data of data 1 to data 7 to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 3000 msec. However, if the count has not yet reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

As shown in the parent table in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified over a period of 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. That is, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on performance control commands from the CPU 103 to control the lamps, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235 described later, brightness data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this grandchild table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the grandchild table when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, because the timer of the child table is still remaining.

In this way, by specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, which prevents the lamp from continually changing in illumination. Furthermore, by specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the lamp can be more effectively prevented from continually changing in illumination.

As mentioned above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table used in each part described below, only characteristic tables among the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the beginning part]
Fig. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part. As shown in Fig. 192, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in Figure 193, in child table WD1 for the frame lamp, the time of the start part for the frame lamp is subdivided and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are marked "omitted" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta4, and ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. Grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260 described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. Grandchild table W4 corresponds to grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230 described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white by performing lamp control based on grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white twice by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on grandchild table W4.

At times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is specified. Grandchild table W11 corresponds to grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, grandchild table W11 specifies that the brightness data is gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W11, and lights up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness in response to the performance of the shutter closing as shown in FIG. 58 (a10) to (a12).

At times ta13 to ta18, the grandchild table W12 is specified. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, and lights up the frame lamp in red while maintaining a reduced brightness, corresponding to the performance in which the shutter is maintained for a predetermined time from a fully closed state and then opens in stages, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13) to (a15) and FIG. 60 (a16) to (a18).

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters close, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from the timing when the shutter is completely closed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. Alternatively, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from a timing related to the shutter closing operation (e.g., the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing immediately before the shutter starts to close, etc.).

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect of the shutter being maintained in a fully open state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "off" here refers to a state in which the brightness data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. 53, but at time ta19, it may be almost off, with the brightness data being "1". Note that in the following explanation, the "off" part may also mean "almost off". At time ta19, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table, and the frame lamp remains off based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 reaches 0.

In this way, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it possible to clearly communicate to the player when the shutter is fully open. Also, the teasing part of SP first half reach A and the teasing part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A provocation part]
Fig. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A. As shown in Fig. 194, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the provocative part of SP first half reach A for a frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified for 1560 msec of time tb10. Grandchild table W3 corresponds to grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

During the 150 msec interval of time tb14 and the 210 msec interval of time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "000" and "AAA" alternately at 30 msec intervals, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). In other words, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to flash in white (white flash) multiple times. For example, if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp will flash white three times, and if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over 150 msec (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp will flash white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD2, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach A, the frame lamp lights up in white in response to the performance of teasing whether Yume-chan will catch the Bakuchu before the decision of the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in FIG. 67 (b18). At time tb18, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the teasing 2 brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249 described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamp maintains the white lighting based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 becomes 0.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the first half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). Furthermore, at times tb8 and tb9, when there is a character speaking but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 63 (b8) and (b9), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tc1 after a win is confirmed indicates that the RGB data is "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tc2 and tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. Grandchild table W1 corresponds to grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c2) and (c3).

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols is used in common in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec period between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 69 (c4) and (c5).

At time tc6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol finally being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69 (c6). At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a chu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 197(a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the miss 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), lights up the frame lamps in white to correspond to the performance of missing the explosive chu as shown in FIG. 70 (d1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) is RGB data "FDC", whereas the white light at td1 after the loss notification is RGB data "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18), so that the player can be conveniently notified that they have lost.

During the 5,800 msec period of time td2, grandchild table W14 is specified. Grandchild table W14 corresponds to grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the Loss 2 Brightness Data Table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a darker white color than td1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 70 (d2) in which Yume-Yume is disappointed at losing.

As mentioned above, when a win occurs (tc2, tc3), the RGB data changes at 30 msec intervals for the rainbow lighting, whereas when a loss occurs (td2), the RGB data changes at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when a win occurs. As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp changes color at shorter intervals than when a loss occurs, so the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, when a win occurs, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than when a loss occurs, while when a loss occurs, the lighting of the frame lamp is more subdued than when a win occurs, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player through the contrasting lamp states.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. Grandchild table W15 corresponds to grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the Miss 3 brightness data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 70 (d3).

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern to correspond to a performance in which the normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). In other words, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed in the event of a miss has a lighting mode that corresponds to the normal background, and is the same as the grandchild table W21 specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part.

At time td4, lamp control is performed by repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching RGB data based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260 described later, until a fluctuation pattern command specifying the next fluctuation is received if there is a hold, or until a customer waiting command is received over time if there is no hold, and if the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command has not yet been received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, lamp control is performed again based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, from the time the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background pattern at time td4 in response to the effect of displaying the normal screen, the eye-catching screen is displayed and the frame lamp lights up based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen. In this way, in lamp control of the frame lamp when a loss occurs, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen, is used. This eliminates the need to prepare a separate brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the pattern is determined, and by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part, the effect using the frame lamps can be viewed by the player without any sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B provocation part]
Fig. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in Fig. 198, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the provocative part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD5, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume will lose or not in the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). At time te18, the lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of the first half of the SP, Reach B, as shown in Figure 77 (e17), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). At time te6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color, which corresponds to Boingo, in response to the performance of Boingo shooting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, when Yume Yume has a line but there are no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green, which corresponds to Yume Yume.

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of the SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200(a2), in the child table WD6 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of Yume Yume hitting the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tf1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

From time tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in accordance with the performance shown in Fig. 78 (f2) to (f4) in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-Yume wins.

As shown in Figure 200 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tf5 and time tf6, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 79 (f5) and (f6).

At time tf7, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 80 (f7). At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-Yume wins. Furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2, which is a period of 200 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamps are lit in white to correspond to the performance in which Yume Yume is sent flying as shown in FIG. 81 (g1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tg1, corresponding to the performance in which Yume Yume is disappointed at losing, as shown in Figures 70 (g2) and (g3).

The rainbow lighting during a win (tf2-tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, whereas the darker white lighting during a loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4).

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Also, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the character movement part during the latter half of the SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the part of the reel action during the latter half of the SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach explained with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table to be referred to in the part of the reel action is specified for the frame lamp. The child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the part action shown in FIG. 171 (h1)-(h3) (FIG. 83 (h1)-(h3)).

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. Grandchild table W2 corresponds to grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W2, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), causes the frame lamp to flash red in response to a performance in which the reel falls as shown in FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3).

In addition, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, the performance control CPU 120 causes the reel lamp 9A to flash in red based on the child table corresponding to the falling action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

This allows the lighting pattern of the frame lamp and the reel lamp 9A to more effectively draw the player's attention to the performance of the reel falling.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach A promotion part]
Fig. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A. As shown in Fig. 203, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP latter half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 204 and 205, in the frame lamp child table WD9, the time of the provocative part of SP latter half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising part) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP latter half reach A by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP latter half reach A.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so that the reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach A in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time ti1, 1330 msec at time ti20, and 1560 msec at time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time ti20, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time ti11, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for the 150 msec interval between time ti15 and time ti24, and for the 210 msec interval between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white. At times ti15, ti24, ti14, ti23, and ti35, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times ti15 and ti24, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times ti14, ti23, and ti35, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD9, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

During the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, grandchild table W7 is specified. Grandchild table W7 corresponds to grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the non-operation prompting provocation 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamps to flash in white.

At time ti39, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP second half Reach A, the frame lamps light up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume and Jam will catch the Bakuchu at the win/lose branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table W8. As shown in Figure 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamps will maintain the white light based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the teasing part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains lit in white even with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

Also, as shown in FIG. 249, the final RGB data of grandchild table W7 used during the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38 is specified as "FDC", and furthermore, the final RGB data of grandchild table W8 used thereafter at time ti39 is also specified as "FDC". As a result, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the luminance data of "FDC" based on grandchild table W7 is output to the LED driver, and then continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on grandchild table W8, so that the timing for deciding whether to win or lose can be optimally produced with simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti2, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in white corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, located on the left side of the screen, face off against Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, as shown in Figure 84 (i2). At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 84 (i3). At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 85 (i4). At time ti5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu, to the performance of Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaking lines, as shown in Figure 85 (i5).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the Reach A provocation part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in Fig. 90 (i21). Furthermore, at times ti32 and ti34, when there is a character speaking but no subtitles, as shown in Fig. 94 (i32) and Fig. 95 (i34), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to ideally see the effects of the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified from time tj1 to tj3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tj1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 97 (j2) and (j3).

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning Reach A in the second half of the SP stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of winning symbols as shown in Figure 98 (j4) and (j5).

At time tj6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the time of the miss epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tk1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tk1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tk2 and time tk3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tk1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 99 (k2) and (k3) in which Yume-chan is disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tk2, tk3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the interval during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, the player can easily understand whether they have won or lost with the contrasting lamp states.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4).

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Also, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach B promotion part]
Fig. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in Fig. 208, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the stimulating part of SP second half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 209, the frame lamp child table WD12 subdivides the time of the stimulating part of SP second half reach B for a frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising part) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP latter half reach B by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP latter half reach B.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so that the reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach B in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10, tn1, and tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time tn14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tn6, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD12. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec intervals of time tn3, tn12, and tn25, and the 210 msec intervals of time tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamps to flash in white. At times tn3, tn12, tn25, tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times tn3, tn12, and tn25, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP's second half Reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether or not to catch the crab at the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 109 (n27). At time tn27, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in Figure 109 (n27), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP's second half Reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and lights the frame right lamp in red, corresponding to the crab, to correspond to the performance shown in FIG. 101 (n2), in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, face off against the crab, located on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, because Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the Reach B provocation part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink, which corresponds to Nana praying, as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, when there is dialogue from a character (crab) but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally show that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second half of the SP Reach B]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at to1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crab act as a store signboard as shown in FIG. 110 (o2) to FIG. 111 (o5) to make Jam-chan and Nana-chan happy, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, which is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time to6 and time to7, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7).

At time to8, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the caught crab serves as the store's signboard and Jam-chan and Nana-chan are happy, and further, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach second half B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tp1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. 113 (p1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tp2 and time tp3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tp1, corresponding to the performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed at losing, as shown in Figures 113 (p2) and (p3).

The rainbow lighting during a win (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tp2, tp3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily know that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4).

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Also, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach promotion part]
Fig. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocation part of the SP final reach. As shown in Fig. 212, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocation part of the SP final reach stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the stimulating part of an SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the time of the stimulating part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP final reach by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP final reach.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so that the reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A makes the player unaware that the reel is rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the SP final reach has been reached.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of times tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and tr1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At times tr19 and tr22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tr15, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD15, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying its reference time. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at times tr40 and tr47. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at times tr36, tr40, and tr47, but at time tr36, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tr40 and tr47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD2 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing its reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. If information to execute a red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and if information to execute a green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 233 to 235 described later. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 242 to 244 described later. As shown in Figures 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

As shown in Figures 128 (r40) and (r41), when push button 31B is displayed and a cut-in performance is executed, the character does not speak and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, the frame lamp that is the subject of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance continues to be the subject of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

This prevents the display (button display) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B to execute the cut-in effect from overlapping with the subtitle display, preventing the two from overlapping and making either display difficult to recognize or causing the player to misinterpret the content of the display. Furthermore, the brightness data for the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for that cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach, preventing the mixing of unnecessary lamps lighting/flashing, etc., which would spoil the aesthetic appearance, and providing a suitable teasing part performance.

In this embodiment, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach have the same target of lamp control in that they both use frame lamps, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach may have the same target of lamp control in that they only use one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, and the left panel lamp 9B, or they may have the same target of lamp control in that they all use all of the game effect lamps 9.

At 860 msec, at times tr49 and tr50, grandchild table W9 is specified. Grandchild table W9 corresponds to grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W9, lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

Grandchild table W10 is specified for times tr51 to tr54, which are the last time of the provocation part of the SP final reach. Grandchild table W10 corresponds to grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in Figure 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The presentation control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to cause the frame lamp to flash red in response to a presentation that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIG. 131 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54). During times tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to flash red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 reaches 0.

As a result, at the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp will switch between flashing white, lit red, and flashing red in succession while sounds corresponding to operation promotions and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, enhancing the presentation of operations promotions for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

Here, if no operation prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is given, such as in child table WD2 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach A, child table WD5 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach B, child table WD9 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach A, and child table WD12 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach B, the frame lamp will remain lit in white at the final win/loss branch of the teasing part, and then it will move to the win epilogue part or the miss epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation is promoted to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as in the child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp flashes white in a performance that provokes the player as to whether or not the ally character will catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), and then lights up red in response to a performance in which the Bakuchu and the ally character are displayed alternately as shown in FIG. 130 (r48), and then switches to the grandchild table W9, and based on that grandchild table W9, the frame lamp lights up red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In this way, in the SP Reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP Reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a state is set in which a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/loss branch and the case where operation prompt is given. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, where a player is encouraged to make an operation at the win/loss branch, the brightness data (RGB data) switches between "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. This allows the timing of the win/loss branch to be appropriately presented by the lighting state of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white corresponding to the six ally characters and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen confront Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Furthermore, because the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white. Also, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, is speaking, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to maid A, in response to the performance shown in FIG. 118 (r11) where maid A is chasing a lollipop. Furthermore, at times tr25, tr27, tr29, tr31, tr33, and tr35, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's line but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35).

In this way, as shown in Figures 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to ideally see the performance in the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), the parent table for the device operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(a2), in the child table WD16a for the reel operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the reel operation part in the epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified for 10,000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the winning/losing branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to the performance of a falling role as shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to (s3).

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the child table WD16b for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white, which corresponds to the rising of the reel as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8), in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught.

From time ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), the parent table for displaying the common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 135 (s8) and (s9).

At time ts10, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times ts4 to ts7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in child table WD16 of the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit, in an effect where a reel falls, the frame lamp is controlled so that rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for an effect where achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between the chromatic rainbow colors to emphasize the jackpot and congratulate the player. After that, in an effect where an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow light without achromatic colors is used to congratulate the player in a calm manner on the jackpot. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach miss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a1), the parent table for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to the performance of the Bakuchu escaping as shown in FIG. 137 (u1).

The red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 250 (described later), whose RGB data includes "D00", whereas the white lighting at tu1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252 (described later), whose RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when a loss occurs, dimmer than the red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54), making it possible to conveniently notify the player that they have lost.

During the 3900 msec period of time tr2, the grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tu1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 137 (u2) in which six friendly characters are disappointed at having lost.

The rainbow lighting during a win (ts4-ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, whereas the darker white lighting during a loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

In addition, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3).

At time tu4, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Also, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in each part of the rescue]
Fig. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a part per relief. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach described with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. Grandchild table W16 corresponds to grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 254 described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W16, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in red in accordance with the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, the frame lamp lights up even brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 last specified on each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when a loss occurs to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified on the child table WD18 used when a rescue hit occurs. As a result, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up brighter than it did after a loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to understand the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification.

In this embodiment, the frame lamp lights up once in yellow corresponding to the normal background after the miss notification, and furthermore, when the rescue hits, the frame lamp lights up even brighter in red corresponding to the rescue performance. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of the miss, the grandchild table W15 may be specified, and "111" may be specified as the last brightness data (RGB data). As a result, at the end of the miss, the frame lamp goes out in a white system. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first brightness data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of the rescue hit. As a result, at the beginning of the rescue hit after the miss notification, the frame lamp lights up brightly in a white system. In this way, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as it did after the loss notification, but brighter than it did after the loss notification, so the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is specified. Grandchild table W17 corresponds to grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W17, lighting up the frame lamp in white in accordance with the whiteout performance shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

During the 5000 msec period between time tv3 and time tv4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in Figures 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the end of the rescue hit part, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed hit, in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in FIG. 140 (v5). At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp will maintain its rainbow lighting based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 reaches 0.

[Brightness data table used in the re-draw part]
Fig. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-draw part. As shown in Fig. 218, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-draw part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
Fig. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (before operation promotion). As shown in Fig. 219, a child table used before the movement of the pattern and a child table used after the movement of the pattern are prepared as a child table WD19 of the frame lamp. In each child table in the re-draw part, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

Figure 219 (a) shows a child table used just before the pattern starts to move. For example, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified from time tA6 to tA8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in Figures 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), once the re-draw performance has started, but before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, turns off the frame lamp.

In this way, after the frame lamp goes out, it lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to the effect of the re-draw performance causing the patterns to start moving, so the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the patterns will start moving due to the re-draw performance.

Figure 219 (b) shows the child table used after the pattern starts to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is specified. Grandchild table W19 corresponds to grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in Figure 257 described later. As shown in Figure 257, in grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are specified alternately at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to a performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

At times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is specified. Grandchild table W20 corresponds to grandchild table W20 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals, which is shorter than the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash rapidly in red in response to a performance in which the patterns change rapidly while switching as shown in FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 156 (A46).

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (promotion of a symbol after operation promotion). The child table WD20 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 220 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tB1 to tB4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "3" symbol is enlarged after an operation prompt is executed in the re-selection part, as shown in FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. 158 (B4).

From time tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is specified. The CPU 120 for controlling the effects performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 157 (B5) to (B9) is displayed in a reduced size and normal size, and the frame lamp flashes in rainbow colors to correspond to an effect in which the "3" symbol flickers and is then confirmed.

The rainbow-colored flashing caused by lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, the flashing is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 from time tB5 to tB9. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tB5 to tB9, and the frame lamp continues to flash in the rainbow colors based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD20 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp lights up in rainbow colors as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, just like child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, but the flashing of rainbow colors from time tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is promoted to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move and sway due to the re-draw performance after the lights are turned off, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was provisionally stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the effect of the number "3" being displayed swaying and then finalized as shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start flashing the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing of rainbow colors when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) continues during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 159 (B8) and (B9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

(Brightness data table used when the pattern does not increase after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The child table WD21 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 221 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 221, in the child table WD21 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tC1 to tC4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "2" symbol is enlarged after an operation prompt is executed in the re-selection part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

From time tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the "2" pattern is displayed swaying and then confirmed as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9). From time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to be lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD21 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, then goes out, and the symbol starts to move due to the re-draw performance. When the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in grandchild tables W19 and W20). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, the rainbow lighting from time tB5 to tB9 when the "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" symbol through a redraw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting from time tC5 to tC9 when the "2" symbol is maintained without being upgraded through a redraw. As a result, if the winning symbol is upgraded through a redraw, the player can be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the redraw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and if the winning symbol is not upgraded through a redraw, the data capacity can be reduced by using the grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part and the grandchild table W1 in common.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors when the effect of the "2" becoming normal size and finalizing after the "2" pattern has finished being displayed as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting up the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow lighting when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) continues even during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 163 (C8) and (C9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

[Luminance data table used in the fanfare part]
Fig. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp maintains its fanfare mode illumination based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 reaches 0.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 223, the parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Figure 224, in the child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W1, Y1, L1, A1) to be referenced in a specific time period is specified.

Figure 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 225, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in the rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmed win by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W1.

Figure 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the reel lamp and a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the reel lamp, data "FFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "RRRR" output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the reel lamp 9A in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "WWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the left panel lamp 9B in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L1.

Figure 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacca lamp, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table A1, causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Data table of red flashing brightness during reel operation]
Fig. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a role object operation red flashing brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White flash brightness data table]
Fig. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). That is, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to blink in white (white flash) multiple times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 231, the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Figure 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e), L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W5d, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W5e, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e).

Figure 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

Figure 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L5 (L5a to L5e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 238 and Fig. 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified for only the R data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A5d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the R data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A5 (A5a to A5e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 240, the parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 241, in the child table in the common green cut-in brightness data table, grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e), L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6d, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6e, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in green by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e).

Figure 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

Figure 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-in.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 247 and Fig. 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified only for the G data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A6d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

[Data table of illumination brightness when no operation prompt is given]
Fig. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation-prompting luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W8, causing the frame lamps to light up in white.

[Data table of illumination brightness when operation is promoted]
Fig. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
Fig. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the brightness data is specified to be gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W12, causing the frame lamps to light up in red.

[Failed brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a miss brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a white color that is darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness Data Table per Relief]
254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit confirmation brightness data table]
Fig. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a winning determination brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W18 to make the frame lamp flash in seven colors.

[Redraw performance brightness data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to cause the frame lamp to flash in red while switching the brightness data more quickly than the grandchild table W19.

[Background Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) to be referred to in a predetermined time period is specified.

Figure 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background brightness data table. As shown in Figure 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21b, causing the frame lamps to light up in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

<About brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used by the lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized according to the performance content.

Figures 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining the reference of the brightness data table. As shown in Figure 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the operation of the reel during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp flashes in seven colors in response to the performance of the reel falling as shown in Figures 133 (s1) to (s3).

During the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white corresponding to the rising of the reel, in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught, as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8).

During the time ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of symbols in response to the performance of displaying the winning symbols as shown in FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A4).

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5).

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 in the re-draw part, the child table before the pattern starts to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lamp is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once after the re-draw performance starts and before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, as shown in FIG. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8).

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-draw part, the child table after the start of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During the re-draw part, from time tA11 to tA46, the child table from the beginning of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, and causes the frame lamp to flash rapidly in red in response to the performance in which the patterns change and fluctuate rapidly as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-draw part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to the performance of displaying symbols such as an enlarged display of the symbol "2" after the operation prompt is executed in the re-draw part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

During the re-draw part, times tC5 to tC9, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamp to light up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to the performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed swaying and then confirmed, as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9).

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and lights up the frame lamp in a fanfare mode lighting mode in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2).

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and performs lamp control corresponding to the performance using the brightness data (for example, RGB data) contained in the grandchild table (brightness data table) specified by the child table.

Note that in Figures 268 to 271, child tables are shown from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part to the fanfare part when the pattern does not advance, but for other routes, such as child tables from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part to the fanfare part when the pattern advances, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each performance part, as shown in Figures 192 to 260.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in Lamp Control of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in Fig. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be easily communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. In addition, the prodding part of the SP first half reach A and the prodding part of the SP first half reach B executed after the start part start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or blink based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes off, the frame lamp starts to light up according to the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so that the start of the SP first half reach can be easily communicated to the player.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is lit in yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lit in red. While the brightness data is switched so that the light turns on/blinks while changing color and brightness, during the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp remains in a reduced brightness state and is red. By this, the lighting state of the frame lamp is maintained so that the performance of the start part is enhanced before the shutter closes, and the lighting state of the frame lamp is maintained when the shutter is closed, This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation when the reel opens, and as a result, the player can better enjoy the presentation in the subsequent teasing part.

(Incitement 7, Incitement 9)
As shown in Fig. 64(b8), (b9), Fig. 74(e7), Fig. 94(i32), Fig. 95(i34), Fig. 104(n10), Fig. 123(r25), (r27), Fig. 124(r29), Fig. 125(r31), (r33), and Fig. 126(r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in a color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to suitably express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene without subtitles, and allows the player to suitably see the performance in the provocative part.

(Teasing 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). This allows, in a scene in which multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, to conveniently indicate which character is speaking by lighting/flashing the frame lamp, allowing the performance in the provocative part to be conveniently shown to the player.

(Incitement 17)
The CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at different timings, while changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 in the lamp control between different timings, thereby changing the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. This allows the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach to be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for referencing the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to make the frame lamp blink in white two or three times. This allows the number of white blinks to be different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the stimulating part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

(Teasing 20)
In each of the child table WD2 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the provocative part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the different timings. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Provocative cut-in 1)
The brightness data (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) of the lamp control in the cut-in performance and the button display for the cut-in performance is designed to use the same frame lamp as the lamp control in the provocative part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetics, and provides a suitable performance in the provocative part.

(True or False 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the player can see the performance as if it has stopped, and the win/fail branch (decision timing) can be easily conveyed to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, a sound corresponding to operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to a reach is output, and further, the grandchild table is switched multiple times to control the frame lamp so as to be in a mode corresponding to operation prompt, so that the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/fail branch and the case where operation prompt is given.

(15 correct answers)
In the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP latter half reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decision timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

(17 correct or incorrect)
In child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamp changes in succession from flashing white to lighting red to flashing red, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation of the operation promotion for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

(20% correct)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to the child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, the frame lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec. In this way, the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, but the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. In this way, in the child table used for each of the different multiple reaches, instead of preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different multiple reaches, the common grandchild table W4 is used while changing its reference time, thereby reducing the amount of data used for lamp control and making it possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the multiple reaches.

(True or False 21)
The frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) and brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 last specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when losing to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified in the child table WD18 used when winning a rescue. As a result, when a rescue is won, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as after the loss notification and brighter than after the loss notification, so that the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

(Epilogue 9)
When the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. In this way, the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the reel, while the lighting state of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating the development to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table used when announcing a winning is shared with the grandchild table used when displaying the winning pattern, so that it is not necessary to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of different timings, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part look better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and allows the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings) while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part can be seen better by the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-selection performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-selection effect 7, Re-selection effect 14, Re-selection effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, and then goes off, and when the re-lottery performance is executed and the symbols are displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbols are confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the symbol confirmation period, which is performed in a short period, without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, and therefore does not increase the data capacity excessively.

(Re-draw performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control, it is possible to present to the player a performance with a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). As a result, it is possible to present to the player the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part better while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 20)
In the child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp is lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during the time tB7 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to "3" by the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-draw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Details on Lamp Control>
Next, with reference to Figures 261 to 263, the above-mentioned lamp control will be described in detail with respect to its characteristic features that are particularly worthy of mention.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of the lamps when you win and when you lose.

First, referring to FIG. 261, the lamp control at the time of a miss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the stimulating part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing). In addition, at the end of the stimulating part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W10 to flash the frame lamp in red in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part that follows the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B, SP second half reach A and B, and SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to a performance in which an ally character is defeated in the reach performance after the win/lose branch.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W13, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W14. In grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in a dimmer white color than the white color based on grandchild table W13, corresponding to the performance of an ally character feeling disappointed.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W14, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W15. In grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. 190, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching), and then lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in the start part before the reach. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that corresponds to the normal background is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26, and lights up the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) that corresponds to the normal background, just like in the start part before the reach.

Next, referring to FIG. 262, we will explain the lamp control at the time of a hit when transitioning to the hit epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the first half SP reach A, B and second half SP reach A, B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, and lights up the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the epilogue part that comes after passing through the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W19, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. In grandchild table W1, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. In grandchild table W21, "AAA" is assigned to each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally "000" is assigned to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to a performance in which a winning pattern is displayed.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and causes the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to a performance in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, referring to Figure 263, we will explain the lamp control when a hit occurs when transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, with such RGB data being specified repeatedly. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance in which a role object falls.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W20, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors that correspond to a confirmed win.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, and lights up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to the performance of displaying a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and causes the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to a performance in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

The following describes the characteristic parts of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 261 to 263.

(19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the game moves to the miss epilogue part via the provocative part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the game loses in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be suitably notified that the game has lost. Also, when the game moves to the miss epilogue part via the provocative part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part includes "D00", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is a miss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during the win/loss branch, so that the player can be conveniently notified that he or she has missed.

(Role action 1)
As shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at 30 msec intervals. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 261, in the losing case, the frame lamp is lit in a dim white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the winning case. As a result, in the winning case, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than the losing case, so that the winning case can be easily conveyed to the player by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the winning case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be emphasized more than in the losing case, while in the losing case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made calmer than in the winning case, so that the winning case and the losing case can be easily conveyed to the player by the contrasting lamp modes.

(Role Action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is turned on so that the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. In this way, by occasionally inserting the achromatic color between the rainbow chromatic color, it is possible to execute a performance that emphasizes the big win and congratulates the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is turned on in a smooth rainbow color without an achromatic color, so that it is possible to execute a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(Regarding the swinging pattern of the design)
Here, the pattern swinging mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the pattern swinging mode. In the pattern swinging period in the above-mentioned instigation part and re-lottery part, the decorative pattern moves as in the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) or the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(b). Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located below the first mode.

The first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated right around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated left around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more right than in the first mode.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-draw performance by the 7 symbol. Also, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-draw performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), the symbol is enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), and then reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Then, as shown in (D5), the symbol becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-draw performance, and the re-draw performance starts. Then, as shown in (D7), the symbol is swayed up and down during the shaking period. Then, the "7" symbol is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge is an indication that shows the valid period for button operation. If the player operates the push button 31B from the (D12) state, the "7" will rapidly change, and a faint and clear display will be repeated, as shown in (D13) to (D20). Similar rapid changes are repeated after (D20).

As shown in FIG. 265(B) and the timing chart for each re-lottery performance, the pattern forwarding period when a re-lottery performance in which the patterns change at high speed by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery performances. Here, the re-lottery performances include a first re-lottery performance in which even numbers change to odd numbers, a second re-lottery performance in which even numbers do not change to even numbers, and a third re-lottery performance in which 7 numbers do not change to 7 numbers. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing at which the pattern forwarding performance can be performed and the pattern forwarding performance is started, there is a period (t1) in which the decorative patterns shake after the pattern forwarding period ends, and then the pattern is finalized.

In addition, in the second re-draw performance, if the button is operated t2 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is a decorative symbol shaking period (t1-t2) after the symbol forwarding period ends, and then the symbol is finalized. In the third re-draw performance, if the button is operated t1 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is no decorative symbol shaking period after the symbol forwarding period ends, and the symbol is finalized. In this way, the symbol forwarding period is constant regardless of the timing of the button operation, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the symbol determination is absorbed even in the button operation. This relationship is the same when the button is operated in any of the first to third re-draw performances.

[About re-draw performances 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. As shown in (K1) to (K3) of FIG. 266, no matter when the button is operated during the winning/losing scene, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role movement and the winning epilogue part are executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, 5 seconds after the pattern shaking period, the three patterns are facing forward as shown in (K5).

Also, as shown in (K2), if the button is operated one second after the prompt display is displayed when the winner is determined, the reels move and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, four seconds into the pattern swing period, the three symbols face leftward from the front as shown in (K6). Also, as shown in (K3), if the button is operated two seconds after the prompt display is displayed when the winner is determined, the reels move and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, three seconds into the pattern swing period, the three symbols face rightward from the front as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern will be in a forward position after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing right after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed, as shown in (K8) to (K17), in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after whiteout. Then, after (K17), a pattern advance effect is executed. Note that although FIG. 266 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-draw performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a time for the symbols to shake for absorbing the scale may be provided during the time until the predetermined timing at which the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the predetermined timing is reached and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are once displayed shaking, and then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the manner of the movement of the symbols at the start of the re-lottery, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 27)
The time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed may be the same for any of a plurality of reach states. This can reduce the data capacity of the effect data.

(Re-draw performance 28)
The movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is a movement of swinging around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern to the front and back sides on the spot, the movement after the whiteout screen may be a movement of rotating clockwise around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern while expanding. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movement of the pattern on the extension of the same axis, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

(Re-draw performance 29)
Among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the user of a button operation or other operation promotion at the branch when determining whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance similar to that of an SP reach in which a time shift occurs can be executed. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of the time shift, so that no discomfort is felt even when there is only one re-draw performance. In addition, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data capacity can be reduced.

(Re-draw performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the pattern moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). In other words, when the pattern is swinging in a clockwise direction, the whiteout by the re-lottery performance is executed, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotates to the right. According to this, the series of right-rotating pattern movements from the pattern swinging period to the re-lottery performance can prevent the pattern movement from feeling strange.

[About re-draw performances 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. (L1) is a diagram in the case where the button is operated at an earlier timing after the action prompt display is displayed during the pattern forwarding period. (L2) is a diagram in the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the action prompt display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram in the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompt display is displayed. And, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, the pattern is produced in the same way regardless of the timing at which the button is operated during the pattern forwarding period in the re-draw performance. Then, the decorative pattern with the whiteout in between moves in the same way and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompt display is displayed, the pattern is produced as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a predetermined period has passed, the three patterns are in a state of facing rightward rather than forward as shown in (L7).

Also, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated later than (L1) after the action prompt is displayed, the pattern is displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a shorter pattern shaking period than (L1), the three patterns face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Also, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated later than (L2) after the action prompt is displayed, the pattern is displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a shorter pattern shaking period than (L2), the three patterns face to the front as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the right after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing forward after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after a whiteout, as shown in (J1) to (J10). Then, the pattern stops after the pattern shaking period, as shown in (J11) to (J17). Note that although FIG. 267 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-draw performance 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute a common pattern display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the pattern is swayed during the pattern swaying period. The pattern swaying period differs depending on the button operation timing. Thus, after the pattern swaying period, for example, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the right, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the left, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By performing the common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is displayed (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount that it was earlier than the first timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2) during the operation valid period). When the push button 31B is operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount that it was earlier than the second timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) during the operation valid period). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 23)
As shown in Fig. 267, after executing a whiteout as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern mode is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what the pattern position is in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, by executing a different mode of effect after the whiteout, it is possible to avoid a sense of incongruity in the flow of the effect until the pattern is stopped.

(Re-draw performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol shaking period, the symbol shakes backward from (J10) to (J12), and then shakes forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol shakes forward from (J15) to (J16), and then shakes backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol fixing period, the symbol is designed to always be located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). This allows the symbol to be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

(Re-draw performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts, rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

<Main components and effects>
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (e.g., gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a role object, a movable body 32),
A display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot is hit),
The notification performance includes an introductory part (for example, a teasing part) until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified, and a hit/miss notification part (for example, a hit epilogue part) in which the hit/miss notification part is notified. A winning/losing notification part that notifies the player of a winning or losing jackpot by moving the role of the winning or losing jackpot, and an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed after the winning or losing notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state. The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
In the introduction part, a line sound uttered by a character is output, and the first character for which a line subtitle is displayed in response to the line sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means displays the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific action in preference to the performance display in the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing informing part, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the performance display. Then, in a state where the performance display is visible, a promotion display is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54)),
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body is moved from a first position (for example, a retreat position) to a second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (e.g., an advance position) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 133 );
The display means is
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and when the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the effect display is terminated; Displaying the epilogue part (for example, the examples shown in Figs. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle ends, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area (for example, (Examples shown in Figures 134 to 136)
In the epilogue part, the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the lines spoken by the character is higher than the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the lines spoken by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, the character who speaks the first line in each SP reach as the provocation part is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). This allows the player to accurately recognize the ally character at the start of the SP reach. Also, at the timing of transition from the provocation part to the win/loss notification part, the display of the provocation part's performance is made invisible by displaying the introductory image of the trigger display encouraging the player to operate the trigger with priority over the display of the performance in the provocation part, and then the image of operating the trigger button and the performance in the provocation part become visible (for example, FIG. 131 (r48) to (r51)). This allows the player to get excited because the introductory image gives an impact while the introductory image changes to the image of the trigger button, allowing the player to confirm the performance of the provocation part. Also, it is possible to prevent the aesthetics of the display from being damaged in the flow of the performance in which the winning epilogue part becomes the background display until the retraction of the role is completed. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, the pattern is enlarged after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, so that it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the pattern and the misunderstanding that it is a message for displaying the pattern. In addition, the above-mentioned provocation part, which performs the provocation of winning or losing, has a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In the performance of such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character receives damage. In addition, the performance of such a provocation part has a faster image display switching interval and a larger number of image display switching than the epilogue part. According to this, by making the provocation part a faster development than the epilogue part, it is possible to make the provocation part look good. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, which develops slowly, the subtitles are firmly attached, so it is easy to understand what the character is saying and the feeling of celebration can be emphasized. Also, in fast-paced promotional parts, the content can be conveyed primarily through video changes, with supplementary subtitles displayed without interfering with the video progression. This allows the entire production to be presented in an optimal way.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is greater than the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
The ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is greater than the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and the primary focus can be on conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
Execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery performances, a replacement display in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part is performed. In the latter half of the game, a first re-draw effect is executed to display the second symbol.
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in a second half part. It is possible to execute a re-draw performance,
The first re-selection performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-draw performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2". During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery performances, a replacement display in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part is performed. In the latter half of the game, a first re-draw effect is executed to display the second symbol.
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the second re-lottery performance is a re-lottery performance in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in a second half part. It is possible to execute a lottery performance,
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is to be controlled, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. A third re-selection effect can be executed to display the third re-selection effect again.
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same performance length,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance can be designed to be the same. This allows for an ideal re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, the symbol display in the aforementioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) portion and the symbol display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) portion are executed using approximately the same images. Specifically, the same images are used for the symbol display of the "2" symbol and effect images, and the symbol display is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. In this way, the symbol display images can be made approximately the same, so it is possible to clearly show the player that the symbol has not been upgraded to a special symbol. Note that the image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may be made exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
In the latter half of the game, the display mode of the first symbol is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol to the third symbol until the symbol determination period begins. A shaking display is performed to display the first symbol as if it is shaking,
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until the pattern determination period, the display mode of the second pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if the second symbol is shaking,
The first mode is a mode in which a player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means includes:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting a player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if an action is performed at a first timing, when a predetermined timing comes after a performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed. The second symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the second symbol so that the second symbol is in the second mode.
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, after executing a performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance, The second symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode at the predetermined timing;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, regardless of whether the action is executed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second symbol is started from the predetermined timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the second pattern is displayed in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern. The two symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed. The first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the second mode when the first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner.
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at the second timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed. The first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the third mode when the first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner.
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the swinging display of the first symbol is started from the predetermined timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the first pattern is displayed in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern. One symbol is stopped and displayed in the first mode,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and the effect of the symbols rotating and shrinking and then shaking is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the common effect can be performed, so that the symbols can be stopped cleanly and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a character's speech sound is output and no dialogue subtitles for the speech sound are displayed is such that the brightness data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character. It is composed of.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. The display ends, and the display corresponding to the scene after the switch is performed.
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a movable body moving luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. while the moving body is being moved to the next scene, the moving body moving luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a switching sound when the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs a sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the performance of the SP first half reach by the operation of the reel. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation may be displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the reel is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table for the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP while the reel is rising, allowing the promotional part of the first half of the SP to be displayed optimally.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The display means includes:
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the cut-in effects and the lamp control in the button displays for said cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting/flashing, etc., from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides an ideal teasing part performance.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the first notification performance,
the display means displays a prompt to prompt a specific action by a player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a first notification performance luminance data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display the prompting display for prompting the specific action, but displays a win/lose provocation display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a second notification performance luminance data table,
The first notification performance luminance data table is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when operation prompt is not given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene that follows the first scene,
In the first scene, first moving image data is used;
In the second scene, second moving image data is used;
The second scene is slower in speed than the first scene,
the first moving image data is moving image data in which a movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images;
The second video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the image movement slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the character movement from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is less than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the first pattern appears to be swaying. The first design is displayed,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-draw part, when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and the epilogue part is transitioned to the re-draw part, and when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode, There are a time when the first pattern is displayed at a timing when the epilogue part is shifted to a re-selection part, and a time when the first pattern is displayed at a timing when the epilogue part is shifted to a re-selection part,
The performance execution means performs a performance when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and the game transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. The first symbol is visually recognized both when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-selection part and when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-selection part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode. A specific display that is difficult to select is performed, and the first symbol is displayed in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the scale may be provided in the time until the specified timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the pattern movement at the start of the re-lottery, and makes the series of performances look good.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. This is the state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state is a lead-in part until the result of the control being made to the advantageous state is notified, and a part after the result is notified. and a first epilogue part in which the user is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state is an introduction part until the result of the control being made to the advantageous state is notified, and after the result of the notification, and a second epilogue part in which the user is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for effect using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display switching is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display switching, and the light-emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light-emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern stop, the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. using the light emitting means for effect control,
When the variable display of the pattern is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. The light emitting means for effecting the performance is controlled by using the light emitting means.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the change pattern command for the next change is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next change, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table that corresponds to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the effect when a miss occurs to the next change, making the series of effects look good.

[Start 1]
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emission means using the brightness data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the reel to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the reel is rising. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM for the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be avoided. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table for the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the second half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body is moved, a reduced image is displayed at a specific display position,
The movable body is moved so that the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer having priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern;
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the post-switching performance in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the reel, the "2" symbol is displayed in a reduced form in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the reel is actuated, the reel falls so that the "P" character among the letters of the reel is positioned at a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the reel falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the reel rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the reel, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display from becoming unattractive due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the action of the reel. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position that overlaps with the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. Also, because a reduced decorative pattern is displayed while the reel is rising, it is possible to switch to an appropriate presentation according to the reel action.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves, and an effect display is performed before the movable body reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the reel operates and displays the effect image before it reaches the bottom of the drop. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, resulting in a suitable switching of effects that incorporate the reel.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the display of the developed performance, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the prop may be displayed when switching from an effect image to an image of the performance that develops into the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the prop rises, the letters "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by linking the performance when it switches, it is possible to show a suitable performance change involving the prop.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the blocking display has a shape in which doors close from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which doors close from one end of the screen to the other end.

Specifically, the shutters described above are configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal way. The shutters may also be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. The shutters may also be configured to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the occlusion display, the edges of the opposing doors that make the performance display invisible are colored black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 above, the image of the edge of the shutter is rendered in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), eliminating any sense of incongruity. A similar sense of incongruity can be eliminated when the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the blocking display undergoes a closing operation and then an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is performed during an intermediate stage in which the shielding display is being released, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases stepwise, while the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress until the release operation of the shielding display is completed, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 60 and 61 above, after the shutter opens, the SP first half reach begins. Until the shutter is fully open, the SP first half reach effect does not begin, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect progresses. In this way, since the SP first half reach effect is an effect that players want to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction by having the effect executed before the shutter opens.

[Start 9]
When the release operation of the shielding display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off.
After the release operation of the masking display is completed and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Also, the prodding parts of SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to go dark before the closing operation of the shielding display starts, and the closing operation ends in time with the effect display going completely dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) above, the screen brightness is first lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time for it to close. Here, if the screen brightness were lowered in time with the shutter closing, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the screen will darken at an appropriate speed, making the series of effects look optimal.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an execution part when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified. and an epilogue part in which
The display means can perform a shielding display in which the effect display is made invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and the effect display is made visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state. can be,
The occlusion display is performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the shielding display when performing the shielding display;
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data is switched when the shielding display performs a closing operation, and the brightness data is not switched during the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until when the shielding display performs an opening operation. It is composed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters are closed, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters are opened, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 12]
The performance display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
During the start part, while a display corresponding to a predetermined effect is being performed, the blocking display performs a closing operation, and then the blocking display performs an opening operation, thereby starting the introduction part;
There are a plurality of types of introduction parts, and it is not possible to know which introduction part is to be executed until the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter opens. This allows the player to have hope of which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may also be performed at times other than the timing of the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in a pseudo consecutive win. Also, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) may be displayed that suggests a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, and the active hold may change in response to that icon image (for example, changing from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can increase the interest of the shutter effect.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters are closed, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters are opened, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until the release action is taken, or the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until a prompting display is taken to encourage the player to take an action.

Specifically, in addition to the pattern described above where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided where the shutter closes and then a button image is displayed, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, which increases the interest of the shutter effects.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the blocking display becomes the closed state and the promotion display is performed, the maintained luminance data is switched to the changing luminance data, and after the promotion display is performed, the luminance data is switched back to the maintained luminance data.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action (for example, pressing a button, placing a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, a performance in which the shutter opens may be performed. Then, while such a shutter display is in a closed state, lamp control is performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) is maintained, while at the timing when the shutter display is in a closed state and the prompting display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to one in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, and after the prompting display is performed (while the prompting display is continuing), lamp control may again be performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used again after the prompting display is performed may be the same as or different from the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used before the prompting display is performed. This keeps the game effect lamp 9 lit while the shutter display is in the closed state, making it easier for the player to focus on the next performance that will be performed after the shutter display is in the open state.

[Start 17]
The prompting display is a display including a button image and prompting text for encouraging the player to take an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and luminance data is incorporated such that the luminance data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the performance using the shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to take an action (for example, pressing a button, or holding a hand over an infrared sensor), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, the shutter may be opened. In the prompting display, a sound (for example, the sound "push") that prompts the player to take an action may be output, and text (for example, the text "push") that prompts the player to take an action may be displayed. Furthermore, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to the sound that prompts the player to take an action. In this way, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the sound that prompts the player to take an action, so that the text display that prompts the player to take an action can be emphasized by the sound that prompts the player to take an action and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, and the player can be more effectively made to take an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Incitement 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the result of controlling the game to an advantageous state is notified.
The game includes a scene where the display is updated as the friendly character and the enemy character fight, and a scene where the friendly character takes damage.
The display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part.
There are more display changes than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, the provocation part, which involves the aforementioned provocation of whether or not the player will win, is updated with an alternating battle between friendly and enemy characters (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). Such provocation parts include scenes in which friendly characters take damage. Also, the provocation parts have a faster image display switching interval and a greater number of image display switching times than the epilogue part. This makes it possible to present the provocation part in a more favorable light by making the development faster in the provocation part than in the epilogue part.

[Incitement 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the first line of the friendly character is spoken, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the friendly character to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

[Incitement 3]
In the introductory part, the display duration of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the first friendly character to be displayed may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part. This allows the friendly character to be clearly recognized.

[Incitement 4]
There are scenes in which the dialogue sounds of friendly characters are output but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines, while still displaying the subtitles for the ally character that is displayed first.

[Incitement 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
In both the first and second introduction parts, the friendly characters play an active role.
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, there are SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP Second Half Reach A, SP Second Half Reach B, and SP Final Reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the first thing an ally character says is a line, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

[Incitement 6]
In the first introductory part, the first character plays an active role.
In the second introductory part, the second character plays an active role.
In the first introduction part, a line sound of a first character is output first, and a line subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the second character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, Yume Yume's character plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana's characters play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the first ally character, Yume Yume, speaks a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the first ally characters, Jam and Nana, speak a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in both provocation parts. Note that there may be one or more characters playing an active role. Also, the character playing an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

[Incitement 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). In these specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express in subtitles are output as lines, so the setting is such that subtitles are not displayed. However, even in these specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Incitement 8]
In a scene in which a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, in scenes in which a character appears (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color corresponding to the relevant character in the previous scene. Specifically, before scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character Maid B. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then lights up in pink corresponding to the character Nana-chan. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then lights up in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume-Yume. In this way, before a character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in the color corresponding to that character. Therefore, the change in the displayed character and the fact that the changed character is clearly indicated to the player in the form of the lamp can be expressed, making it a suitable provocation part.

[Incitement 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Incitement 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the second character is output;
The light emission control means
In the first scene, a light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene is configured such that when luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where a first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where a second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to a line sound uttered by the first character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means switches, but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch;
The luminance data table corresponding to the second scene is configured so that when the luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to the dialogue sound uttered by the second character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). This allows the player to conveniently see which character is speaking in a scene where multiple characters are displayed, by having the frame lamp light up or blink, and allows the player to easily see the effects of the provocative part.

[Incitement 11]
In a state in which the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which the dialogue sound of the first character is output and a scene in which the dialogue sound of the second character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 63 (b5) and (b6), there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

[Incitement 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

[Incitement 13]
Various sounds such as background music, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the performance in the introductory part.
During the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the performances performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, the work process when actually creating various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, images for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software to match this image. The completed image and sound are played, and the volume of the sound is then adjusted. In this series of work processes, the sound data is set so that, rather than outputting the sound with the same realism as the actual distance on the image, the reality is abandoned and a sound that ignores the actual distance is easily conveyed to the player is output. This allows the series of effects to be presented in an optimal way.

[Incitement 14]
When the output of an action sound and a dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when a character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when a physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the background music for the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter to match the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to convey the content of the presentation to the player more easily while still creating a sense of realism.

[Incitement 15]
When the dialogue sound output of a first character, which is far away, overlaps with the action sound output of a second character, which is close, when viewed from the front of the screen, the volume is adjusted so that the dialogue sound volume is louder than the action sound volume.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards realism and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 16]
In a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are not displayed, and a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are displayed, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles displayed is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 166 (B) and (C), when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles compared to when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the SP Reach background music. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP Reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP Reach louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period that is longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings in one child table WD9, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period shorter than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the promotion part, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period that is longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

[Incitement 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period shorter than the specific time period.

[Incitement 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In a specific scene, while a first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, a second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

[Incitement 22]
In a provocative scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When a line sound of one character is output, a first subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed, and thereafter, when a line sound of the other character is output, a second subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
The second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, and thereafter, when the second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, the display of the first subtitle is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out and the second subtitle fades in, displaying with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching, due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

[Incitement 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other and at least one of them has a fade effect applied, the subtitle is not output.
It is output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see when the subtitles change, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood both visually and aurally.

[Incitement 24]
In the advantageous state, music is output and lyrics are displayed.
When the display of the lyrics is switched from the first subtitle to the second subtitle, no fade effect is applied to either subtitle display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to understand the timing of the change in the subtitles (lyrics) even if the fade effect is not applied. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative piece of content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can easily understand the lyrics to be displayed next even without the fade effect. This makes it possible to omit the task of applying the fade effect during the jackpot round, and makes it possible to show the series of performances clearly.

[Incitement 25]
In both the introduction and epilogue parts, the characters' lines may overlap.
The dialogue sounds overlap more frequently in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, there are cases where the timing of subtitle display overlaps even in epilogue parts. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in epilogue parts where the period between subtitle display is longer than in teasing parts. This is because the performance progresses quickly in teasing parts, but not as quickly in epilogue parts. As a result, teasing parts are more likely to be displayed with overlapping subtitle displays than epilogue parts. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Incitement 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitles are displayed or when the display of the subtitles disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in certain scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. When the subtitle display is created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply fade effects depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display uniformly, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

[Incitement 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be switched.
It is possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this would create an awkward feeling when long lines of dialogue or lines with a fast tempo are output, so such a blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it will be difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, for subtitle displays for long lines or lines that progress quickly, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity will occur if the subtitle display is switched without a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incongruity can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it will be difficult to see the subtitle display if the fade effect is not applied. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such cases, the display area for the effects is reduced by the subtitle display, which ends up interfering with the effects in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. However, this problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, as in this embodiment.

[Provocative cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the cut-in effects and the lamp control in the button displays for said cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting/flashing, etc., from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides an ideal teasing part performance.

[Provocative cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button promotion is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 127 (r39) to FIG. 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed optimally.

[Provocative cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that dialogue. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, resulting in an ideal cut-in display.

[True or False 1]
In the part where the winner is notified,
The player is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
A prompt is displayed to encourage the player to take a specific action,
It is executed between the introduction and epilogue parts,
After the promotion display is performed, the movable body is moved.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the win or loss was determined was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene where the win or loss was determined, the player was notified of whether or not they had won the jackpot after operating a trigger as an operating means. Also, in the scene where the win or loss was determined, if a jackpot was reached, the reel moved after operating the trigger. This increases the interest of the presentation by creating an ideal scene where the win or loss was determined using the operating means.

[True or False 2]
In the winning/losing notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
When the unfolded display is being displayed before the promotion display is performed, the introduction display of the promotion display is performed, so that the unfolded display cannot be seen, and then the promotion display is performed in a state where the unfolded display can be seen.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), subtitles are displayed by ally characters before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the effect that was being executed becomes invisible due to the screen corresponding to the operating means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that becomes recognizable together with the image of the operating means. In this way, the introduction of the operating means is displayed on the entire screen to create an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed properly when the operating means can be operated, making it possible to optimally show the progression of the effect.

[True or False 3]
The deployment display is shown behind the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 130 (r48) to FIG. 131 (r51), the presentation is in progress even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operating means are displayed. In this way, by having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image in which the operating means can be operated (image (r51)), and also to the development of the presentation.

[True or False 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly each time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be allowed to progress while the promotion display is displayed. Here, the progression of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This makes it possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[5 correct or not]
When an unfolding display is performed while a promotion is in progress, it proceeds slower than it did before the promotion was in progress.

Specifically, the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the presentation that was being executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to focus on the prompting display, which is intended to cause the player to operate the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the presentation progress. Note that the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed can be made to progress slower than the presentation that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. This allows a difference in the speed of presentation progress between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 6]
The dialogue before the introductory text is echoed.

Specifically, it is preferable to have an echo added to the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) above. This will get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 7]
The introduction display is performed after terminating the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed during the development display before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitles displayed before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitles from overlapping.

[True or False 8]
The introductory part is composed of a predetermined period and a slow-motion period after the predetermined period and before the announcement of the result.
A character's movement is depicted using a plurality of image data during a predetermined period of time;
During the slow motion period, a single image data is provided with a special effect to depict the character's movement.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the image movement slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the character movement from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is less than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

[True or False 9]
The game has an introductory part where friendly and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introductory part.
The introductory part has a set period of time during which scenes showing allies and enemies alternate.
When the prompting display is being displayed during a predetermined period, the player can move on to the conclusion part,
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which the scenes displaying the ally and the scenes displaying the enemy alternate is gradually increased, and the promotion display is performed when the speed reaches its fastest;
Even in depictions in which scenes showing allies and scenes showing enemies alternate, each of the allies and enemies is reproduced using a single image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the speed at which the images of the ally character and the enemy character switch gradually becomes faster. In this way, a prompting display encouraging the player to operate the trigger is displayed after the image switching speed has reached its fastest, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will unfold, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a single image is being used to represent both the ally character and the enemy character.

[True or False 10]
The above-mentioned predetermined period during which the scene in which an ally is displayed and the scene in which an enemy is displayed are alternately switched over is also applied to a scene in which one reach effect develops into another reach effect.

Specifically, the slow motion period in (r48) may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach, or into the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be performed appropriately even when developing from the SP first half reach.

[True or False 11]
An enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is reused and only that portion is changed.

Specifically, during the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly and enemy characters may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for an friendly character, four images may be used repeatedly: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, by reusing the data for the character itself and changing only some of the data, it is possible to more faithfully express the character's movements while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or False 12]
During the slow motion periods, parts of the characters change.

Specifically, when a character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images during a slow-motion period in (r48), the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movements in order to make the movements appear smoother during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movements during the slow-motion period, the movements do not become awkward even if fewer images are used, and the movement can be more faithfully represented while reducing the data capacity.

[True or False 13]
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the first notification performance,
The display means displays a prompting display for prompting a specific action by a player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using the first notification performance luminance data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a prompting display for a specific action, but displays a winning or losing indicator,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a second notification performance luminance data table,
The first notification performance luminance data table is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when operation prompt is not given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

[True or False 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if there is a big win, the video of the hit epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the video of the loss epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused, so that the data capacity can be reduced while favorably stirring up the scene of the win/loss decision. Note that during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39).

[True or False 15]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is not performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which the predetermined luminance data is maintained;
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the teasing part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be clearly communicated to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

[True or False 16]
When the promotion display is performed, the display transitions in the following order: a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of moving images, and a third display period consisting of moving images that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed gathering in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene for deciding whether or not to win, an image of the win epilogue part is played if it is a jackpot, and an image of the miss epilogue part is played if it is a miss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the images appear to be moving is displayed. This allows a series of performances to be executed within a dynamic flow, resulting in a favorable flow of performances.

[True or False 17]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamps change in sequence from flashing white to lit red to flashing red, etc., enhancing the presentation of operations to encourage the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

[True or False 18]
Following on from the winning/losing announcement part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display for when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and losing epilogue part following the winning/losing determination scene shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, the image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is displayed after the performance of the reel action. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part and then returns to the normal screen. This allows for a flow of switching between multiple images following the winning/losing determination scene, which can be an ideal flow of performance.

[Right or Wrong 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when moving to the miss epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444." As a result, when there is a miss in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the frame lamp can be lit in a dimmer white color while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be appropriately notified that there has been a miss. Also, when moving to the loss epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part includes "D00", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the loss epilogue part is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when there is a loss in the SP final reach, which is darker than the red flashing in the win/lose branch, making it possible to conveniently notify the player that there has been a loss.

[Yes or No 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance, and the first notification performance for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state,
The first notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
the upper level table includes a first upper level table, a second upper level table, a third upper level table, and a fourth upper level table;
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for a first notification performance, a luminance data table for a second notification performance, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means
In an introduction part of a first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a brightness data table for the first notification performance;
In an introduction part of a second notification performance for notifying that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a second notification performance brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the second notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a fourth higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved are a common brightness data table.
The third higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period,
The fourth higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

[Right or Wrong 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is as follows:
A first pattern including an introduction part until the result of control to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the result of control to the advantageous state is notified;
a second pattern including an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and in which it is notified that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern of the notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
In a relief notification part in the notification performance of the second pattern, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to be higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loser 1]
Following on from the winning/losing announcement part,
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, an image for when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and an epilogue part for when the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is executed, in which the determination that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is notified by a decorative pattern;
Thereafter, the display is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the result is a loss after the win/loss determination, a loss symbol is displayed against a blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background seen when a reach begins. This allows the eye-catching screen to optimally show the screen transition when a loss occurs.

[Loser 2]
In the epilogue part when a winning combination is lost, an image when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in a blacked-out state, and the central pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-in state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background gradually blacks out when a winning combination is lost, while the center pattern gradually fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, so that the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look optimal.

[Loser 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means displays a decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so as to become gradually clearer, and displays a display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so as to become gradually darker, thereby displaying a notification that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The number of stages by which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is made darker is greater than the number of stages by which the decorative pattern is made clearer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background is blacked out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center pattern is faded in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). In this way, the image and center pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and fade-in, and because the number of steps of the change in transparency are different, the relationship between the two makes the display when losing look favorable.

[Loss 4]
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the image is blacked out before the center pattern of the decorative pattern is faded in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when a winning combination is lost, the background blacks out before the center pattern fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, and because the blackout is faster than the pattern fade-in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

[Loss 5]
When it is decided that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state before the blackout, the cut of the displayed image changes,
When it has been determined that control will not be effected in an advantageous state during blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed during a miss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed during the blackout remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed favorably by starting the blackout with an image that remains unchanged. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only part of the image moves very slightly.

[Loser 6]
The image when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state goes black, and the center pattern of the decorative pattern fades in, so that the transmittance of the center pattern becomes 0%, and the period during which the transmittance of one image required for blackout becomes 0% is maintained for a predetermined period of time.
In a predetermined period, the symbol itself is caused to oscillate for at least two periods,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the image of the middle pattern changes from a state of 100% transparency to a state of 0% transparency, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, when the winning combination is lost, the background blacks out and the middle pattern fades in, resulting in a 0% transparency middle pattern and a 0% transparency blacked-out background being displayed for a predetermined period of time, as shown in (X18) to (X20). This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period during which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and back to the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a 100% transparency to a 0% transparency state. The predetermined period may also be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. This allows the winning combination to be displayed in a favorable manner, since the middle pattern is displayed clearly for a predetermined period of time in a display with a 0% transparency blacked-out background.

[Loser 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information related to the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the eye-catching image to accurately convey information about the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Loser 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched.
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means includes:
in the second epilogue part, controlling a light-emitting means for effecting the performance using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, thereby controlling the light-emitting means for the effect;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light-emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth pattern stop to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance;
When the variable display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the change pattern command for the next change is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next change, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table that corresponds to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the effect when a miss occurs to the next change, making the series of effects look good.

[No. 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the reach is a table that loops and references the brightness data until the change condition is met,
In the introductory part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when a specific change condition is met, such as when the game progresses to an SP reach, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach or other performance after the change, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table is performed. In this case, while the SP reach performance is being performed, in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. Also, when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the error brightness data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. This makes it possible to make the series of performances that are being performed look more favorable.

[Loser 10]
After being switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used even if a pattern determination command is received, and thereafter, when there is no reserved ball, the luminance data table corresponding to the background continues to be used even if a customer waiting command is received.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. This means that the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, so the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[Loser 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special pattern stops,
Upon receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from flashing to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from flashing to off when a symbol determination command is received, which is the trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

[Loser 12]
When the next change begins, the light emitting means of the special chart flashes,
When the next variation command is received, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol changes from off to flashing.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to flashing when a next variation pattern command is received, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it loses.

[Loser 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched.
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
when the background display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the stop display of the symbols is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the varying display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the varying display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the varying display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the brightness data table for misses is used from the effect where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the effect where the background image blacks out at (X41). After the background image blacks out, the eye-catching image is displayed. The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45). After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. In other words, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the timing of switching to the next variation. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. With this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, making the miss look favorable.

[Loser 14]
The final luminance data is off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the light off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data for maintaining the light off. The brightness data table for the background does not use data for maintaining the light off. As a result, since the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for maintaining the light off, being off when the background is displayed is unique to a miss, making it easier to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loser 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no reserved memory after the design is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. In this way, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loser 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled includes an introduction part until the fact that the advantageous state will be controlled is notified, and a second epilogue part for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
The display means includes:
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the switch display is set to a higher luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when a miss occurs). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Loser 17]
The initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher luminance than the initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) that corresponds to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Role-player Action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamps light up dimly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when there is a win. As a result, when there is a win, the frame lamps change color at shorter intervals than when there is a loss, so that the player can easily understand that there is a win by the lighting mode of the frame lamps. Furthermore, when there is a win, the lighting of the frame lamps is more emphasized than when there is a loss, while when there is a loss, the lighting of the frame lamps can be made more subdued than when there is a win, and as a result, the player can easily understand whether there is a win or a loss by the contrasting lamp modes.

[Role Action 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is lit so that the rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. This allows for a performance where the achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between the rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the big win and congratulate the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is lit in smooth rainbow colors without achromatic colors, allowing for a performance where the player is calmly congratulated on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a congratulatory part that follows the announcement of a decision to control the game to an advantageous state, and includes a scene in which an enemy character is defeated, no scene in which an ally character is damaged, and has fewer display changes than the introduction part.

Specifically, the aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition in the event of a miss, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, there are fewer image display switches in the presentation than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate presentation to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of presentations can be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and the primary focus can be on conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

[Epilogue 3]
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are always displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue in the epilogue part. This makes it easy to see what the characters are saying in the epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introduction, when an enemy character is injured, the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character is damaged, a dialogue subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the teasing part where the enemy character receives damage. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the winning epilogue part where the enemy character receives damage (the crab catching scene). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the teasing part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introduction part and a second introduction part, each of which has a different development and number of lines, but the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP Reach, which is the provocative part, and each has a different development of the performance and the number of lines. However, in any SP Reach, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the character during the SP Reach. This makes it easier to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, regardless of which SP Reach is executed. Also, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can be used to enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, the primary focus is on conveying the performance through image changes, and auxiliary subtitle display can be used to prevent the performance from being a hindrance. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the provocative part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are displayed finally in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5)-(s6) above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. In this way, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period of time, it is possible to make the player bask in the afterglow of the big win and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, it is also possible to display them for longer when the number of characters is greater than when the number of characters is smaller. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), it is sufficient to design the winning epilogue part so that the period for which the subtitle display is displayed is longer.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is located at the advanced position, a background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body operates according to a retraction pattern in which the movable body is retracted, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display before the retraction pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed in accordance with the action of the reel falling. After that, the reel moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. As the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return action to the initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation.
The timing of the switch to the epilogue display is linked to the start of the return movement.

Specifically, the premise is that the reel will return to its initial position, and the timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be during the ascent related to the start of the return motion. In this way, the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at a timing related to the start of the return motion, so the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel motion ends before the reel returns to its initial position. This prevents a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and does not impair the aesthetics of the presentation. The timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. The reel may also perform a rotation or movement motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return movement, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinction.

Specifically, when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. In this way, the lighting mode of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

[Epilogue 10]
The transition is suggested by the background music that is linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue.
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music is output.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be suggested by the BGM, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect indicating the change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of a display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be indicated by the sound effect, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music and a sound effect indicating a change are output.

Specifically, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is indicated by the background music and sound effects, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 13]
When the epilogue is displayed while the moving object is returning, the dialogue sound is not output.
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the reel returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the epilogue display is made after the reel returns to its initial position, the dialogue sound is output and subtitles are displayed. This avoids the subtitles being displayed at a time when they are difficult to see, and allows the epilogue part to be executed optimally.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output when the moving object is retracted.
At the timing when the retraction of the movable body is completed, a dialogue sound is outputted, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound is output in the epilogue display and subtitles are displayed. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed smoothly.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the image display starts.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8), the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. This makes it possible to present the presentation in the winning epilogue part in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image when the symbols are finally displayed and the player recognizes the final completed symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbol presentation is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the characters and other images displayed as the background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see because the background to the decorative symbol is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that plays before the pattern starts to appear is treated as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image just before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the pattern release starts.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are applied at the same time as the image freezes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect reminiscent of a comic strip. By adding a special effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 173 to Fig. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel changes to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, so that the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
A first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introductory part;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is terminated, a decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
While no switching effect is applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbols are displayed, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbol, but no effect image is added to the small symbol. Furthermore, the decorative symbol has a higher priority than the decorative symbol and the effect image, and is displayed in the foreground. This enhances the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbol, while allowing the player to recognize that the small symbol is being displayed in a changing state, making this a suitable epilogue part for winning.

[Epilogue 23]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the presentation of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the presentation of the decorative pattern ends and the pattern swings up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative pattern. In this way, by synchronizing the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, the flow of the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 24]
When the symbols are drawn in the redraw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5), when the symbols are displayed in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have a higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This makes it possible to increase the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while letting the player know that the small symbols are being displayed in a changing state.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the redraw part, the small symbols are in a state indicating that it has been determined that they will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the small symbols change again in conjunction with the transition to the redraw part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the patterns are displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a aligned state. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may change again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be synchronized for an optimal display.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The epilogue part is,
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to an epilogue part is displayed;
A second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the epilogue part, a first upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a second scene in the epilogue part, a second upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light emitting mode to a rainbow light emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display;
the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common luminance data table;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data for a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used during the winning notification performance and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning pattern, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using frame lamps, while reducing data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and the result of the notification performance is notified,
The re-draw part includes a re-draw result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area and the result of the re-draw is notified,
The light emission control means
in a result notification scene in the epilogue part, a first upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
In a re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second superior table;
In the result-informing scene in the epilogue part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display of the result-informing scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light-emitting mode to a rainbow light-emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result-informing scene;
In a re-draw result notifying scene in the re-draw part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-draw result notifying scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for making the re-draw result notifying scene have a rainbow light emission mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-draw result notifying scene;
The brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the result notifying scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the re-lottery result notifying scene in the re-lottery part are a common brightness data table,
The first higher level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarging and displaying the result-announcement scene, and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light-emitting mode,
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result informing scene, and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final pattern is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be seen better by the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol. In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display. According to this, when the winning epilogue part video is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue part video, and when the winning epilogue part video ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the winning symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, scene changes can be made to look good. In this way, the epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that a big win has been displayed due to the reduced decorative symbols, even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, a decorative pattern is positioned on an edge of the display area;
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at an edge position in the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and prevents the user from mistaking the display of some kind of message for another when the pattern is displayed, allowing the winning epilogue part to be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, a decorative pattern is located at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be set to move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and to make the series of performances look optimal.

[Re-draw performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Execute the first re-draw performance or the second re-draw performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

[Re-selection performance 2]
When an image corresponding to the background where the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when a screen is shifted to a re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-selection effect 3]
When moving to the re-draw screen, the decoration pattern alignment is temporarily stopped,
When the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is displayed with a swaying effect, but the image corresponding to the background and the light emission mode of the light-emitting means are switched to those for re-drawing while the swaying display with the effect is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with converging lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-draw presentation as shown in (A6), the effect image with converging lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to being turned off. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-draw presentation, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, while the background and lamps switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative pattern the re-draw presentation started from.

[Re-selection effect 4]
When the pattern feed begins, the decorative pattern that has been displayed since the epilogue shrinks,
The image is reduced and then the image begins to move.

Specifically, when the symbol-sending effect in the re-draw effect starts, the decorative symbol that has remained displayed since the winning epilogue part starts changing from a reduced state. This makes it possible to clearly show the flow of the series of effects without having to execute a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

[Re-selection effect 5]
The image feed starts at a reduced size, and all other images are reduced to the same size.

Specifically, in the symbol advance performance, the change begins with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the change is a uniform reduced size. This makes the change during the symbol advance performance appear smoother, and makes the flow of the series of performances look better.

[Re-selection effect 6]
While a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, the display transitions in the order of an action prompt display, acceptance of the action, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of the enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery presentation, a reduced-sized decorative pattern is used to advance the pattern, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a pattern release presentation is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that will be finally notified is enlarged and displayed from the moment the pattern is released. In this way, since the pattern that will finally be notified begins to expand, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notification pattern will be.

[Re-selection effect 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-draw performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbols are confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-selection effect 8]
The pattern transfer according to a predetermined pattern is a performance in which the pattern is temporarily stopped and then the next pattern is transferred in order, and after the last pattern is transferred, the pattern is returned to the temporarily stopped pattern and then the next pattern is transferred in order.
The predetermined pattern is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in that order, which is then looped.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then all the decorative symbols are sent again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are sent in order, which makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 9]
While the patterns are being sent in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns being sent are displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding performance during the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched as follows: "2" symbol with 0% transparency, "2" symbol with 50% transparency, "3" symbol with 0% transparency, "3" symbol with 50% transparency, "4" symbol with 0% transparency, and "4" symbol with 50% transparency. This allows all symbols to be displayed properly with low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, so it is possible to know what symbol is being sent.

[Re-draw performance 10]
After the symbol transmission is started, the display time of each of the multiple types of decorative symbols is the same until a notification is made as to whether or not the symbol will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol-sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," but the time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

[Re-draw performance 11]
The action prompt is displayed while the image is being sent.
The action prompting display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the pattern being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position at which the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position at which the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol forwarding. Note that a portion of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

[Re-draw performance 12]
The action prompting display is started during the advancement of the symbols, that is, during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display begins at (A24) and (A25) after the change in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol advance performance has been repeated twice. In this way, the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol advance pattern has been repeated twice, allowing the player to clearly recognize the symbol advance performance.

[Re-draw performance 13]
When the symbol feed starts from the symbol "1", the timing when the action prompt display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When the symbol advance starts from the symbol "4", the timing when the action prompting display is performed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-draw performance may be other than symbol 2. Even in such cases, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt is constant. For example, in the case of symbol 2, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed is the timing at which symbol 2 is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of symbol 5, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed should be the timing at which symbol 5 is displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol starts the re-draw performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. This allows for constant control, reducing the processing burden.

[Re-draw performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part.
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, and a third re-selection performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same duration,
The light emission control means includes:
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3 symbol). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for an appropriate re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbols are confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 15]
The re-draw performance is displayed by combining display data other than the decorative pattern with display data of various decorative patterns, reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-draw performance.
By using common display data in each re-draw performance, the performance time is common between the respective re-draw performances, and only the type of the symbols being sent and the symbols to be displayed in the symbol output are different in each re-draw performance.

Specifically, the lottery presentation uses the same data whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, reducing the amount of data.

[Re-draw performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, the pattern display in the above-mentioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using approximately the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made approximately the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the promotion to the probability variable symbol has not been made. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, exactly the same. Also, in a state in which the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, it goes out and a re-draw performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistakingly believing that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been confirmed based on the lighting state of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the rainbow lighting when the "3" and "2" symbols are displayed swaying continues during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase data capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 17]
The animation when the first identification information is displayed includes an animation in which the pattern is displayed and then enlarged until it reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of effects is executed in which the pattern is first enlarged and then returned to normal size in the center of the screen. This allows the pattern display performance to be displayed in an optimal way by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

[Re-draw performance 18]
When temporarily stopping the arrangement of decorative symbols before the re-draw is performed and when informing whether the arrangement of decorative symbols will be upgraded in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data;
The common display data is combined with display data for a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns to display a plurality of kinds of patterns.

Specifically, in the pattern display performance described above, common pattern display data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data capacity while still providing a good appearance for the pattern display performance. Note that substantially the same data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance.

[Re-draw performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-selection,
The light emission mode in displaying the symbols is the same when the decorative symbol arrangement is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when a notice is given that the decorative symbol arrangement will not be upgraded by the re-draw.

Specifically, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-draw performance 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-draw performance,
The lighting state of the pattern is different when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when the decorative pattern alignment is promoted by the re-draw.
The light emission mode in the pattern display is more intense when a notice is given that the decorative pattern arrangement will be upgraded by the re-draw than when the decorative pattern arrangement is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is executed.

Specifically, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as part of the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during times tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamps.

[Re-draw performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which the player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The means of performance execution are:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting a player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a second mode when a predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is performed at a second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the first pattern is made difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the first pattern is displayed stopped in a first manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and the effect of the symbols rotating and shrinking and then shaking is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the common effect can be performed, so that the symbols can be stopped cleanly and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

[Re-draw performance 22]
When an operation is performed at a first timing of the effective period of the operation, after a notification of whether or not the player has been promoted is made, the decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly until a predetermined timing for the change arrives;
When an action is performed at a second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the action, after notification of whether or not the action is to be promoted, a decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly by the amount by which the action was earlier than the first timing until a predetermined timing of the change arrives, and the time is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at a first timing during the effective operation period, a notification of whether or not the player will be promoted is issued, and then the display of the swaying decorative pattern is displayed (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at a second timing earlier than the first timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2)). When the push button 31B is operated at a third timing earlier than the second timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1)). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the time the pattern sway. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

[Re-draw performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts when the swaying decorative pattern starts to expand and rotate while a white light flashes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once, which is different from the previous pattern appearance. In this way, regardless of the pattern position in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, a different appearance is executed after the whiteout, so that the flow of the appearance until the pattern stops does not feel unnatural.

[Re-draw performance 24]
The decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position as an axis,
The swaying display is such that the decorative patterns are positioned in the order of the first position, the second position, the third position, the second position, the first position, the fourth position, the fifth position, the fourth position, the first position, and the second position, and the predetermined performance is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative patterns are always swayed and displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings backward from (J10) to (J12), and then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. This series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be in the initial position facing forward, as shown at (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Re-draw performance 25]
The starting point when the light emitting means is made to emit rainbow light during the second part is to emit rainbow light at the start of the predetermined performance.

Specifically, it is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

[Re-draw performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying,
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner,
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode, and when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the scale may be provided in the time until the specified timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the pattern movement at the start of the re-lottery, and makes the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 27]
Regardless of which of the multiple types of introduction parts you win from, the re-draw performance is the same.

Specifically, the time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-draw effect is executed can be made common to all of the multiple reaches. This can reduce the data size of the effect data.

[Re-draw performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once swaying before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen is a movement in which the pattern sways from the front to the back on the spot on an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the white-out screen may be a movement in which the pattern expands and rotates once in the clockwise direction on an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern. In this way, by displaying a white-out between the movement that is an extension of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part which is a branch of notification as to whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state and is not notified by operation of the operation means as a trigger,
In the predetermined introduction part, since there is no point where the scale is shifted, if it is decided that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in the predetermined introduction part, there is no shaking in the swaying display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern until the re-draw performance is executed, but the same re-draw performance as that of a reach where the scale shift occurs is executed.

Specifically, among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the player of any button operation or other prompts at the branch point when determining whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance can be executed in the same way as in SP reaches that do cause a time shift. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of whether or not there is a time shift, so that no sense of incongruity is created even when there is only one re-draw performance. Furthermore, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data volume can be reduced.

[Re-draw performance 30]
In the flow of going to the re-draw performance after the swinging display of the decorative pattern at the big win in the specified introduction part,
The timing of the transition to the re-draw performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the patterns after the white-out screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the patterns before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the patterns before the white-out screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the patterns move from a right-side position (K3) to a front position (K5) to a left-side position (K6). In other words, when the patterns are swinging in a clockwise direction in one of a series of movements, a white-out is executed by a re-draw performance, and then the patterns continue to expand and rotate to the right. In this way, the series of clockwise movements of the patterns from the pattern swinging period to the re-draw performance can be used to prevent the movement of the patterns from feeling unnatural.

<Terminology>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in the present specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (fluctuating display) includes the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "changes" in the patterns include updating the display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns, scrolling the display of multiple types of patterns, transforming one or more patterns, enlarging/reducing one or more patterns, turning on/flashing/turning off lamps (fourth pattern unit 50, special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, etc.), etc.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

"Reduced symbols" are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols when they are reduced in size. When the reduced symbols are displayed, a number symbol that is the same as the decorative symbol is displayed on the edge of the screen, but smaller than the decorative symbol.

The "small patterns" include patterns that correspond to the changing display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative patterns. The small patterns are arranged horizontally in a row and correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

"Confirmation of the pattern" includes the stopping of the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display section 53, the special pattern 2 variable display section 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing, and the final determination of the pattern in that special pattern game. For example, this includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R have all stopped.

The "pattern determination period" includes a period during which the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, the special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing. For example, it includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R each stop, and the display result is displayed definitively.

"Reach" includes the situation where decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be displayed in a variable manner when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed form part of a winning combination, and includes a situation where, for example, the decorative symbol "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol "2" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the decorative symbol display in the center decorative symbol display area 5C continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

"Turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (the value indicating the lowest luminance). Note that "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) may also include a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is a value close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2". Note that a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is a value close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", may be included in "turning on" or "almost turning off".

"Lighting" or "illumination" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (illuminating) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when it is off, and includes a state in which the value of the luminance data is equal to or greater than the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to the above-mentioned "off." "Lighting" refers to constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing its luminance.

"Flashing" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes a state in which the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and includes the lamp repeating "on" and "off" over time. Also, "flash" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "on" and "almost off" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, the brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the lowest (the lamp is dimmed), and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the highest (the lamp is brightest). As described above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the smallest, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the largest. Note that "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent light bulbs.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes colors represented by the light emitted by one or more light-emitting elements contained in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements, such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the LED lights up in various colors as the three light-emitting elements emit light depending on the current to the three light-emitting elements, which is adjusted by an LED driver based on brightness data. Note that the "lighting color" of a lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element; for example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing, and in the case of an LED consisting of only "R" (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lamp's lighting colors include colors that are made up of seven different colors. For example, the "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the colors mentioned above, and may be made up of the other seven colors. Even with the same "rainbow colors," the lighting pattern of the rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data, just as the lighting pattern differs between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 256.

"Colors corresponding to characters" include colors that are predefined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red, and so on.

"The light color corresponding to a character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes colors that are predetermined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, "the light color corresponding to a character" includes the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character, the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu.

"Dialogue sounds" include sounds that correspond to words spoken by characters appearing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are output in time with the words spoken by those characters. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, sounds (dialogue sounds) that correspond to words spoken by characters are output in time with the image of the character that appears in the performance.

"Dialogue subtitles" include characters corresponding to dialogue sounds that are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the dialogue sounds are output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle displays.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds that are generated by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, physical sounds that would be generated by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes simulated sounds that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, simulated sounds (onomatopoeia) that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, it includes an action in which the Yume Yume character chases the Bakuchu character.

The "re-draw effect" includes an effect that is executed before the pattern is determined, in which a normal jackpot pattern that does not result in a special jackpot (for example, an even number pattern such as a "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing display of the decorative pattern, and then the normal jackpot pattern is upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3") to arouse interest in whether or not the pattern will be upgraded.

"Replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-draw effect", and includes the display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is replaced by other patterns in sequence, causing the decorative patterns to change one after another. In this embodiment, "replacement display" includes a display in which the "2" pattern fluctuates at high speed and is replaced by other patterns in sequence, until the "2" or "3" pattern finally stops.

"Repeated display" refers to the repetition of the same display, and refers to the repetition of a display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed multiple times with the same animation. As an example, "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" pattern changes rapidly and is replaced by other patterns in sequence, until the "7" pattern finally stops.

The "swaying display" displays the decorative pattern while swaying, indicating that the change has not ended and is still ongoing.

A "stop display" is when the decorative pattern is displayed still and not moving, indicating that the fluctuation has ended.

"Swing speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while being displayed swinging.

The "first pattern aspect," "second pattern aspect," and "third pattern aspect" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative pattern. For example, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging up and down, if the first aspect is in the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Also, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging back and forth, if the first aspect is in the front position, the second aspect is the left-facing position, and the third aspect is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state, and notifies the player that a jackpot game state has been reached.

"Advancing a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable body moving from its initial position. The edge of the movable area into which the prop moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable body (prop) moving from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position within the movable area in which the prop moves is the retrenched position.

"Effect display for moving movable body" is a display to enhance the visual effect around the reel on the screen as the reel moves to the advance position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the reel movement stand out in accordance with the reel movement when the reach develops into the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. In other words, the story is displayed to the player in a continuous sequence, without interruption by scene changes or other such events.

"Part" and "scene" each refer to a section that makes up a performance, with a part being a larger section than a scene. Parts are divided according to roles.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in the display, and in particular to a change in the background, characters, etc. that are displayed.

A "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed by interrupting the currently displayed image. The cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot by the color of the cut-in display. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is a presentation that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal play. The eye-catching display serves to make it easy to understand that the Super Reach has ended.

"Shielding display (shutter display)" is a display in which the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, shielding the image that was displayed before the shielding display was performed. The shielding display may also be performed by displaying something other than a shutter to shield the image.

"The brightness data changes" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table reaches 0, and the next brightness data is used. The change in brightness data means that the light emission mode of the lamp changes. The change in the light emission mode of the lamp gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"Brightness data does not switch" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table does not reach 0, and that brightness data continues to be used. By not switching brightness data, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. By keeping the light emission mode of the lamp constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped and is not being updated.

"Video data" is data for displaying videos, including animations. Images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed, several tens of images per second, to give the appearance of movement. Video data may be compressed before being stored.

The "first video data" is video data that is created using many images to move a character.

The "second video data" is video data that is created using fewer images to move the character.

"Specific character movement" refers to the movement that corresponds to a specific character among the multiple characters that appear in the performance.

"Blackout" is an effect in which a black image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing the display area to go dark (black out) so that the image displayed in the display area cannot be seen. The blackout may be performed in such a way that the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the darkened state.

"Whiteout" is an effect in which a white image is displayed (whiteout) in the display area of the image display device 5 to make the image displayed in the display area unrecognizable. The whiteout may be in a form in which the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration for which the white image is displayed.

"A specific display that is difficult to see" refers to an image displayed on the screen that hides the displayed decorative symbols from the player. For example, a white image is displayed across the entire screen (whiteout), making the decorative symbols invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means gradually changing from a state where a background image is displayed to a state where a specific image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where the room background is displayed, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually decreasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image at 100% transparency, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Moreover, fade-out means, in contrast to fade-in, gradually changing from a state where a specific image is visible overlapping the background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where an image showing dialogue is displayed on top of the room background, the image showing dialogue is gradually made invisible. Gradually making invisible means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 0% transparency, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and after 1 second the dialogue image becomes invisible. The fade effect also includes a crossfade, which simultaneously fades in and fades out, swapping images.

<Description of the invention using multiple configurations>
The invention having the above-mentioned multiple characteristic points and particularly exhibiting a synergistic effect will be described below. The multiple characteristic points may be characteristic points in the same part or may be characteristic points in different parts.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (1)] (2020-297)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
Scenes in which the character's dialogue is output but the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
a specific scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output;
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters are outputted louder than the action sounds corresponding to the actions of the characters.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 170, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, resulting in a better appearance of the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (2)] (2020-298)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means includes:
In a specific scene in the introduction part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output;
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to the scene after switching is output.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, 171, and 172
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided, and a player's sense of elation is heightened by stirring up the player until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a sense of celebration, so that a sharp performance can be provided with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification performance, the reality of the performance can be brought out by outputting a physical sound as part of the performance in the introduction part, and the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, the reel moves, and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the executed series of performances can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (3)] (2020-300)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means includes:
In a specific scene in the introduction part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output;
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to an epilogue part is output.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, 173, and 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is excited until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid performance can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification performance, a physical sound is output as part of the performance in the introduction part to make the performance more realistic, and the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return operation to the initial position. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the executed series of performances can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (4)] (2020-301)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by emphasizing the lighting of the frame lamps in the first epilogue part more than when there is a loss, while by making the lighting of the frame lamps in the second epilogue part more subdued than when there is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (5)] (2020-302)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to an action of the character;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the hit is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of excitement in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, a physical sound is output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, the sound used to move the device to notify the player of a hit is The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, so that the player is intuitively informed of a win through the flashing manner, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look ideal, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (6)] (2020-303)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to an action of the character. The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying and to enhance the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, it is possible to better visualize the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (7)] (2020-304)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, in the introduction part, physical sounds are output as part of the effect to bring out the reality of the effect, and the content of the effect can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, all of the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect are displayed. By switching the display using this, it is possible to suitably arouse the player, and by switching to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), and then not switching the brightness data table even when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent), by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the pattern is stopped, and to prevent dissatisfaction of the player due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission, and it is possible to suitably display the epilogue part and re-draw part, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (8)] (2020-305)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 172, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is encouraged to play until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid presentation can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification performance, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound in the introduction part, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, and further, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (9)] (2020-306)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figs. 168-170, 173, 174, 213, 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is encouraged to win or lose until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid presentation can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification performance, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound in the introduction part, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position, the beauty of the display can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the executed series of performances can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (10)] (2020-307)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 213, 214, 261, 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of events in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introduction part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by emphasizing the lighting of the frame lamps in the first epilogue part more than when there is a loss, while by making the lighting of the frame lamps in the second epilogue part more subdued than when there is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (11)] (2020-308)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the win/loss informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 213, 214, and 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result of the win/loss notification, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a sharp presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound in the introduction part, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, a brightness data table for moving a movable body used when moving a role to notify a win is provided. The brightness data table for the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors alternately without any achromatic colors in between, making it a rainbow that flashes in a smooth manner, so that the player is intuitively informed of a win through the flashing pattern, and then the smooth pattern gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (12)] (2020-309)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 175, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introduction part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying and to enhance the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (13)] (2020-310)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 176, 177, 182, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result of the win is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds in the introduction part, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, a replacement display is performed using all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect, thereby encouraging the player to The brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), and thereafter, even when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched. By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the pattern is stopped, which may result in a poor appearance, and to prevent flickering caused by the switching of light emission from causing dissatisfaction to the player. This makes it possible to make the epilogue part and re-draw part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (14)] (2020-311)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at a time of scene change when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body at a time of scene change and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the scene change, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a win or lose when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a win or lose while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when notifying whether it is a hit or miss when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body when notifying whether it is a hit or miss to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emission means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when notifying whether it is a win or lose when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 171 to 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is encouraged to play until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a sense of celebration, so that a sharp presentation can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of flows in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to the initial position. Also, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and further, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (15)] (2020-312)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introduction part, the movable body advances from a first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying a change of scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The light emission control means
when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is excited until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid performance can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to the initial position in the series of flows in the notification effect. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow of the introduction part is made to look smooth, and further, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals in the first epilogue part executed when the reel wins than in the second epilogue part executed when the reel loses, the player can easily understand that he has won by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by emphasizing the lighting of the frame lamps in the first epilogue part more than when there is a loss, while by making the lighting of the frame lamps in the second epilogue part more subdued than when there is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (16)] (2020-313)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at a time of scene change when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body at a time of scene change and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the scene change, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when notifying the winning/losing;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body when informing whether the winning or losing is configured to sequentially use brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of events in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display that corresponds to the scene after the switch before the reels complete their return operation to their initial position. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch while the reel is rising, the reel moves and the flow of the introductory part is performed can be made to look smooth. Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the reel to notify of a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, intuitively notifying the player that it is a win through the flashing manner, and then, by giving a sense of celebration without being too emphasizing it through the smooth manner, the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are performed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (17)] (2020-314)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is encouraged to win or lose until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid presentation can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to the initial position during the series of flows in the notification effect. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, so that the reel moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and further, by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part can be enhanced, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (18)] (2020-315)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 176, 177, and 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of events in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display that corresponds to the scene after the switch before the reels complete their return operation to their initial position. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the role, the role moves, and the flow of the introduction part being executed can be made to look smooth. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery performance is performed, all the patterns that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance are displayed in a swapping manner, so that the player can be suitably excited. At a specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and then, even at the timing when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows is continued to be used, so that the appearance is not deteriorated due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the pattern stops, and the player is not dissatisfied due to the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission. This makes it possible to make the epilogue part and the re-lottery part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (19)] (2020-316)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In the first epilogue part, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby informing the user that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state;
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to a first epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a first epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a first epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is excited until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid performance can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of flows in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return movement to the initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and further, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval in the first epilogue part executed when the reel wins than in the second epilogue part executed when the reel loses, the player can easily know that he has won by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by emphasizing the lighting of the frame lamps in the first epilogue part more than when there is a loss, while by making the lighting of the frame lamps in the second epilogue part more subdued than when there is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (20)] (2020-317)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of events in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reels complete their return movement to their initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, the reel moves and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth. Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the reel to notify of a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, intuitively notifying the player that it is a win through the flashing manner, and then, by giving a sense of celebration without being too emphasizing it through the smooth manner, the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (21)] (2020-318)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. [Drawings] Figures 173 to 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of events in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reels complete their return movement to their initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, as the reel rises, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the epilogue part, so that the reel moves and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying and to enhance the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (22)] (2020-319)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A performance execution means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. [Drawings] Figs. 173, 174, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of events in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reels complete their return movement to their initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the role, the role moves, and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be smoothly shown. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw performance is performed, all the patterns that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw performance are displayed in a swapping manner, so that the player can be suitably excited. At a specific timing of the re-draw part (the timing after the patterns are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and then, even at the timing when the patterns stop (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows is continued to be used, so that the appearance is not deteriorated due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the patterns are stopped, and the player is not dissatisfied due to the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission. This makes it possible to suitably show the epilogue part and the re-draw part, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (23)] (2020-320)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In the first epilogue part, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby informing the user that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in a first epilogue part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, thereafter switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings], Figs. 261 to 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when there is a loss, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when there is a win, making the epilogue part look good. Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the reel to notify of a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, intuitively notifying the player that there is a win through the flashing manner, and then, by giving a sense of celebration without being overly emphasized by the smooth manner, the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue can be looked good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are executed can be looked better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (24)] (2020-321)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in a first epilogue part in the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part in the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines spoken by a character in the first epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines spoken by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by emphasizing the lighting of the frame lamp in the first epilogue part more than when it is a loss, while making the lighting of the frame lamp in the second epilogue part more subdued than when it is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part than in the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part can be enhanced, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (25)] (2020-322)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-selection part executed after the first epilogue part;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a loss occurs, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw performance is performed, all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw performance are displayed in a swapped manner, thereby making it possible to suitably excite the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and thereafter, even at the timing when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows is continued to be used, thereby preventing the appearance from being poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and preventing the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission, thereby making it possible to make the epilogue part and the re-draw part look good, and as a result, it becomes possible to make the flow of the series of performances performed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (26)] (2020-323)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the hit is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a sharp presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the role to notify the hit is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then the brightness data table used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds corresponds to the epilogue part. The brightness data table is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, and the rainbow lights up in a smooth manner, so that the flashing manner intuitively informs the player that he or she has won, and then the smooth manner thereafter gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss announcement to the epilogue look good.Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying and to enhance the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (27)] (2020-324)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with an announcement performance that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the announcement of whether or not the game has been won, and an epilogue part is provided after the announcement of a win to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a sharp presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the announcement performance, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the device to announce a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and thereafter, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, thereby intuitively conveying to the player that it is a win through the flashing manner, and thereafter, the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic. In this way, the flow from the winning/losing notification to the epilogue can be displayed favorably, and further, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw performance is performed, all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw performance are displayed in a swapped manner, which favorably arouses the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and thereafter, even at the timing when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows is continued to be used, which prevents the appearance from being poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and prevents the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission. This makes it possible to favorably display the epilogue part and the re-draw part, and as a result, it becomes possible to better display the flow of the series of performances that are executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (28)] (2020-325)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 175 to 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the epilogue part is designed to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, making it easier to understand what the character is saying and enhancing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, all of the patterns that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect are displayed. By switching between the patterns, the player can be suitably aroused, and by switching to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), and then not switching the brightness data table even at the timing when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent) but continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the pattern is stopped, and to prevent dissatisfaction of the player due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission, and thus the epilogue part and the re-draw part can be suitably displayed, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (29)] (2020-403)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introduction part, there is a first scene in which a character's dialogue sound and an action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the first scene, a speech sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to an action of the character;
In the introductory part, there is a second scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by the character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the second scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, Figures 178-181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, even if subtitles are displayed so that they overlap, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see when the subtitles switch, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (30)] (2020-404)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
Scenes in which the character's dialogue is output but the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by the character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 178-181, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of events in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introduction part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in subtitles, and as a result, the flow of the series of events being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (31)] (2020-405)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided, and a player's sense of elation is heightened by hyping up the player until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, and a feeling of celebration is given, so that a sharp presentation can be provided with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to the initial position during the series of flows in the notification effect. In addition, the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, so that the reel moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and even if the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easy to see, making the switching of the subtitles easy to see, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (32)] (2020-406)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. [Drawings] Figs. 173, 174, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is excited until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid performance can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of flows in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return movement to the initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and even if the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easy to see, making the switching of the subtitles easy to see, and as a result, the flow of the executed series of performances can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (33)] (2020-407)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 178-181, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by making the lighting of the frame lamp in the first epilogue part more emphasized than when it is a miss, while making the lighting of the frame lamp in the second epilogue part more subdued than when it is a hit, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being performed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (34)] (2020-408)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the win/loss informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 178-181, 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used to move the device to notify the win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in this case is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, and is made to emit rainbow light in a smooth manner, so that the flashing manner intuitively informs the player that he or she has won, and then the smooth manner thereafter gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making it possible to effectively show the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue, and furthermore, even if the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (35)] (2020-409)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figures 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, the epilogue part is designed to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, making it easier to understand what the character is saying and enhancing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Furthermore, even if the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (36)] (2020-410)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 176 to 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to heighten the player's sense of elation until the result of the win/loss notification is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of flows in the notification effect, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw effect is performed, a switching display is performed using all of the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect, thereby suitably exciting the player, and at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), a brightness data table that emits light in rainbow is displayed. Then, even when the pattern stops (when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits rainbow light continues to be used, thereby preventing the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the pattern is stopped, which could result in a poor appearance, or flickering caused by the light emission switching, which could dissatisfy the player, and making the epilogue part and re-lottery part look good.Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (37)] (2020-411)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a speech sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the action of the character;
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, a physical sound is output as part of the effect in the introduction part to bring out the reality of the effect, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output. By outputting it in a large size, the contents of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player, and further, by positioning the reduced pattern on the edge of the screen while the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and when the image of the winning epilogue part finishes being played and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the pattern display, the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner. As a result, the flow of the series of presentations being executed can be displayed better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (38)] (2020-412)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character, and the display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 183, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result of the win is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds in the introduction part, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part. When the image of the winning epilogue part finishes being played and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner. As a result, it is possible to better visualize the flow of the series of effects being performed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (39)] (2020-413)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of events in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display that corresponds to the scene after the switch before the reels complete their return operation to their initial position. In addition, during the rise of the role, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch, so that the role moves and the flow of the introduction part being executed can be made to look smooth, and further, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced pattern is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part ends and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be made to look good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (40)] (2020-414)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of events in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reels complete their return movement to their initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the role, the role moves, and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth, and further, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced pattern is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to disturb the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part ends and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be made to look good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (41)] (2020-415)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
In the first epilogue part, a decorative pattern is displayed on an edge side of a display area while a story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed;
Then, the display of the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, when a display is made in a story development corresponding to the first epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and thereafter, when the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for enlarged display;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Fig. 183, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when there is a loss, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when there is a win, so that the epilogue part can be shown in a favorable manner, and further, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced pattern is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part is played and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be shown in a favorable manner. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (42)] (2020-416)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the win/loss informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, when a display is made in accordance with a story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and thereafter, when the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for enlarged display;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the hit is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a sharp presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the device to notify the hit is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to alternate between chromatic colors without any achromatic colors in between. By using the following configuration, the rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner intuitively conveys the winning to the player by the flashing manner, and then the smooth manner gives a feeling of celebration without overemphasizing, so that the flow from the winning/losing notification to the epilogue can be displayed in a favorable manner, and further, when the winning epilogue part image is being played, the reduced pattern is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue part image, and when the winning epilogue part image is played and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the winning pattern can be emphasized and displayed to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances that are executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (43)] (2020-417)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the epilogue part is designed to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, making it easier to understand what the character is saying. It is possible to make it easier to understand, and to enhance the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and further, by positioning the reduced pattern on the edge of the screen while the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the image of the winning epilogue part ends and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge side and the center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the pattern display, the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be displayed favorably. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (44)] (2020-418)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to heighten the player's sense of elation until the result of the win/loss notification is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, when a re-draw effect is performed in the re-draw part, a switching display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect is performed, thereby suitably exciting the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light, and then, even at the timing when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data is also displayed. By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the data table, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the pattern is stopped, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied due to the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission, and it is possible to make the epilogue part and the re-lottery part look good. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced image is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the image of the winning epilogue part ends and the pattern is displayed, the decorative image is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be looked at good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (45)] (2020-419)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been established in an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Even if subtitles are displayed overlapping each other in the series of events in the notification effect, the fade effect makes it easy to see the changes in the subtitles, making it easy to see when the subtitles change. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced patterns are positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part is played out and the pattern is displayed, the decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, allowing the winning epilogue part to be viewed in a favorable light. As a result, it is possible to better visualize the flow of the series of effects being performed.

<Example of time-saving control without going through a hit>
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a win (a big win, a small win, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to execute time-saving control without passing through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derived display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of the time-saving symbol, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for judging a jackpot, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, when a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery is conducted to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

(A5) In addition, when a lottery is held for a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when these random numbers are used as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of time-saving times differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for allocating the time-saving symbols can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and may be controlled to a time-saving state after the specified number of variable displays have been executed and the high-probability, low-base state has ended.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state as the display result (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hit notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are finished. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B7) A left hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because instructions on how to hit are displayed appropriately, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time for which the display state is maintained after the finalized surface result is displayed) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, the right-hit notification may not be executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the player to play smoothly because the instructions on how to play are given appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher expectation of a hit is executed among multiple types of super reach effects). This allows the expectation of a hit to be maintained without excessively encouraging the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving pattern (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving pattern (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a hit corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a hit)). This allows the excitement of the game to be increased because a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a hit is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with a different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of the multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This can draw the player's attention to the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) In the normal state, a game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute a performance based on the command. The command sent includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and when the performance control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information that is specified to execute a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information (such as not executing it at all or allowing it to be executed rarely). This allows the performance control to be executed appropriately according to the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to enable the execution of a common mode performance as a pre-reading preview performance during the restriction on the execution of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, when the expectation level of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally realize rescue for players through time-saving states.

(C2) The special condition may be established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in succession. This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent unnecessarily increased gambling.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when a specific condition is met, such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on, the backed up data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific condition is met. This prevents the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage from being initialized and remaining when the data is initialized, thereby preventing the amusement center from being disadvantaged.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right hit notification by a right hit lamp, etc.) may be issued. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern of the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern of the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to preferably execute a performance when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute similar effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, a time-saving state effect with a similar variable time may be executed when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count and when the time-saving state is entered after a jackpot has ended). This does not require new performance data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations (such as different presentations when transitioning to the time-saving state) when it is controlled to the time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed, and when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized or not, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) (e.g., different performances after transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized or not, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

In addition, it is conceivable that gaming machines with multiple game states can increase the efficiency of the number of changes in a specific game state by shortening the change display time or varying the time until the next change display begins. In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect that suggests which game state the game state is in, or a change time suggestion effect that suggests the change time to be executed. Specific control is explained below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 274 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided which perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 275). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 275), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 274). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 274).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 275).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 275).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the Presentation, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various presentations (presentations to inform the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The presentations are described below. The presentations are executed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the presentations may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 275. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 276 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 276, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 277. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 277 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 278 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 277. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 277.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 279. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 279 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically turn off the interrupt prohibition state is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 280 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 279 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 280, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic part 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic part 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko game machine capable of setting a setting value with different advantageous degrees for a player, such as a winning probability of a jackpot, by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees for a player as a setting value for the winning probability of a jackpot.

First, the setting values will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by a person at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a predetermined operating means such as a switch to change the settings.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed that allows the winning probability of a jackpot set in the pachinko game machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, a setting change process is executed that allows the winning probability of a jackpot to be changed by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, for example, and the winning probability of a jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value may be set in multiple levels, and is not limited to six levels. In this way, by making it possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot, the payout rate (number of balls paid per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes, so changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 may be called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

The probability of selecting a type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic section 152F, in a pachinko game machine that can set any one of a plurality of set values, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, a reserved consecutive win may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a win (jackpot or small win) is stored in the RAM 122 as a reserved memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved consecutive win refers to a consecutive win (reserved consecutive wins) within a reserved information range in which there is reserved information that will be a win in the future among the reserved information that exists when a jackpot occurs, and the next win occurs consecutively within the reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, in the case of a small win, a jackpot via a small win is generated based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserved information of the small win can be said to be reserved memory information of a win that will be a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved consecutive win is executed, a notification effect that notifies the player that the reserved consecutive win is a reserved consecutive win may be executed.

Figure 281-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 in characteristic part 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in characteristic part 152F, the reference symbols and explanations for the same configuration as in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 274 are omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is disposed below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start winning hole.

The passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determination winning device 87 are provided as structures through which game balls that have been hit into the right playing area of the playing area can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered each port, a gate switch 21 is provided inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B is provided inside the second start winning port, and a V-winning switch 87a, a V-determination winning switch 15a, and a V-determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside the V-determination winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which the game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol changes and is displayed. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. In the right game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The V-judging winning device 87 is a device for judging the V-winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, and the game ball passing through the inside can be seen. The V-judgment winning device 87 has a width in the front and back directions at the top that allows the game ball to pass through, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right directions, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that can allow a total of about 10 or more game balls to enter during the specified open period by repeatedly opening and closing for a specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs. In the passage of the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87, multiple protrusions are provided alternately on both sides of the wall as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball being guided, forming a structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly in the passage above the operating port at the top of the V-determination winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the induction path where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end and falls from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, so that the game ball guided along the guide path can fall from the operating port into the inside of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determination winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determination winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering from the operating port can win, and further, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls that enter from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls that enter from the V winning port downward.

At the top of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is able to fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and is set up in a manner that opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870, and is able to fall into the winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V-judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, when one game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a provided in the V-winning area 870. In a small win game state, when one game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a, the opening and closing member is controlled to a closed state, and game balls guided onto the V-winning area 870 thereafter enter the winning ball area. Game balls that enter the winning ball area are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87, which is opened during a small win game state, closes its operating port and is placed in a state where game balls cannot enter. The V-winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage are discharged to a specified discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is provided with a V-judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and all discharged game balls are detected by this switch.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the structure and control are designed so that an average of about 10 game balls in total can enter the V-judgment winning device 87 without requiring any special operation, and further, the structure is designed so that when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball always (100%) enters the V-winning area 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small win occurs, a right-hit promotion notification is executed to instruct the player to hit to the right so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball while the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left hand, if the player hits with the right hand, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big win will occur.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a deceleration structure for the game ball is provided in the V-determination winning device 87. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows the game ball to fall into a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning ball device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game nails planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area, depending on the state in which the game nails are planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered by a rectangular door, and when a big win occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around the base as an axis, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route to the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game nails and other structures so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening only when the game ball is shot into the right game area. It is also possible to make it possible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether it is shot into the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big win also occurs when a game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 when the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small win game state enters the V-winning area 870. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a is called a V-winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of a V-winning. In the V-judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operating port opens is called a "small win game state." And a big win that occurs based on a game ball entering the V in a small win game state is called a "big win via a small win." In contrast, a big win game state that is entered based on the display result of the variable display of the special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is called a "big win by a special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and then closed when a predetermined end condition for the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the open end condition is met, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started when the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the game ball passes through the first start winning port or the second start winning port as the start winning area (including winning)), and the start condition for the variable display is met (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed), and the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed after the variable display time (change time) has elapsed. The game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been determined in advance as a winning area, such as a winning port or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning port (winning). The display result is derived and displayed means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (determined display).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning port and the second start winning port but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about the variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit number is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (specify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning port. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning port. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start winning occurs in the second start winning slot, even if there is a reserved memory of a first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start winning is executed with priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is provided a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning port, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the second special pattern display device 4B, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

Further above the second reserve display 25B, there is a first reserve display 25A consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that entered the first start winning port, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve display 25A increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the first special pattern display device 4A, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of games by shooting the game ball in either a "left hit" aimed at the left playing area or a "right hit" aimed at the right playing area depending on the game situation. The flow of the game after the player starts playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is explained below.

When a player sits down at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, he or she first plays by hitting the ball from the left so that the ball will enter the first start winning hole. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot with a special symbol), the player switches from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and plays by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot game state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball to the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, the player plays a game in which the player hits the ball with the right hand to aim at the opened special variable winning ball device 7. During the jackpot game state, a right hand hit promotion notification is made. After the jackpot game state ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, which will be described later, the player continues to play by hitting the ball with the right hand. After the jackpot game ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, a time-saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin if the game is in a time-saving state. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right hand hit promotion notification is also made. If the game does not enter a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the game is played by switching from right hand hit to left hand hit so that the game ball will enter the first start winning hole as the right hand hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends. In addition, if the game does not enter a time-saving state, a left hand hit promotion notification (also called a left hand hit notification) may be made on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to play by returning to left hand hit.

During the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, the player plays by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second start winning port. If the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a big win (a big win with a special pattern), the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, if the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a small win display result, the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the V-determination winning device 87. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the small win game state has started. In addition, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, and a V-winning occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. In addition, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters a big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues playing by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 in a small win game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win does not occur. When a V win does not occur during a small win game state like this, a V winning failure notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V win has failed. In addition, at the end of the small win game state, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small win game state, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while still hitting from the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played by switching from hitting from the right to hitting from the left so that the game ball will win the first start winning hole. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hand hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hand play.

Figure 281-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, the conditions for a winning jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after the winning jackpot, the number of times the jackpot opens (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the winning jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning types include a 15R time-saving winning jackpot, a 4R time-saving winning jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot. The number in parentheses for a winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start winning port provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special pattern becomes a small win pattern. The decision of whether or not to make the display result of the special pattern a small win pattern is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small win decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern with 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state after the end of the small win game state (big win probability, small win probability, base, described later) is the same as before the small win. In a small win, prize balls are paid out for the game ball that entered the V winning area 870 in the V-determination winning device 87 during the small win game state. During a small win game state, it is set that approximately 10 winning balls can be generated, and approximately 30 prize balls can be paid out depending on the winning balls.

When the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened and the game ball enters the V-judgment winning area 870 (V-winning) inside the V-judgment winning device 87, a big win occurs. Such a big win via a small win is called a small win via big win. A small win via big win includes a 16 (15) R time-saving big win via a small win, a 9 (8) R time-saving big win via a small win, and a 5 (4) R time-saving big win via a small win, which have different numbers of rounds in the big win. A small win that is linked to become a 16 (15) R time-saving big win is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to become a 9 (8) R time-saving big win is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to become a 5 (4) R time-saving big win is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the varying display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the varying display of the second special pattern. Each pattern jackpot and small jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R). A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 4 times (4R). A 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determined prize-winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the prize-winning device is opened for 16 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 15R time-saving jackpot. The 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 8 times (8R) on the condition of a V win. The 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 4 times (4R) on the condition of a V win. The winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened 4 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as the 4R time-saving jackpot with respect to the pattern.

The time-saving state after the 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and the other in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total. The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four of which can be stored) before the jackpot game state is played immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than the 4R time-saving jackpot, two ending conditions are set: the second special symbol is displayed seven times, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 11 times in total. The seven times of the time-saving state ending condition is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. In the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition of the seven times of the second special symbol is set to a number of times that the possibility of a small win occurring when the second special symbol is displayed is significantly higher than the 4R time-saving jackpot. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a small win and to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a small win.

The end condition of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being displayed 11 times in total is to ensure that even if the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) starts before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, for a total of seven times can be executed. This prevents a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, changes in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning being started immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of winning at the time of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) are provided on the first and second paths, and in a low base state as the normal state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as a high base state, a big win game state, and a small win game state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path, and in other game states, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path.

Figure 281-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In Figure 281-3, the type of random number, update range, use, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated and whether or not a small jackpot will be generated. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by incrementing from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by incrementing from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (type, 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16(15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot pattern (for jackpot type determination, for jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a win based on a normal symbol will occur (for determining whether a win occurs based on a normal symbol). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpot includes multiple types, such as a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R), or when a small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, if a V prize does not occur, the determined jackpot is invalid. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). Therefore, random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot pattern. In addition, when the type of small win is decided, the small win symbol is decided at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to decide the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and then determining one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3). In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 281-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table, the second special symbol hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 281-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 281-4 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting value. At setting 1 it is 1/199, at setting 2 it is 1/190, at setting 3 it is 1/180, at setting 4 it is 1/170, at setting 5 it is 1/160, and at setting 6 it is 1/150. Therefore, the probability of winning is highest in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 281-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R are set. The upper section in Figure 281-4(B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower section in Figure 281-4(B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper section of Figure 281-4(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower section of Figure 281-4(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a big win with the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 with setting 1, 1/190 with setting 2, 1/180 with setting 3, 1/170 with setting 4, 1/160 with setting 5, and 1/150 with setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a big win increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small win may be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to make the probability of a small win lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a jackpot. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small jackpot. Deciding to have a small hit also means provisionally deciding to have a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally deciding because if no V win occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern a big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern a small win pattern.

Figures 281-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Figure 281-4 (C) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 281-4 (D) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 281-4(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and has jackpot determination values corresponding to "15R pattern time-saving jackpot" and "4R pattern time-saving jackpot".The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 281-4(D) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and has a jackpot determination value corresponding to "15R pattern time-saving jackpot".

Also, as shown in Figures 281-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7".

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

The small hit via jackpot type determination table in FIG. 281-4(E) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "small hit via 16(15)R time-saving jackpot", "small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot", and "small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot". However, the jackpot type determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the first small hit (16(15)R time-saving jackpot), second small hit (9(8)R time-saving jackpot), and third small hit (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalid unless a V win occurs during a small hit game state.

Figures 281-5 and 281-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 281-5 and 281-6 show the relationship between specific command data for a presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 281-5 and 281-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in Figures 281-5 and 281-6 are explained below. Command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the performance display device to start a performance that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the first special pattern change should begin. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the second special pattern change should begin. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies that the display of the first and second special patterns should end.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is closed, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories is to be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first or second starting winning port. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a designation command that indicates whether or not a winning judgment result will be a jackpot, whether or not a small win will be made, and the type of jackpot judgment result. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which judgment value range the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls into (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than a V winning ball) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in the RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved memory buffer. The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, a second reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory count (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved memory buffer. The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Based on a win at the second start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved storage." Note that the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to fluctuate, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 281-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first reserved memory count counter for counting the first reserved memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance at the time of the starting winning the result of the change display and the type of the change pattern when a change based on the starting winning of the detected first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and various data obtained at the time of the start winning is stored as reserved memory information, and then the condition for starting the variable display is established, at the timing to start the variable display, in the normal special pattern processing (S110), a decision is made based on the reserved memory information regarding the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display, as to whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result or not, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and the variable pattern determination value set in response to the various random number values described above.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the reserved memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read ahead at the timing before the variable display based on the start winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port is started, specifically, at the timing when the game ball starts winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port (the timing when the reserved memory information is stored), and based on the reserved memory information read ahead, a winning time performance process is executed in which a determination is made in advance as to whether or not there will be a big win, whether or not there will be a small win, the type of big win, and the type of variation pattern based on the big win determination value, big win type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the variable display of the performance pattern is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a pre-reading performance such as a pre-reading notice that warns of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the variable display of the performance pattern.

Then, based on the result of the winning performance process, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216) and the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a first start winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the sending of a first reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the first start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 for the start winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the judgment result of the winning performance process (S1226), and controls the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a second starting winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and controls the sending of a second reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 every time a start winning occurs in the second start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Figure 281-8 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the processing ends.

If there is no reserved memory data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, the process ends after performing a process (S80) for sending a customer waiting demo designation command. On the other hand, if there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "second" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "first" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Also, when the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Also, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120, based on the value of the reserved memory number counter pointed to by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Thus, it is possible to make it common to the cases where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small jackpot determination value with the random number for determining a jackpot, and if they match, determines that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred. In other words, it is a program that executes a process for determining a jackpot or a small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 281-4(A), or if the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 281-4(B), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not there is a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 281-4 (C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1st" (if it is pointing to "2nd"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 281-4 (D) is selected (S74) and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (RANDOM 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

Also, if the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) does not match any of the big win determination values in S61 (N in S61), it is checked whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" to check whether the target of the big win determination is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), proceed to S82 described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 281-4 (B) is used to determine whether the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) matches any of the small win determination values, thereby performing the small win determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (random R) for determining a big win matches any of the small win determination values shown in FIG. 281-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that a small win will occur for the second special symbol. Then, if it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win will be set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. 281-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the big hit type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (Random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of big hit via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (Random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82 described below.

In S81, data indicating the type of the jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, the provisional jackpot type buffer is set to "05" as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they are invalid data that will not result in a jackpot if no V win occurs during a small jackpot game state.

In S82, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set to "-", which is a miss symbol. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the small win symbols "1", "5", or "9" according to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the big win symbols "3" or "7" according to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 281-9 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (S118). In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small win, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small win start designation command indicating that the small win game state is to start to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-judgment winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 in the small win opening state as the end condition of the opening state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting is made to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release process (S119) (S414).

Figure 281-10 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (S119) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 updates the small win opening control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435 described later, it is confirmed whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter that counts the number of V winning balls is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in Figure 281-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether the small win opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win to operate the movable part 872 to an open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether a V winning has been detected by a game ball entering the V winning area 870, which is in an open state inside the V determination winning device 87, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in an on state (S434). When it is in an on state in S434, it means that a V winning has been detected, and a V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, is set (S435). Then, a process is performed to transmit a V winning ball detection designation command (S436). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V winnings. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening and closing member, changing the V winning port of the V winning area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and proceeding to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 thereafter are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the switch is not on in S434, it means that a V win has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V-judging win switch 15a is on (S438). If the switch is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if the switch is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 281-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and a process is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command (S440). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, the small win V winning number has reached the upper limit value and the small win opening end condition has been established. When the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, the small win opening end condition has been established due to the end of the small win opening control. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to the closed state and closes the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small win, the V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed according to the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter. When the small win opening control timer has timed out, the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small win opening control in the opening mode of the small win.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and the processing is terminated. This starts the timing of the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed. Note that since the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning is set in this way, the game ball can be detected even if it passes through the V winning area later than the time it normally passes through. In addition, since the specific period is set, even if someone tries to illegally win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can also be prevented.

Figure 281-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning has already been detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in order to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the on state in S444, it is when a V winning is detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, the process is performed to transmit a V winning designation command (S446), and the process is terminated. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small win end designation command (S447). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening and closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning port) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that a big win has occurred, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win game state, if you hit to the right in response to the right hit promotion notification described below, you can make the game ball enter the V-determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always V-enter the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag will be set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in Figure 281-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to the big win game state.

Next, the CPU 103 formally stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the determination that a proper jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win (S450). Then, the time-saving flag that was set at that time is temporarily reset (S451).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state is about to start. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (S453).

The jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is also referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time (time for closing the large prize opening between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of such data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win type via small win stored in the temporary big win type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in the small win game state, the game does not transition to the big win game state.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 02TM]
Next, characteristic part 02TM will be described with reference to Figures 282-1 to 282-66.
In this embodiment, it is possible to update the count value (jackpot occurrence count value) in response to being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.
In addition, the variable display period when this count value exceeds a predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, "3") or greater) can be made shorter than the variable display period when this count value does not exceed the predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, "less than 3")).
In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying on the image display device 5 a specific display (jackpot count display) relating to the relationship between this count value and a predetermined value.

[Decorative designs, small designs]
The various performance symbols (decorative symbols, small symbols) in this embodiment will be explained in detail.

<Decorative design>
In this embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, multiple types of decorative symbols as decorative identification information different from the special symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The decorative symbols in this embodiment are composed of number symbols indicating numbers, etc.

In this embodiment, a decorative pattern including a number design is a decorative pattern that corresponds to the numbers "1" through "7," for example, a decorative pattern that includes the numbers "1" through "7."

In addition, in this embodiment, the even numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6") are in a blue color (in this example, the decorative patterns are shown with blue numbers), the odd numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5") excluding the number "7" are in a red color (in this example, the decorative patterns are shown with red numbers), and the odd numbered decorative pattern of the number "7" (numbered pattern corresponding to the number "7") is in a gold color (in this example, the decorative pattern is shown with gold numbers).

(Defined decoration design)
In this embodiment, as an effect executed according to the progress of the game, a variable display of decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special symbol) in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped/determined in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a symbol matching effect is executed, and the determined decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also stopped (derived).

In this embodiment, the type of final decorative pattern is varied depending on the display result and the type of jackpot (see Figures 282-3 and 282-4). In this embodiment, the types of final decorative patterns are set as miss patterns, even patterns, and odd patterns.

<Small design>
In this embodiment, the small pattern is a pattern that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, and indicates whether the special pattern is displayed or not and the display result of the special pattern. The small pattern display can be performed in parallel with the special pattern display, and the small pattern display can be performed in parallel with the special pattern display. The small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r are the areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed and stopped, and the area in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed and stopped is also common to the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have a smaller display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small patterns is lower than the visibility of the decorative patterns.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, a first hold display area 02TM01E that displays the first hold memory number (0 to 4 first hold displays 02TM01) is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a second hold display area 02TM02E that displays the second hold memory number (0 to 4 second hold displays 02TM02) is provided at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, an active display area 02TM03E that displays an active display 02TM03, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and is also information corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed, is provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5.

A first pending memory number display area that displays the first pending memory number may be provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 02TM01E), and a second pending memory number display area 02TM06E that displays the second pending memory number may be provided on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second pending display area 02TM02E).

Here, the first hold display area 02TM01E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first hold memory number, and the second hold display area 02TM02E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the second hold memory number.

[Time-saving state]
In this embodiment, the time-saving state is a state in which control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state, or by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state continues until one of the following end conditions is met first: (A) a predetermined number of special games have been played, (B) the game has been controlled to a big win game state, or (C) the game has been controlled to a specific type of small win game state. An end condition in which a predetermined number of special games have been played is also called a time-saving state (time-saving state with time-saving with time-saving).

In this embodiment, the types of time-saving states are the a time-saving state and the b time-saving state. The a time-saving state ends when one of the following ending conditions is met: (A) 10,000 second special symbol games have been played, (B) the game has been controlled to a big win game state, or (C) the game has been controlled to a small win game state corresponding to a normal small win, which will be described later.

The b time-saving state ends when one of the following conditions is met: (A) 10,000 second special symbol games have been played, or (B) the state has been controlled to a big win game state. Unlike the a time-saving state, the b time-saving state does not end when (C) the state has been controlled to a small win game state corresponding to a normal small win (see Fig. 282-21 (3) No. 3-1).

[Winning type table]
FIG. 282-1 is a diagram showing a winning type table. Among the winning type tables, FIG. 282-1(1) is a diagram showing a big win type table, and FIG. 282-1(2) is a diagram showing a small win via big win type table. In the winning type table, for each type of big win, the big win occurrence condition, the control state (game state) after the big win, the number of openings in the big win (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the big win are shown.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are "3R pattern normal jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot", "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot", and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot".

A small win occurs when the display result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern becomes a small win pattern. The decision as to whether the display result of the special pattern will be a small win pattern or not is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small win decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens in either an opening pattern with one opening and an opening time of 0.04 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "first opening pattern" as appropriate), or an opening pattern with ten openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern" as appropriate).

In the case of a small win, prize balls are paid out for the game ball that enters the V winning area 870 in the V-determining winning device 87 during the small win game state. It is set that approximately 10 winning balls can occur during the small win game state, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When a game ball is placed in the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V-winning), a jackpot occurs. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a jackpot via a small win. Jackpots via a small win include a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small win" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small win", which have different opening patterns of the V-determination winning device 87.

In this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "normal small hit via 10Ra time-saving big hit" has the first opening pattern of the V-judgment winning device 87, and it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the V-judgment winning device 87, so it is not expected to generate a big hit. Also, if the small hit that occurs when controlled to the a time-saving state cannot be made to enter the V, it is controlled to the normal state after the small hit ends, not the a time-saving state (see Figure 282-24). Therefore, the small hit corresponding to the "normal small hit via 10Ra time-saving big hit" is essentially a small hit that is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state. Hereinafter, this small hit will be referred to as the "normal small hit", "falling small hit", or "first small hit" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via time-saving small hit" has the second opening pattern of the V-judgment winning device 87, so it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V-judgment winning device 87, and it is expected that a big hit will occur. In addition, if a V-winning can be made with this small hit that occurs when controlled in the a-time-saving state, the state will be controlled to the a-time-saving state after the end of the big hit corresponding to the small hit. Therefore, this small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via time-saving small hit" will essentially be a small hit that will be controlled to the time-saving state next time as well. In the following, this small hit will be referred to as a "time-saving small hit", "continuation small hit", or "second small hit" as appropriate.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the changing display of a special pattern, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the "Pattern 3R Regular Jackpot," the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Jackpot," and the "Pattern 10Rb Time-saving Jackpot," which occur directly based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by winning a V via a small jackpot based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-1 (1), a "3R pattern normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens three times (3R). The game state controlled after a "3R pattern time-limited jackpot" is the normal state.

In addition, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the a time-saving state.

The a time-saving state has two end conditions, one in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 10,000, and the other in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 10,004 (not shown). The number of times for the end condition of the a time-saving state in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 10,000 is set in consideration of the fact that when a "time-saving small win" occurs, the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of about 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/41.1. Therefore, the end condition of the a time-saving state in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 10,000 is set to the number of times that a small win may occur at a rate of about 100% when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the next small win is essentially confirmed. However, in this embodiment, where there are two types of small wins that can occur in the time-saving state, a "normal small win" and a "time-saving small win," if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win will occur and the game will be controlled to the normal state.

In addition, a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the b time-saving state.

The b time-saving state after a "10Rb time-saving big win" has two end conditions set among the end conditions described above: one where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 10,000, and one where the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 10,004 (not shown). The number of times for the end condition of the b time-saving state, where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 10,000, is set taking into consideration that when a "small time-saving win" occurs, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of about 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1 in 41.1. Therefore, the condition for ending the b time-saving state, in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, is the number of times that there is a possibility of a small win occurring at a rate of about 100% when the second special symbol is displayed, and the next small win is essentially confirmed. However, in this embodiment, in which there are "normal small wins" and "time-saving small wins" as small wins that occur in the b time-saving state, even if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win occurs and the state continues to be controlled to the b time-saving state. Therefore, the b time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, and a small win via big win occurs at a rate of about 100%, and the next big win is essentially confirmed.

As shown in Figure 282-1 (2), the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.04 seconds x 1 time), and then the large winning hole opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on condition that a V win is obtained. Also, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large winning hole opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on condition that a V win is obtained. In these time-saving jackpots via small wins, the winning device opens for one round, but the large winning hole is actually opened 10 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same or similar to the pattern 10R time-saving jackpot.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path than the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path than the first path in terms of winning at the time of a big win. Also, in a special state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path than the first path in terms of the occurrence of a big win.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) may be provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, the first path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the second path, and in other states such as the high base state, big win game state, and small win game state, the second path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the first path. From other perspectives, a configuration may be adopted in which it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path in other game states.

[Random value]
Fig. 282-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in Fig. 282-2 (A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big win type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted.

Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 282-2(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variable patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

[Display result judgment table]
282-2(B) ((B1) and (B2)) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 282-2 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the first special symbol]. The display result determination table [for the first special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 282-2 (B1), the top row is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win for the first special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win for the first special symbol is set to 1/200.

Figure 282-2 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the second special symbol]. The display result determination table [for the second special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 282-2 (B2), the top row is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win with the second special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/41.1.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a small win is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to the above, and a configuration in which a small win is provided for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be adopted. For example, a small win may be provided for the second special symbol, while a small win may not be provided for the first special symbol.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing.

For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the big win determination value set in the display result determination table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the big win determination values, it is decided that a big win will occur for the first special symbol. Then, if the extracted value does not match any of the big win determination values, it is compared with the small win determination value set in the display result determination table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the small win determination values, it is decided that a small win will occur for the first special symbol.

For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the big win judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the big win judgment values, it is decided that the second special symbol will be a big win. Then, if the extracted value does not match one of the big win judgment values, it is compared with the small win judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the small win judgment values, it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small win. Deciding on a small win also means provisionally deciding to make it a big win via a small win (it is written as provisionally decided because if no V win occurs during a small win, it will not be controlled as a big win).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the small win pattern.

[Big hit type determination table]
Figures 282-3 and 282-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table and the jackpot via small jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101.

Figure 282-3 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is normal, and a jackpot type determination table via a small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via a small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is normal.

Figure 282-4 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state, and a jackpot type determination table via small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot when the game state is in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state.

These jackpot type determination tables and jackpot via small win type determination tables contain the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot corresponding to each jackpot type (jackpot via small win type), the type of determined decorative pattern, and a jackpot determination value, which is a number compared with the random number value MR2 used to determine the jackpot type.

<Normal state jackpot type determination table>
Fig. 282-3 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the normal state. Fig. 282-3 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the normal state.

([First special symbol] Big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special pattern] in Figure 282-3 (A1) has numerical values to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to each of the "pattern 3R normal jackpot", "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot" are set.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 119 (40%) is assigned to a "3R symbol normal jackpot", 120 to 239 (40%) is assigned to a "10Ra symbol time-saving jackpot", and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot".

Figure 282-3 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 0 for a "3R regular jackpot", 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot", and 10,000 for a "10Rb time-saving jackpot".

Figure 282-3 (A1) also shows the type of determined decorative pattern that corresponds to each type of jackpot. In this example, the type of determined decorative pattern is an even number pattern for a "Pattern 3R normal jackpot," an odd number pattern excluding the number pattern "7" for a "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," and an odd number pattern with the number pattern "7" for a "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

([Second special pattern] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 282-3 (A2) has a jackpot determination value corresponding to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" which is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Figure 282-3 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 282-3 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to each type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered pattern with the number pattern "7" as the fixed decorative pattern type.

<Normal state small hit via big hit type judgment table>
Fig. 282-3 (B1) is a small-win via jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] used to determine the small-win via jackpot type of a small-win via jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a small win when the game state is in the normal state. Fig. 282-3 (B2) is a small-win via jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] used to determine the small-win via jackpot type of a small-win via jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a small win when the game state is in the normal state.

([For the first special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the first special pattern] in Figure 282-3 (B1) has a jackpot determination value that is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and corresponds to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win."

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small win".

Figure 282-3 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 282-3 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" is a miss pattern. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs when a "normal small jackpot" occurs, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and then to a normal state (see Figure 282-19).

([For the second special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The small hit/jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 282-3 (B2) has a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" are set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win", and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win".

In addition, Figure 282-3 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

In addition, Fig. 282-3 (B2) also shows the type of determined decorative pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of determined decorative pattern is a miss pattern or a special pattern (described later) for a "normal small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and an odd number pattern, the number "7", for a "time-saving small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs under normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects that are executed during this small win fanfare period are called small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds for all of the variable display patterns executed in the normal state (not shown).

<Table for determining the type of big win in a time-saving state and b time-saving state>
Fig. 282-4 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b) and the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. Fig. 282-4 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] when the game state is in the time-saving state and the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

([First special symbol] Big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special pattern] in Figure 282-4 (A1) has jackpot determination values set therein that are compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and correspond to each of the "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 239 (80%) is assigned to a "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot", and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Figure 282-4 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and 10,000 for a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 282-4 (A1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to each type of jackpot. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern is an odd number pattern of the number "3" for the "Pattern 3Rb Time-saving jackpot", and an odd number pattern of the number "7" for the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 282-4 (A1), when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b) and a jackpot is determined to have occurred based on the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined to be either a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," so that appropriate presentation control can be performed when a jackpot is determined to have occurred based on the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is won at the time of the first hit, the game is controlled to the b time-saving state, which essentially guarantees the next jackpot. At the time of the first hit, a presentation (the 3000 announcement presentation described below) is executed to notify the player that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the prize balls for the 10 rounds of the first hit (1500 balls) and the prize balls for the 10 rounds of the essentially guaranteed next jackpot (1500 balls), and the player is aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded (see FIG. 282-54).

In addition, if the variable display of the second special pattern is not executed for some reason despite being controlled to the b time-saving state, the variable display of the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is pending (up to 4 in this example)) of the first special pattern corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the variable display that won the first win ends may be executed. If the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern executed at this time is judged to be a "jackpot", the number of prize balls that is/will be awarded will differ depending on the type of jackpot that occurs (hereinafter referred to as "irregular special 1 jackpot")

(A) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot",
(A1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(A2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 3 rounds of prize balls (450 balls)
(A3) After the Irregular Special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed in the b time-saving state, with 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
This essentially guarantees that a total of 3,450 prize balls will be awarded.

(B) If the jackpot type of the Irregular Special 1 jackpot is a "Pattern 10Ra Time-limited jackpot",
(B1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(B2) 10 rounds of prize balls for the special irregular jackpot (1,500 balls)
This essentially guarantees that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded.

In addition, in the time-saving state A that is controlled after the Irregular Special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is not substantially determined, so here (B3) it is not considered to be substantially determined that 10 rounds' worth of prize balls (1,500 balls) will be awarded.

In this embodiment, the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first hit makes the player aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded. Even if an irregular special 1 jackpot occurs, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state, the jackpot type is determined to be either a "Pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or a "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot". This makes it possible to award more than 3000 prize balls, and prevents inconsistencies from occurring in the content of the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first hit, and also prevents the player from being at an excessive disadvantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b), the jackpot type is not determined to be a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

(C) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 10Rb Time-saving jackpot",
(C1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(C2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(A3) After the Irregular Special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed in the b time-saving state, with 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
This would essentially guarantee that a total of 4,500 prize balls would be awarded, which would create a contradiction with the content of the 3,000 notification presentation at the time of the first win, and would also give the player an excessive advantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded. Therefore, a "Pattern 10Rb Time-saving Jackpot" is not provided as a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([Second special pattern] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 282-4 (A2) has a jackpot determination value corresponding to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" which is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Figure 282-4 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 282-4 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered pattern with the number pattern "7" as the fixed decorative pattern type.

<Table for determining the type of big win via small win in a time-saving state and b time-saving state>
Fig. 282-4 (B1) is a small win via big win type determination table [for the first special symbol] when a small win is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state). Fig. 282-4 (B2) is a small win via big win type determination table [for the second special symbol] when a small win is determined by the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([For the first special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the first special pattern] in Figure 282-4 (B1) has a jackpot determination value that is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and corresponds to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win."

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small win".

Figure 282-4 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" is 10,000.

In addition, Figure 282-4 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decoration pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decoration pattern for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small win" is a miss pattern.

([For the second special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the second special pattern] in Figure 282-4 (B2) has a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" are set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win", and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win".

Figure 282-4 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

Figure 282-4 (B2) also shows the type of final decorative pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of final decorative pattern is a miss pattern in the a time-saving state of "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win", a special pattern in the b time-saving state (in this example, a special pattern with the word "END" displayed), and an odd number pattern of "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" is the number pattern "7".

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is set to 0.1 seconds when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as jackpot fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the A time-saving state or the B time-saving normal state is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this small win fanfare period are called small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in both the variation patterns of the variable display executed in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds (see Figures 282-15 to 282-20).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

<Fluctuation patterns without reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern without a reach (such as "long fluctuation miss", "high-speed miss", "ultra-high-speed miss", "high-speed time-saving small hit", "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit", "entry fluctuation miss", "entry fluctuation big hit", "entry fluctuation time-saving small hit", "pseudo fluctuation miss", "straight big hit", ("high-speed normal small hit" = "high-speed miss")", etc.) is a fluctuation pattern in which a reach is not established after the fluctuation display has started and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the fluctuation display result will be either a "miss", "big hit", "time-saving small hit", or "normal small hit" is displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is "miss", when it is determined to be a "fast miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 1000 ms, when it is determined to be a "super fast miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 200 ms, when it is determined to be a "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 10000 ms, when it is determined to be a "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 30200 ms, and when it is determined to be a "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 2800 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot", if it is determined to be a "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 10,000 ms, and if it is determined to be a "entering jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 40,000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "time-saving small win," if it is determined to be a "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 5,000 ms, if it is determined to be a "super-high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 500 ms, and if it is determined to be a "entering fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 30,500 ms.

In addition, among the variation patterns that do not involve a reach when the variation display result is a "normal small hit," the variation display period is 1000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed normal small hit."

Regarding the variation pattern of the normal small win during the b time reduction In this embodiment, when the variation display result becomes a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, it is judged to be a variation pattern of the "high-speed normal small win". This "high-speed normal small win" variation pattern is a variation pattern of the same presentation mode as the variation pattern of the "high-speed miss", and after the variation display starts, a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the fact that the reach is not established and the variation display result is a "miss" (for example, "245" etc.) is stopped and displayed. When a "normal small win" occurs in the b time reduction state, even if a V winning does not occur, the present embodiment (see FIG. 282-24) is continuously controlled to the b time reduction state (i.e., it is not controlled to the normal state (does not fall)), and since there is no need to notify that the variation display result has become a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, the same variation pattern as when the variation display result becomes a "miss" is used.

＜Example of "Super High Speed Short Hit"＞
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "super-high-speed time-saving small hit" will be explained using Figure 282-5.

Figure 282-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image for each presentation related to the fluctuation pattern being "ultra-high-speed short-time hit."

Figures 282-5 (1) and (2) are similar to Figures 282-28 (1) and (2) described below in terms of the various effect images and third decorative patterns corresponding to the effect mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-5(3), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a reduced size, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in a reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display being a "time-saving small win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-5(4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed statically, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that results in a "time-saving small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (i.e., a symbol matching performance is being performed for the third decorative symbols). At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-5 (5), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (i.e., the symbol matching performance is being executed for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a small win game in the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a small win game start image on the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right hit promotion image that includes the text "Aim for the V!!" to win a V and an arrow image that instructs a right hit, and an ally character.

[Inrush fluctuation]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern executed in the first fluctuation of the a-time shortening state when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (i.e., the first fluctuation of the first controlled "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") is composed of a fluctuation pattern (first half) and a fluctuation pattern (second half). In the fluctuation pattern (first half), for example, a "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed. In this embodiment, after the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed in the fluctuation pattern (first half), a fluctuation pattern (second half) according to each fluctuation display result is executed.

In the variation pattern (second half), a variation display of a decorative pattern is executed to notify the display result of the variation display. This presentation is called the "display result notification variation presentation." In the display result notification variation presentation of the variation pattern (second half), for example, if the variation display result is a "miss," a variation display of a "super-fast miss" variation pattern (200 ms) is executed, and if the variation display result is a "time-saving small win," a variation display of a "super-fast time-saving small win" variation pattern (500 ms) is executed.

The "entering fluctuation" of the fluctuation pattern (first half) is a fluctuation pattern in which, after information suggesting the currently controlled performance mode is displayed, a pseudo-fluctuation performance of the decorative symbols (a performance in which the display of the decorative symbols starts to fluctuate, the combination of decorative symbols that is a "miss" without a reach is temporarily stopped, and then the display of the decorative symbols starts to fluctuate, the combination of decorative symbols that is a "miss" without a reach is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-fluctuation is repeated) is executed, and at a predetermined timing, information suggesting the currently controlled performance mode is displayed again and information suggesting that the currently controlled performance mode will start is displayed (see Figures 282-7 to 282-9). In the following, the series of performances from the display of the decorative symbols to the temporary stop of the combination of decorative symbols that is a "miss" without a reach is appropriately referred to as a "unit pseudo-fluctuation". Therefore, a pseudo-fluctuation performance is a performance in which multiple unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed.

In the "entry fluctuation" of this embodiment, the information suggesting the currently controlled presentation mode is the words "Super High Speed" or "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start suggestion presentation"), and the information suggesting that the currently controlled presentation mode will start is the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" or "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH Entry" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start notification presentation").

In addition, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols in the "entry fluctuation" is such that the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the period from when the first decorative symbol fluctuation display starts until the combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the winning position and is a "miss" stops temporarily (hereinafter referred to as the "unit pseudo-fluctuation period" as appropriate), and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period. From then on, the unit pseudo-fluctuation period becomes shorter each time a pseudo-fluctuation is executed, in other words, the speed of the pseudo-fluctuation becomes faster at an accelerated rate. Below, this type of pseudo-fluctuation effect is referred to as the "accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect" as appropriate. In this example, in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect, a total of seven unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed.

In this way, by executing the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation in the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation of the "entry fluctuation" of the "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" that was controlled for the first time, it is possible to impress upon the player that the consumption speed of the fluctuation display of [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is faster than the consumption speed of the fluctuation display of other presentation modes.

In this embodiment, when the pseudo-change of the decorative pattern (the "third decorative pattern" described later) during the acceleration pseudo-change performance is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative pattern temporarily stops, the base pattern and the number pattern are included, but the light effect display is not included. At this time, the display color of the third decorative pattern is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number pattern is displayed in a manner that makes it appear to shine (hereinafter referred to as the "special mode" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative pattern temporarily stops during the acceleration pseudo-change performance, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not include the light effect display, but by being displayed in a special mode, the player can be made aware that the change currently being executed is a pseudo-change.

In addition, when the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation ends and a fluctuation display is executed to notify the display result of the fluctuation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, which allows the player to recognize that the currently executed fluctuation is not a pseudo-fluctuation, that is, it is a fluctuation display of a decorative pattern to actually notify the display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period of the jackpot game state in which the jackpot occurrence count value is 3, the word "READY" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will start (the "entry fluctuation" will start).

<Example of "entry fluctuation miss">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 282-6 and Figures 282-7 to 282-10.

Figure 282-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss", and Figures 282-7 to 282-10 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the performance images of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss".

First, as shown in FIG. 282-7 (1), at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period in the jackpot game state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the word "READY" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-7(2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication performance and displays the word "Super High Speed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 282-7 (3) to (7), during the period from when 10 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the varying display of the second special symbol to when 17.5 seconds have elapsed (the period from T2 to T3 (7.5 seconds) shown in Figure 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 282-7 (3), (6), and (7), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in FIG. 282-7 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication presentation and causes the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" are an image with a higher display priority than the third decorative symbol. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" and the third decorative symbol are displayed in that order.

At this time, the display mode of the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters is displayed with reduced visibility compared to the display mode of the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters displayed in the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended. In this example, the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters during the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect are displayed in light white characters, while the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters during the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended are displayed in thick black characters.

Next, as shown in Figures 282-7 (8) to 282-8 (11), during the period from 17.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol to 21 seconds after the second special symbol has changed (the period from T3 to T4 (3.5 seconds) shown in Figure 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-change performance (second unit pseudo-change), and executes a pseudo-change of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 282-8 (10) and (11), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in FIG. 282-8 (11), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication presentation and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-8 (12) and onwards, after 21 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the varying display of the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in FIG. 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (third to eighth unit pseudo-variations), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 282-9 (13) to (15), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance (seventh unit pseudo-fluctuation), and executes a pseudo-fluctuation of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-9 (16), when 25.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the varying display of the second special symbol (timing T9 shown in FIG. 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the accelerated pseudo-variation performance, erases the third decorative symbol from the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes a mode start notification performance, and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black letters) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-9 (17), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the mode start notification presentation and displays the words "Entering ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black text) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-9 (18) to FIG. 282-10 (21), during the period from when 30 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol to when 30.2 seconds have elapsed (the period from T10 to T11 shown in FIG. 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the mode start notification performance, erases the words "Entering Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH" from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms and stops) the combination of the confirmed third decorative symbols (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss". At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not display the third decorative pattern in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop) based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is being displayed in a manner that includes a light effect display, not in a pseudo-variation manner, in order to notify the display result of the actual variable display. In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 282-28 described later).

In this embodiment, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], if a "normal small win" occurs with a small number of fluctuation displays, the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled at a high rate, which selects a fluctuation pattern with an extremely short fluctuation display period ("Super High Speed Miss" (0.2 seconds)) compared to other presentation modes. This may cause the player to end [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] without having fully played, which can only be controlled after multiple big wins have occurred.

In consideration of the occurrence of such a situation, the first controlled [Ultra-High Speed HYPER
By executing the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (30 seconds or more) at a rate of 100% in the first fluctuation of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to ensure a control period of at least 30 seconds for [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] even if the player falls out of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage.

In addition, in the first fluctuation of the first controlled [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (accelerated pseudo fluctuation presentation) is executed at a rate of 100%. Therefore, even if you fall off the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage, pseudo fluctuations of the decorative symbols similar to the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] are executed multiple times, so that you can play the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at least multiple times, even though it is a pseudo fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the length of the jackpot ending period depending on the number of jackpots that occur, so for example, the jackpot ending period for a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 (i.e., the jackpot immediately before control to "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" for the first time) can be set to 30 seconds, and during this period, it is possible to display information suggesting that control to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] will occur for the first time after the jackpot (such as the words "ultra-high speed", "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH", or "entering ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH").

However, in pachinko gaming machines, it is prohibited to display decorative patterns or perform similar presentations during the jackpot game state (jackpot ending period). Therefore, although it is possible to display information suggesting that control will be switched to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time during the jackpot ending period, it is not possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variation presentation, and it is not possible to inform the player that the speed at which the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] display changes is consumed is faster than the speed at which the display changes in other presentation modes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect and the display of information suggesting that control will be changed to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time are displayed during the first fluctuation controlled by [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], not during the jackpot ending period.

[Pseudo fluctuation deviation]
In this embodiment, the "pseudo fluctuation miss" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a unit pseudo fluctuation of a decorative pattern ("third decorative pattern" described later) is executed three times in succession, and after the third unit pseudo fluctuation is completed, a third decorative pattern variation display is executed to notify that the display result is a "miss", and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result is a "miss" is displayed in a stopped state (see Figures 282-12 and 282-13). That is, this is a variation pattern in which three unit pseudo fluctuations and one variation display to notify the display result of the variation display are executed. The performance in which a variation display to notify the display result of the variation display is executed is called a "display result notification variation performance".

In this embodiment, the pseudo-fluctuation presentation of the decorative symbols in the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern is such that the first unit pseudo-fluctuation period, the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period, and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period are all set to 700 ms, which is the period during which the decorative symbols perform the pseudo-fluctuation (200 ms) plus the period during which the decorative symbols temporarily stop (500 ms). In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the speed of all three unit pseudo-fluctuations is executed at the same speed (uniform speed). Hereinafter, this type of pseudo-fluctuation presentation will be referred to as "uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation presentation" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, when the pseudo-fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative symbol temporarily stops, the configuration includes the base symbol, the number symbol, and a light effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative symbol is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number symbol is displayed in a manner that makes it appear to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special manner" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during the uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation performance, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner, which allows the player to recognize that the currently executed fluctuation is a pseudo-fluctuation.

In addition, when the uniform speed pseudo-variation presentation ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the variation currently being executed is not a pseudo-variation.

<Example of "pseudo fluctuation miss">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 282-11 and Figures 282-12 to 282-13.

Figure 282-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss," and Figures 282-12 to 282-13 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the performance images of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss."

First, as shown in Fig. 282-12 (1) to (3), during the period from when the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special symbol to when 0.7 seconds have elapsed (the period from T1 to T2 shown in Fig. 282-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a uniform speed pseudo-variation performance (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Fig. 282-12 (3), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 282-28 described later).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-12 (4) to (6), during the period from 0.7 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special symbol to 1.4 seconds after (the period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 282-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a uniform speed pseudo-variation performance (second unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 282-12 (6), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 282-12 (7) to Fig. 282-13 (9), during the period from 1.4 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special symbol to 2.1 seconds after (the period from T3 to T4 shown in Fig. 282-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a uniform speed pseudo-variation performance (third unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Fig. 282-13 (9), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-13 (10) to (13), during the period from 2.1 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol to 2.8 seconds after (the period from T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 282-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the uniform speed pseudo-variation performance, ends the pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms stop) the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss". At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the third decorative pattern in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop), based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is actually being displayed to notify the display result of the change display, not a pseudo change.

[Direct hit]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the result of the display of the change in the second special symbol is a "jackpot" in the a time-saving state (i.e., "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH") or b time-saving state (i.e., "invincible RUSH"), the change pattern of the "direct jackpot" is executed.

The "straight big win" variation pattern is one in which the decorative symbols are hidden after the variation display starts, and the variation display ends with the decorative symbols remaining hidden. In this variation pattern, when the variation display ends, the combination of small symbols that indicates that the variation display result is a "big win" is fixed and stopped (see Figure 282-14).

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is equipped with a light emitting device, and when a jackpot occurrence count value is 3 and a jackpot occurs based on the variable display result of the second special pattern being a "jackpot" in the a time-saving state (i.e., "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH") or b time-saving state (i.e., "invincible RUSH"), the special variable winning ball device 7 can be made to emit light at a timing controlled to the jackpot game state.

＜Example of a direct hit＞
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "straight big hit" will be explained using Figure 282-14.

Figure 282-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image for each presentation related to the variation pattern of "straight big hit."

First, as shown in FIG. 282-14 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 282-28 described later).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-14 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special pattern (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories), the performance control CPU 120 erases the third decorative pattern from the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-14(3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, stops and determines the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 with the third decorative symbol erased (i.e., the symbol matching performance is not executed for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently executing variable display is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-14 (4), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot round game start image. This jackpot round game start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, a jackpot right-hit promotion image including the characters "Aim for the attacker!!" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to enter the jackpot winning hole, and an ally character. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is controlled, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed frequently, and there are many situations in which a big win occurs when the display result is judged to be a "small win." However, when the time-saving state is controlled, if the display result is judged to be a "big win," the player feels disappointed that they would have been better off winning in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot", and thus information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!" (or the words "Aim for the V!!" in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to direct the player's attention from the image display device 5 to the big winning hole, thereby reducing the disappointment felt by the player at the occurrence of a jackpot due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot".

<Fluctuating patterns with normal reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern accompanying a normal reach (such as "high-speed normal reach miss" or "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit") is one in which, after the reach state is established, the final display result is confirmed and stopped without the super reach performance (challenge performance, fall performance, etc.) described below being executed.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving normal reach when the variation display result is "miss", the variation display period is 3000 ms when it is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach miss" variation pattern.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns with normal reach when the fluctuation display result is "time-saving small hit", if it is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 7000 ms.

<Fluctuating patterns with super reach>
In this embodiment, in a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach ("Super reach A miss", "Super reach B miss", "Super reach C miss", "Super reach A time-saving small hit", "Super reach A big hit", "Super reach B normal small hit", "Super reach C time-saving small hit"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach performance that notifies whether a "big hit", "time-saving small hit", or "normal small hit" has been won.

(Super Reach A (challenge performance))
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach A Miss", "Super Reach A Time-saving Small Win" and "Super Reach A Big Win" among the variation patterns accompanying the Super Reach, the reach state is established with the start of the variation display, and the Super Reach A performance (hereinafter referred to as "challenge performance") is executed, which notifies whether or not the "time-saving small win" or "big win" has been won by the ally character performing the action of throwing a bomb at the rock. Here, if the final display result is "miss", a performance in which the ally character fails the challenge (failure performance) is executed. In the failure performance, a miss pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area. On the other hand, if the final display result is "time-saving small win" or "big win", a performance in which the ally character succeeds in the challenge (success performance) is executed (see FIG. 282-58). In the failure performance, a big win pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area (pattern alignment performance is executed).

(Super Reach B (Fall-inducing performance))
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach B Miss" and "Super Reach B Normal Small Win" among the variation patterns accompanying the Super Reach, when the variation display starts, a fall suggestion display (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing "!" and the word "WARNING") is displayed, and then the reach state is established, and a Super Reach B effect (hereinafter referred to as "fall encouraging effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not a "normal small win" has been won by operating the push button 31B for the special pattern (the special pattern of the word "END" indicating that the time-saving state is ending) provisionally stopped in the pattern display area 5C. Here, if the final display result is "miss", the provisionally stopped special pattern is successfully destroyed, and an effect (fall avoidance effect) in which a miss pattern is definitely stopped in the pattern display area 5C is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "normal small win," the temporarily stopped special symbol fails to be destroyed, and an effect (confirmed fall effect) is executed in which the special symbol is confirmed to stop in the symbol display area 5C (see Figure 282-61).

(Super Reach C (instant hit on button))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving a super reach, in the variation patterns of "Super reach C miss" and "Super reach C time-saving small win", the reach is not established after the variation display has started, and an operation prompting display imitating the push button 31B and a time bar to notify the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in each region of the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and each time the push button 31B is operated once, a decorative pattern is displayed stationary in each pattern display area (for example, the pattern display areas 5R → 5L → 5C are displayed in that order), and by operating the push button 31B a total of three times, a combination of decorative patterns is displayed stationary in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a super reach C performance (hereinafter referred to as "button immediate win performance" as appropriate).

If the final display result is a "miss", an effect (miss pattern effect) is executed in which a decorative pattern combination (miss pattern) that results in a "miss" final display result is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-saving win", an effect (matching pattern effect) is executed in which a decorative pattern combination (odd number 7 pattern "777") that results in a "small time-saving win" final display result is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which Super Reach A to Super Reach C were provided as types of Super Reach, but this is not limited to the above, and types of Super Reach other than Super Reach A to Super Reach C may also be provided as types of Super Reach.

For example, a super reach D is provided as a super reach. In the variation patterns of "super reach D miss", "super reach D small time-saving hit" and "super reach D big hit" among the variation patterns accompanying the super reach, a reach state is established with the start of the variation display, and a super reach D performance (hereinafter referred to as "battle performance" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not the "small time-saving hit" or "big hit" has been won by the ally character battling the enemy character. Here, if the final display result is a "miss", a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. The ally character appearing in this battle performance is associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 described later.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination during Dream RUSH, ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH, and Invincible RUSH (see Figure 282-25) described later. Specifically, the following fluctuation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance: a fluctuation pattern determination table for "miss" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result is a "miss", a fluctuation pattern determination table for "big hit" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result is a "big hit", a fluctuation pattern determination table for "small time-saving hit" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result is a "small time-saving hit", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for "normal small hit" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result is a "normal small hit".

[For misses] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns: "long fluctuation miss", "high-speed miss", "high-speed normal reach miss", "super reach A miss", "super reach B miss", "ultra-high-speed miss", "super reach C miss", and "entry fluctuation miss".

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns of "Super Reach A jackpot", "Entry fluctuation jackpot", and "Direct jackpot".

[For time-saving small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns: "high-speed time-saving small hit", "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit", "super reach A time-saving small hit", "entering fluctuation time-saving small hit", "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit", and "super reach C time-saving small hit".

[For normal small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns of "Super reach B normal small hit", "Entry fluctuation normal small hit", and "High-speed normal small hit".

In this embodiment, the jackpot includes a pattern jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special pattern, and a small jackpot via small jackpot that occurs by V entry via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the first or second special pattern, so different variable patterns are used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot." However, this is not limited to this form, and a common variable pattern may be used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [For 0 reserved items] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figures 282-15 (1) to (4) are specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2 in the a time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "Dream RUSH" (see Figure 282-25). That is, Figures 282-15 (1) to (4) are specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (Dream RUSH)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 282-15 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 800 to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-15 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-15 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-15 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[For a time-saving state (big hit occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [for reserved 1 to 4] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figures 282-16 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 pieces] in [a time-saving state (big hit occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. That is, Figures 282-16 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 pieces] in [a time-saving state (Dream RUSH)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 282-16 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 800 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-16 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-16 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-16 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[For [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)], [1st fluctuation] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figure 282-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [the first fluctuation] in [the a time-saving state (the jackpot occurrence count value = 3)] in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 in the a time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 282-25). That is, Figure 282-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [the first fluctuation in the a time-saving state (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH) controlled for the first time after the first hit] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 282-17 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-17 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "entering fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-17 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small win], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "entering fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-17 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "entering fluctuation normal small hits."

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000), [0 reserved]] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figure 282-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] in this embodiment. Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000 in the a time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 282-25). That is, Figure 282-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 282-18 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-18 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-18 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-18 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000), [reserved 1 to 4]] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figure 282-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] in this embodiment. Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000 in the a time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 282-25). That is, Figure 282-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in [a time-saving state (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 282-19 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 975 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 976 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-19 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-19 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-19 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[b time-saving state] fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 282-20 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state in this embodiment. In this example, when the b time-saving state is selected, the performance mode is controlled to "invincible RUSH" (see Figure 282-25). That is, Figures 282-20 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible RUSH) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 282-20 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "fast miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-20 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-20 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 282-20 (4), in the [normal small hit] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "high-speed normal small hit" fluctuation pattern.

In this way, during the period when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 (above the mode switching judgment value), the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed non-reach miss" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000 ms is executed is approximately 80%. On the other hand, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (below the mode switching judgment value), the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed non-reach miss" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000 ms is executed is 0%. Therefore, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching judgment value of "3", the rate at which the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000 ms is executed is higher than when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than the mode switching judgment value of "3".

[Control table after winning according to game state]
FIG. 282-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a control table after a win according to each game state in this embodiment. FIG. 282-21 (1) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "big win" when the game state is in the normal state, according to each display result (big win type). Also, FIG. 282-21 (2) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the a time-saving state, according to each display result (small win type) and the occurrence of V winning. Also, FIG. 282-21 (3) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the b time-saving state, according to each display result (small win type) and the occurrence of V winning.

As shown in FIG. 282-21(1), when the game state is in the normal state,
(No. 1-1) If the display result is "3R normal jackpot", it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot.
(No. 1-2) If the display result is "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", it will be controlled to the a time-saving state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-3) If the display result is "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," the reel will be controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 282-21(2), when the game state is in the a time-saving state,
(No. 2-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit.
(No. 2-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 2-3) If the display result is "Time-limited small win" and no V-winning occurs during the small win, the game will be controlled to the normal state after the small win.
(No. 2-4) If the display result is a "time-saving small hit" and a V win occurs during the small hit, the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state after a big hit via the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 282-21 (3), when the game state is in the b time-saving state,
(No. 3-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, the game is controlled to the b time reduction state after the small hit.
(No. 3-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 3-3) If the display result is "Time-limited small win" and no V-winning occurs during the small win, the game will be controlled to the normal state after the small win.
(No. 3-4) If the display result is a "time-saving small hit" and a V win occurs during the small hit, the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state after a big hit via the small hit.

In this way, when the game state is in the a time-saving state, (No. 2-1) the display result becomes "normal small win", and if no V win occurs during the small win, the game is controlled to the normal state after the small win, whereas when the game state is in the b time-saving state, (No. 3-1) the display result becomes "normal small win", and if no V win occurs during the small win, the game is controlled to the b time-saving state after the small win.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 282-22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (S113) in the special symbol process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S02TM1010).

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag is provided in a specified area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state based on a decision in the normal special pattern processing (S110) of FIG. 278 to control the variable display result of the special pattern game to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". On the other hand, it is cleared to the OFF state based on the jackpot pattern being displayed as a fixed special pattern in the special pattern game.

If the jackpot flag is on (YES in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start presentation waiting time (step S02TM1020) and proceeds to step S02TM1030. In the processing of step S02TM1020, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time is set in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1030), clears the jackpot flag to the off state (step S02TM1040), and proceeds to step S02TM1050.

In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command is a command (jackpot fanfare command) that designates the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game state, and is included in the presentation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. In the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the result of determining the jackpot type. In the processing of step S02TM1030, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM1050), updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (step S02TM1060), and ends the process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot occurrence count value as the predetermined numerical data is the stored value of the jackpot occurrence counter. The jackpot occurrence counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of times that it has been determined to control to a jackpot in the game state, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot game state, in a manner that allows identification.

In this example, the jackpot occurrence counter is set to an initial count value of "0" as the initial state, and is updated by adding "1" to the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a stored value, each time it is decided to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of times it is decided to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state, reaches a limit value (10,000 times in this embodiment) as a predetermined upper limit value (when limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 10,000), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0". After that, the jackpot occurrence count value is added by "1" each time it is decided to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value is updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to the above, and the jackpot occurrence count value may be updated by subtracting 1.

For example, the jackpot occurrence counter is set to an initial count value of "10000" as the initial state, and is updated by subtracting "1" from the stored jackpot occurrence count value each time it is determined that a jackpot should be controlled, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of times it is determined that a jackpot should be controlled, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state, reaches a limit value (10000 times in this embodiment) as a predetermined upper limit (when limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 0), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "10000". After that, the jackpot occurrence count value is subtracted "1" each time it is determined that a jackpot should be controlled, including the first jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

Also, if the big win flag is off in step S02TM1010 (NO in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on (step S02TM1110).

In this embodiment, the small win flag is provided in a specified area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state based on a decision in the normal special pattern processing (S110) of FIG. 278 to control the variable display result of the special pattern game to a small win game state as a "small win". On the other hand, it is cleared to the OFF state based on the small win pattern being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special pattern game.

If the small win flag is off (NO in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (S110) (step S02TM1210), and ends the processing.

If the small win flag is on (YES in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 sets the small win start presentation wait time (step S02TM1120) and proceeds to step S02TM1130. In the processing of step S02TM1120, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the small win start presentation wait time is set in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a small win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1130), clears the small win flag to the off state (step S02TM1140), updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (S118) (step S02TM1150), and ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the small win start designation command is a command (small win fanfare command) that designates the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a small win game state, and is included in the presentation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. In the small win start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the determination result of the small win type. In the processing of step S02TM1130, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the small win start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the small win start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

[Jackpot end processing]
Figure 282-23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S117) in the special pattern process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the waiting time for the end of the jackpot performance has elapsed (step S02TM2010).

In this embodiment, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7" in the post-jackpot release processing (S116) in FIG. 278, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end presentation waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In the processing of step S02TM2010, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer, is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the jackpot end presentation waiting time has elapsed is determined depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value ("0" in this embodiment).

If the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has not elapsed (NO in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 ends the process.

If the waiting time for the jackpot end presentation has elapsed (YES in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value has reached a limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000"), which is a specific value that is predetermined in correspondence with the limit value (in this example, 10,000 times) as a predetermined upper limit value (step S02TM2020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value has reached the limit reaching judgment value (in this example, "10,000") (YES in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the stored jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2030), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the limit reaching judgment value (in this example, "10,000") (NO in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot via a small jackpot (step S02TM2040).

In the processing of step S02TM2040, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 is referenced to determine whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, it is determined whether the jackpot type is either a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the type of the jackpot in question is a jackpot via a small jackpot (YES in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the type of small jackpot corresponding to the jackpot in question is a "normal small jackpot" (step S02TM2050).

If the type of small win corresponding to the big win is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 clears the big win occurrence counter, initializes the big win occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2100), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the type of small win corresponding to the big win is not a "normal small win" (NO in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the type of the jackpot is not a jackpot via a small jackpot (NO in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (step S02TM2080).

If the jackpot type is a "3R regular jackpot" (YES in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2090), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot type is not a "3R regular jackpot" (NO in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If step S02TM2050 returns NO, or if step S02TM2080 returns NO, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag corresponding to the type of jackpot in question (step S02TM2060), sets the time-saving count counter to "10000" as the initial count value (step S02TM2070), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

In this embodiment, if any of the conditions for control to the time-saving state is met, the time-saving flag can be set. There are two types of time-saving flag: time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B. In the following explanation, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The a time-saving flag is set when the machine is in the a time-saving state after a jackpot that occurs during the normal state: a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" during the a time-saving state, a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot" during the a time-saving state, or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot" during the b time-saving state. This a time-saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the a time-saving state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the a time-saving state, when the time-saving control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the machine is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The b time-saving flag is set when the game is controlled to the b time-saving state after a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" that occurs during the normal state. This b time-saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the b time-saving state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the b time-saving state, when the time-saving control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

After processing step S02TM2030, after processing step S02TM2070, after processing step S02TM2090, or after processing step S02TM2100, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (S110) (step S02TM2110), and ends the processing.

In this way, even in the irregular case where a V win occurs during a "normal small win" and control is exercised over to the big win gaming state, by determining YES in step S02TM2050 during the big win end processing and skipping the process of setting the time-saving flag (step S02TM2060), it is possible to exercise control over to the normal state without being exercised over to the time-saving state after the big win gaming state.

Also, if step S02TM2080 is judged as YES and a process (step S02TM2090) is executed to clear the jackpot occurrence counter, when a "3R pattern normal jackpot" occurs during normal state, control is returned to normal state after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized when the jackpot ends. Also, if step S02TM2050 is judged as YES and a process (step S02TM2100) is executed to clear the jackpot occurrence counter, when a "10Ra jackpot via normal small jackpot" occurs, control is returned to normal state after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized when the jackpot ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Figure 282-24 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process processing.

First, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (step S02TM3010), and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (step S02TM3020).

If the V winning validity period timer has not timed out (NO in step S02TM3020), the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, has already been set (step S02TM3030).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the ON state (step S02TM3040) to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 during the valid V winning period.

If the V winning switch is not on (NO in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 ends the process.

On the other hand, if the V winning switch is in the ON state (YES in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected during the valid V winning period (step S02TM3050).

Then, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a V winning designation command (step S02TM3060) and ends the processing. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

If the V winning validity period timer has timed out in step S02TM3020, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a small win end command (step S02TM3070). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended.

Next, the CPU 103 changes the state of the solenoid 22 to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to an open state (step S02TM3080).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (step S02TM3090).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines that a jackpot has occurred and sets the jackpot flag (step S02TM3100).

Next, the CPU 103 officially stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the determination that a legitimate jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win in the jackpot type buffer (step S02TM3110).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM3120), and resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3130).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, in the small win end process executed at the timing when the small win game state ends, if a V win has occurred, a process is executed to update the jackpot occurrence count value as a predetermined numerical data by adding 1 (step S02TM3120). However, this is not limited to this form, and in the small win open process executed when controlled in the small win game state, if a V win has occurred, a process may be executed to update the jackpot occurrence count value as a predetermined numerical data by adding 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value was updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to the above, and the jackpot occurrence count value may be updated by subtracting 1. This can be achieved by the same method as that shown in step S02TM1050, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in step S02TM3110 (step S02TM3140). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the jackpot game state is about to start.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot control timer to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (e.g., the time at which the image display device 5 notifies the user that a jackpot has occurred) (step S02TM3150).

Then, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, and sets opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the number of openings (e.g., 3 times, 10 times, etc.), opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and interval time (time the jackpot opening is closed between rounds) according to the type of jackpot in a predetermined memory area formed in the RAM 102 (step S02TM3160). Of this data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening count counter for counting the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release process (S114) (step S02TM3170), and ends the process. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V prize flag is not set in step S02TM3090 (NO in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines whether the b time-saving flag is set among the time-saving flags (step S02TM3180).

If the b time-saving flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is not set, that is, if a V win has not occurred from a small hit that occurred during the a time-saving state or normal state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

On the other hand, if the b time-saving flag is set (YES in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit type of the small hit is a "normal small hit" (step S02TM3190).

If the type of the small hit is a "normal small hit" (YES in step S02TM3190), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is set and a V prize has not occurred in a small hit whose type is a "time-saving small hit", that is, if a V prize has not occurred in a time-saving small hit that occurred during the b time-saving state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

If step S02TM3180 returns NO, or if step S02TM3190 returns NO, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3200), clears the time-saving count counter, and initializes the time-saving count value to "0" (S02TM3210), clears the jackpot occurrence counter, and initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM3220), and proceeds to step S02TM3230.

If step S02TM3190 is judged as YES, or after processing step S02TM3220, the CPU 103 erases the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 (step S02TM3230), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM3240), and ends the processing. As a result, if no V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game does not transition to the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, if the V winning flag is not set, the b time-saving flag is set, and the small win type is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM3180 → YES in step S02TM3190), i.e., if a normal small win that occurs during the b time-saving state does not result in a V winning, by skipping the series of processes from step S02TM3200 to step S02TM3210 that resets the time-saving flag and clears the time-saving count counter, it becomes possible to continue controlling the b time-saving state, without being controlled (falling) into the normal state, even if a normal small win occurs during the b time-saving state.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode], the game state is controlled to either the a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag described later is set is set to [Dream RUSH], the game state is controlled to either the b time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the second flag described later is set is set to [Invincible RUSH], the game state is controlled to either the a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the third flag described later is set is set to [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 282-25).

In the example game flow shown in FIG. 282-25, when a jackpot occurs when the presentation mode is [normal mode], after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to either the normal state, the a time-saving state, or the b time-saving state. If it is controlled to the normal state, it transitions to [normal mode], if it is controlled to the a time-saving state, it transitions to [Dream RUSH], and if it is controlled to the b time-saving state, it transitions to [Invincible RUSH].

In this game flow, explanations of irregular situations during a game are omitted. Examples of irregular situations during a game are as follows:
・A situation where a big hit or a small hit occurs on special chart 2 during normal state ・A situation where a small hit occurs during normal state and a V is awarded ・A situation where a big hit or a small hit occurs on special chart 274 during time-saving state ・A situation where a V is awarded with a normal small hit ・A situation where a V is not awarded with a time-saving small hit ・A situation where the display result is "miss" in all variable displays of 10,000 time-saving times ・A situation where the number of big hits occurs is 10,000 times, etc. These specific examples of irregular situations are only examples, and other situations not described here are also included.

(1) <Normal>
The presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to "normal mode" when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and none of the first flag, second flag, and third flag are set.

(2) ＜First Hit＞
In the above-mentioned state (1), when the variable display that results in a "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include (2A) "3R normal jackpot", (2B) "3Ra time-saving jackpot", and (2C) "10Rb time-saving jackpot".

(2A) → (1)
When the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot", when the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (1).

(2B) → (3)
When the jackpot type is a "pattern 3Ra time-limited jackpot" and the jackpot ends, the device is controlled to state (3).

(2C) → (4)
When the jackpot type is a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot" and the jackpot ends, the device is controlled to state (4).

(3) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the first flag is set, and the presentation mode is set to [Dream RUSH] when 10,000 variable displays are executed.

(4) <b Time Reduction 10,000 Times>
The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game state to the b time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the second flag is set, and the presentation mode is set to [Invincible RUSH] when 10,000 variable displays are executed.

(5) <Jackpot>
In the above-mentioned (3) or (4), or the below-mentioned (7), when the display result in any of the variable displays becomes "big win" or "time-saving small win", the game is controlled to a big win game state (including a big win game state via a small win). In this embodiment, when the display result becomes "big win", the big win type of the second special pattern is "pattern 10Ra time-saving big win", and when the display result becomes "time-saving small win", the big win type via the small win of the second special pattern is "time-saving small win 10Ra time-saving big win".

(5) → (3)
When the number of jackpot occurrences is "2", and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (3).

(5) → (7)
When the number of jackpot occurrences is "3" or more ("3" to "10,000"), when the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (7).

(7) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for controlling presentation controls the game state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the third flag is set, and the presentation mode when 10,000 variable displays are executed is set to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(6) ＜Falling Small Hit＞
In the above-mentioned state (3) or (7), when the display result in any of the variable displays becomes "normal small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. In this embodiment, in a small win game in which the display result becomes "normal big win", the opening pattern of the V-determination winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and it is extremely difficult to make the game ball win the V-determination winning device 87, and it is substantially impossible to generate a big win.

(6) → (1)
If the small hit type is a "normal small hit" and the small hit ends without a V winning occurring, it will be controlled to state (1).

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag in this embodiment will be described.

<First flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the a-time shortening state after the jackpot ends (such as "pattern 10Ra time shortening jackpot", "a-time shortening jackpot via time shortening small jackpot", etc.) occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is also assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 1 or 2. After the jackpot game state ends, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 and the game state is controlled to the a-time shortening state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the first flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a and the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss", and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the first flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result becomes "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, or the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, the performance control CPU 120 resets the first flag.

<Second Flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot has ended (such as a "10Rb time-saving jackpot") has occurred and the game state has been controlled to the jackpot game state. When the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the performance control CPU 120 sets the second flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state and the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss", and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the second flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the 10,000th variable display ends is executed, and a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, or the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, the performance control CPU 120 resets the second flag.

<Third Flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the a-time shortening state after the jackpot has ended (such as "a-time shortening jackpot via a-time shortening small jackpot") has occurred, and the game state has been controlled to the jackpot game state. It is also assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 3 or more. After the jackpot game state has ended, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the game state is controlled to the a-time shortening state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the third flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a and the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss", and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the third flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result becomes "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state) ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, or the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, the performance control CPU 120 resets the third flag.

[Direction mode]
As shown in Fig. 282-25, in this example, the presentation modes are [Normal Mode], [Dream Rush], [Invincible Rush], and [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH]. Among the presentation modes in this embodiment, presentation examples of [Dream Rush], [Invincible Rush], and [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] will be described below.

<Dream RUSH>
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a or the normal state, and the presentation mode when the first flag is set is [Dream RUSH] (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the [Dream RUSH] mode) (see FIG. 282-25(3)). FIG. 282-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH].

As shown in Figures 282-26 (1) to (4), the performance control CPU 120 displays the first logo display (in this example, the letters "Dream Rush") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the performance mode is "Dream Rush". The performance control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the letters "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win in the second start winning port.

(Display of changing decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the performance mode is [Dream Rush] are composed of number symbols indicating numbers, etc., and are composed of blue even number symbols (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6"), red odd number symbols excluding the number "7" (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5"), and a gold odd number symbol of the number "7" (number symbol corresponding to the number "7"). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the performance mode is [Dream Rush] are appropriately referred to as "first decorative symbols". The first decorative symbols may be composed of number symbols and a pedestal symbol described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush], the first decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner such that the first decorative pattern scrolls vertically in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A vertical scroll display is a scroll display from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen. When this scroll display is being performed, the visibility of the decorative pattern is significantly reduced, and in this example, it is essentially impossible to see the decorative pattern.

In addition, when the display of the first decorative pattern is changed in the [Dream Rush] mode, the size of the first decorative pattern will not change between the start and end of the change.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
As shown in FIG. 282-26(1), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the combination of the first fixed decorative symbols (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-26 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special pattern, which results in a "miss", the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal mode active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-26(3), at the timing when the first decorative pattern in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative pattern combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small patterns is being performed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-26 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

(First logo display in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, a first logo cyclical change effect can be executed in which the first logo display is changed at a predetermined cycle to emphasize the name of the currently controlled presentation mode. The first logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the first logo display is changed in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 282-27(A), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the first logo cycle change performance, it causes the first logo display (the letters "Dream Rush") to emit light from the left end to the right end of the first logo display at a predetermined cycle. The cycle of change of the first logo cycle change performance is set to 5 seconds. In this way, by causing the first logo display to emit light from the left end to the right end, it increases the interest of the performance during [Dream Rush] and suggests a right hit to win at the second start winning slot.

(First system display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a right-hit promotion image (the letters "right hit" and an arrow image) is constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port when controlled in [Dream RUSH], but the invention is not limited to this form, and an image other than the right-hit promotion image may be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port when controlled in [Dream RUSH].

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], the first system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The first system display is a moving image including the characters "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the first system display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

(First rotation display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but this is not limited to the above form, and when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display form other than the still image of a round object.

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of round objects performing a rotating motion. The second pending display and active display performing the rotating motion at this time are referred to as a first rotation corresponding display. The rotation period of this first rotation corresponding display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

＜Invincible RUSH＞
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state or the normal state, and the presentation mode when the second flag is set is [Invincible RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as ``Invincible RUSH mode'' as appropriate) (see Figure 282-25 (4)).

The performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the performance mode is [Invincible RUSH], displays a caption including the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5 (background image of [Invincible RUSH]). The performance control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the word "Right Hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win in the second start winning port.

(Display of decorative patterns in [Muteki RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH] are composed of the same number symbols as the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH]. However, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH] are displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 in a smaller form than the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH] (see Figures 282-55 and 282-56). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH] will be referred to as the "second decorative symbols" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH], the second decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling vertically in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 in the same manner as the first decorative symbol is displayed by changing the presentation mode when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH]. Note that when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH], the second decorative symbol may be updated or transformed or enlarged/reduced in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2.

<Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH>
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the a time-saving state or the normal state, and the presentation mode when the third flag is set is [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the “[Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] mode”). 282-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a performance image displayed on the image display device 5 when the performance mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH]. It is.

As shown in Figures 282-28 (1) to (4), the performance control CPU 120 displays a second logo display (in this example, the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the performance mode is "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH". The performance control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win in the second start winning hole.

(Display of decorative patterns in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the decorative symbols are composed of number symbols showing numbers and the like, and base symbols corresponding to the shape of these number symbols. Furthermore, of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol in the center (symbol display area 5C) displays a light ray effect display from between the pedestal symbol and the number symbol (in this example, behind the center of the number symbol) to the screen frame. The light ray effect display is an image with a higher display priority than the pedestal symbol. Furthermore, the number symbol is an image with a higher display priority than the light ray effect display. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the number symbol, the light ray effect display, and the pedestal symbol are displayed in this order. Below, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER
The decorative pattern in the case of [RUSH] is appropriately referred to as the “third decorative pattern”.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative pattern is enlarged/reduced in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this embodiment, the variable display (enlargement/reduction) of the third decorative pattern is executed in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3).

(1) When the variable display starts, the third decorative pattern that has been confirmed and stopped in accordance with the display result of the variable display executed immediately before is enlarged and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time is appropriately referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: large)"). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern is changed to white to reduce the visibility of the third decorative pattern. Note that a configuration capable of changing the transmittance of the third decorative pattern may be adopted, and the visibility of the third decorative pattern may be reduced by setting the layer transmittance to a value other than 0% when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed.

(2) Next, the third decorative pattern that was enlarged just before is displayed in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time is appropriately referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: small)"). The combination of the third decorative patterns at this time is the combination of the third decorative patterns corresponding to the display result of the variable display. Also, similar to the case of the enlarged display of the third decorative patterns, the visibility of the third decorative patterns is reduced and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced by changing the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern to white and reducing the size of the third decorative pattern. By reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern in this way, even if the combination of the third decorative patterns corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed in the state (2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the display result of the variable display at this timing.

(3) Next, the third decorative pattern that was previously displayed in a reduced size is displayed frozen in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: medium)" as appropriate). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is improved and a light effect display is displayed. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is frozen, the display color of the third decorative pattern is changed from white to each color (blue, red, gold), thereby improving the visibility of the third decorative pattern.

In this example, when the enlarged/reduced display is being performed, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases in terms of its display size and color, but it is still possible to view it.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
As shown in Fig. 282-28(1), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the combination of the third decoration symbols (in this example, "245") of the previously executed variable display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-28(2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special pattern whose display result is "miss", the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, and enlarges and displays the third decorative pattern. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern to white, and erases the light effect display. The combination of the third decorative pattern at this time is the combination of the third decorative pattern (in this example, "245") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "miss").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal mode active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-28(3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is the combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "412") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display (in this example, "miss").

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-28(4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-28(5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

As shown in Fig. 282-26 (2), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Dream Rush], there are times when the decorative symbols become invisible during the period from when the variable display starts to when it ends. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 282-28 (2) to (5), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], there are no times when the decorative symbols become invisible during the period from when the variable display starts to when it ends, and they can be seen at any time.

(Second logo display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, a second logo cyclical change effect can be executed in which the second logo display is changed at a predetermined cycle to emphasize the name of the currently controlled presentation mode. The second logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the second logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 282-27(B), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the second logo cyclical change performance, it causes the second logo display (the characters "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") to light up from the left end to the right end of the second logo display at a predetermined cycle. The change cycle of the second logo cyclical change performance is set to 0.5 seconds. In this way, by causing the second logo display to light up from the left end to the right end, it increases the interest of the performance during [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] and suggests a right hit to win at the second start winning slot.

(Second system display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a right-hit promotion image (the letters "right hit" and an arrow image) is constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port when controlled in [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], but the present invention is not limited to this form. When controlled in [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], an image other than the constant right-hit promotion image may be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The second system display is a moving image including the characters "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the second system display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

(2nd rotation display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled in [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and, when controlled in [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display form different from the still image of a round object.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of round objects performing a rotating motion. The second pending display and active display performing the rotating motion in this case are referred to as a second rotation-compatible display. The rotation period of this second rotation-compatible display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

[Featured]
In this embodiment, a movable body 02TM100, which is a role-playing object, is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The movable body 02TM100 operates between an initial position, an intermediate performance position (where a part of the movable body is exposed), and a maximum performance position (where the entire movable body is exposed) according to the control of the performance control board 12. Hereinafter, the intermediate performance position and the maximum performance position will be appropriately referred to as "performance positions".

For example, the movable body 02TM100 may move from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position, from the initial position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, or from the maximum performance position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 282-29, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5. In other words, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and is configured not to affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the process of the movable body 02TM100 moving from the initial position to the performance position (intermediate performance position, maximum performance position) or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, the movable body 02TM100 is positioned in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of the movable body 02TM100 moving from the initial position to the performance position or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, it overlaps with the area of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this example, when the first change performance described later is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the intermediate performance position, and when the second change performance described later is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the maximum performance position. In the following, the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position will be referred to as an "intermediate performance" as appropriate, and the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → maximum performance position → initial position will be referred to as an "maximum performance" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body 02TM100 has a regular hexagonal shape that includes a design that resembles an ally character. The ally character of this movable body 02TM100 is a character that is the same as the ally character that appears in the super reach performance (in this example, the super reach A performance).

The movable body 02TM100 may be provided with a movable body LED, and a light-emitting effect may be performed in which the movable body LED emits white light when moving from the initial position to the performance position, or at a predetermined timing when the movable body is in the performance position (e.g., when the push button 31B is operated). A number of different light-emitting performance modes may also be provided. For example, in addition to a performance mode in which the movable body LED provided on the movable body 02TM100 emits white light, there may also be a performance mode in which the movable body LED emits red light.

[Logo Panel]
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The letters "XXX" (such as the name of this gaming machine) are displayed on this logo panel, and the letter portion of the logo panel "XXX" is illuminated.

<Positional relationship between props and logo panel>
In this embodiment, the logo panel 02TM110 is disposed in front of the movable body 02TM100 (toward the player). As shown in FIG. 282-29(1), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is located behind the logo panel 02TM110 (toward the gaming machine), and therefore the visibility of the movable body 02TM100 from the player is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 282-29 (2A), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate performance position, a part of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, about the bottom 2/3 of the movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 282-29 (2B), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum performance position, the entire movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the entire movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player.

In this way, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate presentation position, only a portion of the ally character in the movable body is visible to the player. On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum presentation position, all of the ally character in the movable body is visible to the player.

[Change Production]
In this embodiment, a change effect can be executed based on the result of the judgment at the time of the start winning. The change effect is an example of a preview effect in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of the judgment at the time of the start winning is displayed in either a blue state (in this example, a blue round display) or a red state (in this example, a red round display) different from the normal state (in this example, a white round display).

Specifically, among the change effects, the pending change effect, which displays the display mode of the pending display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either a blue mode or a red mode), is a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the display result of the pending memory whose execution is pending. Also, among the change effects, the active change effect, which displays the display mode of the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either a blue mode or a red mode), is a changing notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that is being executed. The timing at which the change effects are executed and the change patterns of the pending display are explained in detail in Figures 282-39 (B1) to 282-40 (B4) described later. Also, in this embodiment, the first change effect, the second change effect, and the third change effect, which have different presentation modes, can be executed as change effects.

<First transformation performance>
The first change performance is a series of performances consisting of (1A) to (1D) shown below.
(1A) A change precursor effect in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wavy effect display" as appropriate) is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (1B) An intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position. (1C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (1D) A first action change effect in which an ally character changes the display mode of a corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing a bomb at the corresponding display.

In (1D), the effect in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is referred to as the "first action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the bomb has been thrown changes is referred to as the "first corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning presentation determination process (see FIG. 282-38) described below and the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation (see FIG. 282-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the first change presentation can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the first change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is mainly executed, and since it is difficult to secure a period for executing the first variable performance in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the first variable performance cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A configuration in which the first change performance cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed may be adopted, and a configuration in which the first change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed may be adopted. For example, if a configuration in which the first change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed is adopted, the first change performance may be executed over multiple change displays in order to ensure a period for executing the first change performance.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which after a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes, but this is not limited to the above. After a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and there may be cases in which the display mode of the corresponding display does not change.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a false change premonition effect in which only the change premonition effect is executed and the effects subsequent to the intermediate action effect of the first change premonition effect are not executed. At this time, a decision is made to execute the false change premonition effect 3% of the time, and a decision is made not to execute the false change premonition effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the first transformation)
FIG. 282-30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the first change performance. In this example, an example in which the first change performance is executed when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal state is shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-30 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-30 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-30 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1B) intermediate movement performance of the first change performance, causing the blackout display 02TM200B to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the intermediate performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-30 (4), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1B) intermediate action performance of the first change performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1C) character appearance performance of the first change performance, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-30 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (1C) character appearance presentation of the first change presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing a bomb at the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-30 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and causing the first action effect display 02TM211 to be displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This first action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03, and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, it appears to the player that only the first action effect display is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-31 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the first action effect display 02TM211 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal mode active display 02TM03 to the blue mode active display 02TM03B.

<Second transformation performance>
The second change effect is a series of effects consisting of (2A) to (2D) shown below.
(2A) A change precursor effect in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wavy effect display" as appropriate) is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (2B) A maximum movement effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → maximum movement position → initial position. (2C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the friendly character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (2D) A second action change effect in which an friendly character changes the display mode of a corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing three bombs at the corresponding display.

In (2D), the effect in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is called the "second action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the three bombs have been thrown changes is called the "second corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning presentation determination process (see FIG. 282-38) described below and the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation (see FIG. 282-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the second change presentation can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the second change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is mainly executed, and since it is difficult to secure a period for executing the second variable performance in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the second variable performance cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A configuration in which the second change performance cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed may be adopted, and a configuration in which the second change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed may be adopted. For example, if a configuration in which the second change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed is adopted, the second change performance may be executed over multiple change displays in order to ensure a period for executing the second change performance.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which after a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes, but this is not limited to the above. After a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and there may be cases in which the display mode of the corresponding display does not change.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a false change premonition effect in which only the change premonition effect is executed and the maximum movement effect and subsequent effects of the second change premonition effect are not executed. At this time, it is decided to execute the false change premonition effect 3% of the time, and it is decided not to execute the false change premonition effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the second transformation)
FIG. 282-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the second change performance. In this example, an example in which the second change performance is executed when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal state is shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the (2A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2A) change precursor performance of the second change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second change performance, causing the blackout display 02TM200B to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (4), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second transformation performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2C) character appearance performance of the second transformation performance, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the maximum performance position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (2C) character appearance presentation of the second transformation presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2D) second action transformation presentation of the first transformation presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing three bombs at the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and causing the second action effect display 02TM212 to be displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This second action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03, and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the second action effect display is being displayed. Also, the second action effect display is an image that is larger than the first action effect display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-33 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the second action effect display 02TM212 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal mode active display 02TM03 to the red mode active display 02TM03R.

In this way, the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation is executed in a more emphasized manner than the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the friendly character and the size of the action effect display shown in the active display area.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second transformation performance was emphasized more than the first transformation performance in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the action effect display in the active display area, but this is not limited to the above form, and the second transformation performance may be emphasized more than the first transformation performance by other methods.

For example, the first transformation performance may be performed with a white background image when the performance is performed, and the second transformation performance may be performed with a red background image when the performance is performed, so that the second transformation performance may be emphasized more than the first transformation performance in terms of the background image (red > white).

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which an ally character (small) is displayed when the first transformation performance is performed, and an ally character (large) that is larger in display size than the ally character (small) when the second transformation performance is performed, the second transformation performance may be emphasized more than the first transformation performance in terms of the display size of the ally character (ally character (large) > ally character (small)).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) can be displayed in two different display modes, a blue mode or a red mode, different from the normal mode, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the corresponding display can be displayed in less than two different display modes different from the normal mode, or can be displayed in three or more different display modes different from the normal mode.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the corresponding display can be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode, the corresponding display may be displayed in four display modes different from the normal mode: blue mode, red mode, green mode, or gold mode. In this case, the probability of a jackpot increases in the following order: blue mode < green mode < red mode < gold mode.

<Third transformation performance>
The third change presentation is a presentation in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner at the following times: (i) the timing when the nth pending display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the pending display area (the timing at the time of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position in the variable ranking in the pending display area (towards the active display area) (when n is greater than or equal to 2), and (iii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed).

The third change effect includes (i) an effect in which, at the timing of the start winning, the pending display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, and an effect in which the display mode of the pending display is changed at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). Furthermore, the third change effect does not include an effect (hereinafter referred to as an "action effect") in which, like the first and second change effects, the display mode is changed by acting on the corresponding display (for example, an ally character throws a bomb) while the special pattern (the corresponding decorative pattern) is being displayed in a changing manner.

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning presentation determination process (see FIG. 282-38) described below and the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation (see FIG. 282-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the third change presentation can be executed whether the change presentation corresponding to the first special pattern is executed or the change presentation corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the change patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the change display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have extremely short change display periods, and it is difficult to secure a period for executing a change display accompanied by an action display (first change display, second change display) in the time-saving state. However, it is easy to secure a period for executing a third change display without an action display in the time-saving state. Therefore, a configuration is adopted in which the third change display can be executed in either the case where the change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed or the case where the change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, this is not limited to the above configuration. A configuration in which the third change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed may be adopted, and a configuration in which the third change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed may be adopted.

[Preview preview]
In this embodiment, a preview performance that predicts the jackpot expectation rate is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The preview performance includes a preview performance that predicts the jackpot expectation rate in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that predicts the jackpot expectation rate in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, in addition to the above-mentioned reserved change performance, a first pre-read performance and a second pre-read performance can be executed.

<First look ahead performance>
In this embodiment, the first pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the judgment at the time of the start winning. The first pre-reading effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the judgment at the time of the start winning is a "time-saving small win" by using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The first pre-reading effect is a series of effects consisting of (A) and (B) shown below.
(A) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 2>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 5L, and this decorative pattern is fixed (the number pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead A performance. (B) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 1>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and these decorative patterns are fixed (the number pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead B performance. The first look-ahead counter will be described in more detail later in Figure 282-38.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead A performance and the decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead B performance are decorative symbols that include a common number symbol. Therefore, when the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is executed, the variable display is configured to start in a state where a reach state is established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C.

When it is decided to execute this first look-ahead effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIG. 282-38), in the variable display executed when the first look-ahead counter = 1, a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead A effect is determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C. By doing this, the decorative patterns fixed in the first look-ahead A effect and the first look-ahead B effect are of the same type, and a reach state can be achieved in the variable display that is the subject of the preview.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is judged to be a "small time-saving hit," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance in the variable display that is the subject of the forecast will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing this, the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance and the decorative pattern that is finally confirmed and stopped in the variable display that is the subject of the forecast can be a decorative pattern of the same type, and appropriate performance control as a pre-reading forecast performance using decorative patterns can be realized.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is judged to be a "miss," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance in the variable display that is the subject of the forecast will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5L, 5C, and a decorative pattern of a different type from the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5R.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first pre-reading performance was executed as a pre-reading preview performance using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and a performance different from the first pre-reading performance may be executed as a pre-reading preview performance using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area.

For example, as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol enlargement effect in which the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged may be executed to indicate whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the subject of the preview is a "small time-saving hit."

As a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol destruction effect is executed in which the decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are destroyed (torn apart), which may indicate whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the subject of the preview is a "small time-saving hit."

(Example of the first look-ahead performance)
Figures 282-34 and 282-35 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images of each performance related to the first pre-reading performance.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (big win occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time-saving state), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. In addition, the display result of the reserved memory that is in the third position in the change order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning time presentation decision process (see Figure 282-38), it is decided to execute the first look-ahead presentation, and the first look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 282-28).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34(2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "772") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "772") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "771") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-34 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-35 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "771") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-35 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, which is a look-ahead preview performance, and erases the fixed icon 02TM41 from each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has become 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-35 (11), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-35 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a static state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-35 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

<Second prediction performance>
In this embodiment, the second look-ahead performance can be executed based on the result of the judgment at the time of the start winning. The second look-ahead performance is a type of look-ahead notice performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the judgment at the time of the start winning is a "time-saving small win" without using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the second look-ahead performance, the second look-ahead image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the forecast will be a "small time-saving win". In this example, the second look-ahead image is an image that includes a part of an image (in this example, "777") that imitates a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates that the display result of the stopped display will be a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Below, the image that imitates the third decorative symbol included in this second look-ahead image will be referred to as a "pseudo third decorative symbol" as appropriate. However, this pseudo third decorative symbol is a different image from the third decorative symbol because it does not correspond to the variable display that is being executed.

In this embodiment, the pseudo third decorative pattern is an image that includes a number pattern and a base pattern, but does not include a light effect display. However, the pseudo third decorative pattern is not limited to this form, and may be a decorative pattern that includes at least one of a number pattern, a base pattern, and a light effect display.

In the above embodiment, an example of an image including a portion of the pseudo third decorative pattern is shown as the second preview image, but the second preview image is not limited to this form, and other images may be used as the second preview image.

For example, the second pre-reading image may be an image including the letter "V" to suggest that the display result will be a "time-saving small win" or an image including the letter "FEVER." It may also be an image including an ally character related to the success or victory effects in a super reach.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead performance is executed in the variable display when the value of the second look-ahead counter, which is set when it is decided to execute the second look-ahead performance in the start winning performance determination process, becomes 1 or 2. However, this is not limited to this form, and the second look-ahead performance may be executed in the variable display when the second look-ahead counter has any value of 1, 2, 3, or 4. The second look-ahead counter will be described in detail later in FIG. 282-38.

In this embodiment, when the second look-ahead image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, the second look-ahead image has a lower display priority than the other effect images (the third decorative pattern, the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" at the top of the screen, etc.). Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the other effect images and the second look-ahead image are displayed in that order.

However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the second preview image may be configured to have a higher display priority (display layer) than other performance images. In this case, by making the second preview image a transparent image, the second image is displayed in front of other performance images, but since the second preview image is transparent, it is possible to view performance images (other performance images, etc.) related to the currently executed variable display.

In this embodiment, when the performance mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second look-ahead performance is executed, and the second look-ahead image is displayed on the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the visibility of the second look-ahead image changes depending on the display mode (enlarged/reduced) of the third decorative pattern. When the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the second look-ahead image decreases. That is, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second look-ahead image decreases. Also, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the second look-ahead image increases. That is, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second look-ahead image increases.

(Example of the second look-ahead performance)
Figures 282-36 and 282-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images of each performance related to the second pre-reading performance.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (big win occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time-saving state), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. In addition, the display result of the reserved memory that is in the third position in the change order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning time presentation decision process (see Figure 282-38), it is decided to execute the second look-ahead presentation, and the second look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-36 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of confirmed third decorative symbols (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 282-28).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36(2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36(3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "415") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, causing the second look-ahead image 02TM42 to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second look-ahead performance and erases the second look-ahead image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "415") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "342") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, causing the second look-ahead image 02TM42 to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-36 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second look-ahead performance and erases the second look-ahead image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-37 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "342") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-37 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has become 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-37 (11), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-37 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a static state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying a variable display of the small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-37 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

[Start-up winning performance determination process]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 the result of the judgment at the time of winning, which is whether or not a jackpot will be awarded, and a pattern designation command indicating the result of the judgment of the type of jackpot, a variable category command indicating the result of the judgment of the variable pattern, which is the result of the judgment at the time of winning, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) specifying that the reserved memory number has increased by 1.

Figure 282-38 is a flowchart showing the start-up winning presentation determination process. The presentation control CP 120 executes the start-up winning presentation determination process in the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the presentation control process shown in Figure 280.

In the start winning presentation decision process, the presentation control CPU 120 first checks whether a set of start winning commands (e.g., a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a first reserved memory count increment designation command or a second reserved memory count increment designation command) based on the occurrence of a start winning at the start winning port has been newly received (step S02TM4010).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a set of pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory count addition designation commands (first reserved memory count addition designation command or second reserved memory count addition designation command) have been newly stored in the start winning command storage area. If a set of start winning commands has not been newly received (NO in step S02TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If a new command for a set of start winnings has been received (YES in step S02TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is either a "big win" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4015).

The variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is the variable display currently being executed and the variable display of reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in the processing of step S02TM4015, at the time of the start winning, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display currently being executed and the variable display of reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning is a "big win" or a "time-saving small win".

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting winning is either "big win" or "time-saving small win" (YES in step S02TM4015), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither a "big win" nor a "time-saving small win" (NO in step S02TM4015), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change pre-reading prohibition flag described below is set (step S02TM4020). If the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

In this embodiment, the change pre-read prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision that at least one change effect (pending change effect, active change effect) will be executed. When the change pre-read prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4030 to S02TM4080 is skipped, so that it is possible to restrict the execution of a change effect that changes the pending display or active display for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning when it has been decided to execute a change effect on a pending memory whose execution is pending or a currently executing active display. This change pre-read prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the change pre-read prohibition flag was set ends.

If the change pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the final display mode determination table for the active display (see FIG. 282-39 (A)) (step S02TM4030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (step S02TM4040). If the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

If the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and active display based on the change pattern determination table (see Figures 282-39 (B1) to 282-40 (B4)) (step S02TM4050).

Here, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it means that the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode. If the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode, a change performance is performed on the pending display or active display, and it is displayed in a mode other than the normal mode. In other words, since at least one change performance is executed, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it is necessary to determine which change pattern to use to change the pending display or active display. Therefore, if NO in step S02TM4040, the change pattern of the pending display and active display is determined in the processing of step S02TM4050 based on the change pattern determination table.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the change performance based on the change performance mode determination table (see Figures 282-41 (1) and (2)) (step S02TM4060).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the change read-ahead counter (step S02TM4070) and sets the change read-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM1080).

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set to indicate the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance is executed. In this example, the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the change performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "change look-ahead counter", the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the first look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "first look-ahead counter", and the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the second look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "second look-ahead counter".

If step S02TM4020 is YES, if step S02TM4040 is YES, or after step S02TM4080, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more (step S02TM4090). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or more, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (step S02TM4090 is NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more, i.e., if the jackpot occurrence count value is between 3 and 10,000 (YES in step S02TM4090), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the second reserved memory number is 3 or more (step S02TM4100). If the value of the second reserved memory number is not 3 or more (NO in step S02TM4100), i.e., if the value of the second reserved memory number is between 0 and 2, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or more (YES in step S02TM4100), that is, if the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or 4, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the display result specified by the pattern designation command is either a "miss" or a "small time-saving win" (step S02TM4110). If the display result specified by the pattern designation command is neither a "miss" nor a "small time-saving win" (NO in step S02TM4110), that is, if the display result specified by the pattern designation command is either a "big win" or a "normal small win", it judges whether the first pre-reading prohibition flag described later is set (step S02TM4120). If the first pre-reading prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

In this embodiment, the first read-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision to execute the first read-ahead performance. When the first read-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4130 to S02TM4160 is skipped, so that the execution of the first read-ahead performance can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to a new start winning in a state where it has been decided to execute the first read-ahead performance for a pending memory whose execution is pending. This first read-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning performance determination processing when the first read-ahead prohibition flag was set ends.

If the first pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first pre-reading performance based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the first pre-reading performance (see FIG. 282-39 (B1)) (step S02TM4130).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (step S02TM4140). If it has not been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4140), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (YES in step S02TM4140), the performance control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S02TM4150), sets the first look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4160), and proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If step S02TM4120 is YES, if step S02TM4140 is NO, or after step S02TM4160, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a second pre-reading prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S02TM4170). If the second pre-reading prohibition flag is set (step S02TM4170 is YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

In this embodiment, the second read-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision to execute the second read-ahead performance. When the second read-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4180 to S02TM4210 is skipped, so that the execution of the second read-ahead performance can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to a new start winning when it has been decided to execute the second read-ahead performance for the pending memory whose execution is pending. This second read-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning performance determination processing when the second read-ahead prohibition flag was set ends.

If the second pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4170), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the second pre-reading performance (see FIG. 282-39 (B2)) (step S02TM4180).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (step S02TM4190). If it has not been decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4190), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it has been decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (YES in step S02TM4190), the performance control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S02TM4200), sets the second look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4210), and ends the processing.

In this way, in the processing of step S02TM4015, if the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither a "jackpot" nor a "small time-saving win", the processing for determining whether or not to execute a change performance for the corresponding display (reserved display, active display) (steps S02TM4020 to S02TM4080) and the processing for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead performance or the second look-ahead performance (steps S02TM4090 to S02TM4210) are skipped, thereby preventing the execution of inappropriate performance control that determines to execute a look-ahead preview performance in the variable display corresponding to a new start winning when there is a variable display that has already been determined to be a "jackpot" or a "small time-saving win".

[Tables referenced in the start winning performance determination process]
FIG. 282-39 to FIG. 282-42 are specific examples of tables referenced in any of the processes of the start winning performance determination process. FIG. 282-39 (A) is an example of a final display mode determination table of the active display referenced when determining the final display mode of the active display in step S02TM4030. FIG. 282-39 (B1) to FIG. 282-40 (B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables referenced when determining the change pattern of the pending display and the active display in step S02TM4050. FIG. 282-41 is an example of a performance mode determination table of the change performance referenced when determining the performance mode of the change performance in step S02TM4060. FIG. 282-42 (1) is an example of a first look-ahead performance execution/non-execution determination table referenced when determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead performance in step S02TM4130. Figure 282-42 (2) is an example of a decision table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance in step S02TM4180.

<Active display final display mode determination table>
Fig. 282-39(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in Fig. 282-39(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of active display can be determined to be one of "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode", and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 282-39(A), when the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "miss" (i.e. when the judgment result specified by the pattern designation command is "miss"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that initial winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode (white circle display) 90% of the time, the blue mode (blue circle display) 8% of the time, and the red mode (red circle display) 2% of the time.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "jackpot" (i.e. the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "jackpot"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that start winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode 75% of the time, the blue mode 15% of the time, and the red mode 10% of the time.

<Change Pattern Determination Table>
282-39 (B1) and (B2), and 282-40 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table of the reserved display and the active display. When the reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing when the nth reserved display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the reserved display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (the active display area side) in the variable ranking in the reserved display area (in the case of n ≧ 2), and (iii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed), the display information (reserved display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In the explanation of Figures 282-39 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 282-40 (B3) and (B4), active shift refers to the pending display shifting from the pending display area to the active display area (as a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of the initial winning is displayed).

In this embodiment, a hold change effect can be executed in which the display information (hold display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a different manner from the normal manner at any of the timings (i) to (iii) described above. In this example, this hold change effect includes (i) a performance in which the mode of the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in a different manner from the normal manner at the timing of the start winning, and a performance in which the display mode of the hold display is changed at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). It should be noted that the hold change effect is not limited to this form, and may also include a performance in which the display mode is changed by acting on the hold display (for example, by piercing an arrow into the hold display) during the variable display of the special pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to it).

Figures 282-39 (B1) and (B2), as well as Figures 282-40 (B3) and (B4) show the display mode of the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display at each of the timings (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. In the change patterns shown in the figures, "normal" indicates the normal mode, which is a white circular display, "blue" indicates the blue mode, which is a blue circular display, and "red" indicates the red mode, which is a red circular display.

([For 1 reserved item] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "1", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one reserved item shown in Fig. 282-39 (B1). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 101 to 105 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal manner at the time of the start winning, and then the pending display of the predicted target remains in the normal manner at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a normal → normal change pattern.

Following this, similarly, change pattern 102 is normal → blue, change pattern 103 is blue → blue, change pattern 104 is blue → red, and change pattern 105 is red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the probability of determining change pattern 101 is 5%, change pattern 102 is 5%, and change pattern 103 is 90%.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 102 at 2%, change pattern 103 at 10%, change pattern 104 at 8%, and change pattern 105 at 70%.

([For 2 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "2", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two reserved items shown in Fig. 282-39 (B2). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 208 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 201 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal state at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, change pattern 205 is normal → blue-red, change pattern 206 is blue → blue → red, change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, and change pattern 208 is red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the probability of determining change pattern 201 is 10%, change pattern 202 is 5%, change pattern 203 is 5%, and change pattern 204 is 80%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 201 is 10%, change pattern 202 is 2%, change pattern 203 is 2%, change pattern 204 is 10%, change pattern 205 is 1%, change pattern 206 is 8%, change pattern 207 is 8%, and change pattern 208 is 60%.

([3 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "3", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for three reserved items shown in Fig. 282-40 (B3). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 308 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 301 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, and change pattern 308 is red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the probability of determining change pattern 301 is 6%, change pattern 302 is 2%, change pattern 303 is 2%, and change pattern 304 is 90%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 301 is 10%, change pattern 302 is 2%, change pattern 303 is 2%, change pattern 304 is 10%, change pattern 305 is 1%, change pattern 306 is 8%, change pattern 307 is 8%, and change pattern 308 is 60%.

([4 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "4", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for four reserved items shown in Fig. 282-40 (B4). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 412 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 401 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, and change pattern 412 is red → red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, either "miss" or "jackpot"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the rate of determination is 10% for change pattern 401, 10% for change pattern 402, 10% for change pattern 403, 10% for change pattern 404, and 60% for change pattern 405.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 401 is 20%, change pattern 402 is 5%, change pattern 403 is 5%, change pattern 404 is 5%, change pattern 405 is 20%, change pattern 406 is 2%, change pattern 407 is 2%, change pattern 408 is 2%, change pattern 409 is 7%, change pattern 410 is 6%, change pattern 411 is 6%, and change pattern 412 is 20%.

<Determination table for change effect mode>
282-41(1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for a change presentation. As shown in FIG. 282-41(1) and (2), in this embodiment, a judgment value is allocated so that the decision ratio of the presentation mode of the change presentation differs depending on the change timing in the change pattern.

Figure 282-41 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [first special symbol].

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → blue", it is decided to execute the first change performance 20% of the time, the second change performance 0% of the time, and the third change performance 80% of the time.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red," it is decided to execute the first change performance 15% of the time, the second change performance 80% of the time, and the third change performance 5% of the time.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is decided that the first change performance will be executed 40% of the time, the second change performance will be executed 50% of the time, and the third change performance will be executed 10% of the time.

Figure 282-41 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [second special symbol].

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → blue", it is decided that the third change performance will be executed with a probability of 100%.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red", it is decided to execute the third change performance with a probability of 100%.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is decided that the third change effect will be executed with a probability of 100%.

<First look-ahead effect presentation mode determination table>
Fig. 282-42(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead performance. As shown in Fig. 282-42(1), in this embodiment, a judgment value is allocated so that the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the first look-ahead performance differs depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 90% chance that it will be decided not to execute the first look-ahead performance, and a 10% chance that it will be decided to execute the first look-ahead performance.

In addition, if the display result is a "small time-saving hit," there is a 70% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and there is a 30% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

<Table for determining the presentation mode of the second pre-reading presentation>
Fig. 282-42(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second look-ahead performance. As shown in Fig. 282-42(2), in this embodiment, a judgment value is assigned so that the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the second look-ahead performance differs depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 95% chance that it will be decided not to execute the second look-ahead performance, and a 5% chance that it will be decided to execute the second look-ahead performance.

In addition, if the display result is a "small time-saving hit," there is an 80% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and there is a 20% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

In this way, if the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Also, if the display result is a "small time-saving hit," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, among the look-ahead preview effects, the giant symbol effect may be set to have a higher execution rate than the reserved look-ahead preview effect.Furthermore, the combined execution rate of the first look-ahead effect and the giant symbol effect may be set to be higher than the combined execution rate of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead preview effect.

[Jackpot count display]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the presentation mode during the time-saving state a is switched when the count value of the jackpot occurrence counter (hereinafter referred to as the ``jackpot occurrence count value'' as appropriate) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (hereinafter referred to as the ``mode switching determination value'' as appropriate).

In this example, the mode switching judgment value is set to "3." When the number of jackpot occurrences, counting from the first jackpot, is 1 to 2 (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is < mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to [Dream RUSH], and when the number of jackpot occurrences, counting from the first jackpot, is 3 or more (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is >= mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to "Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH."

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or less than the mode switching judgment value, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time. The jackpot count display can notify the number of jackpot occurrences counted from the first jackpot (jackpot occurrence count value), and can also notify the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached (mode switching judgment value - jackpot occurrence count value). Therefore, the jackpot count display can appropriately show the player how many jackpots remain to occur before transitioning to [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], which has a high rate of execution of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display period (fast fluctuation speed).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a required number of jackpots notification effect that notifies the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value without using a jackpot count display during the ending period of the jackpot. The required number of jackpots notification effect displays the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The required number of jackpots display includes the text "n more jackpots until the super high-speed HYPER RUSH" (n = 1, 2) (see Figure 282-51 (8) and Figure 282-56 (23)).

In this example, when a jackpot occurrence count value = 1 occurs, two more jackpots are required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count value = 1 occurs is appropriately referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [2 times]". Also, when a jackpot occurrence count value = 2 occurs, one more jackpot is required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count value = 2 occurs is appropriately referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [1 time]".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3), during the round period of a specific type of jackpot game state (in this example, "10Ra time-saving jackpot", "10Rb time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot") or during the small jackpot game period of a specific type of small jackpot game state (in this example, "time-saving small jackpot"), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left or center of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, during the period when the presentation mode during the a time-saving state is controlled to [Dream RUSH] (waiting period for variable display start, variable display period), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left of the screen of the image display device 5.

The jackpot count display is made up of four parts, from the bottom to the top of the screen: a first count section, a second count section, a third count section, and a reach section. The letters "V" and "WIN" are displayed in the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display. The letters "PREMIUM FEVER" are displayed in the reach section of the jackpot count display. Below, the first count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "jackpot count display (first count section)" or the "first count section" as appropriate. The same applies to the second count section, the third count section, and the reach section of the jackpot count display. At least one of the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "count section" as appropriate.

<Display mode of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, the display size of the arrival section of the jackpot count display is larger than that of any of the count sections. In addition, the display size of the third count section of the jackpot count display is larger than that of the first and second count sections, and the display size of the second count section is larger than that of the first count section. That is, the display sizes are larger in the order of the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section. Therefore, the display sizes of the information displayed in the count section (such as the character "V" and the character "WIN") are larger (highlighted) in the order of the information displayed in the first count section, the information displayed in the second count section, and the information displayed in the third count section. In addition, the display size of the information displayed in the arrival section (the character "PREMIUM FEVER") is larger (highlighted) than that of any of the information displayed in the count sections (such as the character "V" and the character "WIN").

In the above embodiment, an example was given of a method of varying the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display by varying the display size, but the method is not limited to this and other methods may be used to vary the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which each part of the jackpot count display can emit light, the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display can be varied by increasing the light emission brightness in the order of the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section.

In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which each section of the jackpot count display can flash, the degree of emphasis of each section of the jackpot count display can be varied by shortening the flashing intervals in the order of the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis was varied by varying the display mode of each part of the jackpot count display, but this is not limited to the above, and the degree of emphasis may be varied by varying the display mode of the entire jackpot count display.

For example, in a configuration in which the transparency of the jackpot count display can be set to any value, when a jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 90%, when a jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 50%, and when a jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 0%.

In this embodiment, the counting sections (first counting section, second counting section, third counting section) of the jackpot count display can be displayed in three different display modes: an initial mode, a first change mode, and a second change mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the counting section from the initial mode to the first change mode is called a V change effect, and the effect of changing the counting section from the first change mode to the second change mode is called a WIN change effect.

The series of V-change effects and WIN-change effects executed on the first count section will be referred to as the "first stage effects" as appropriate, the series of V-change effects and WIN-change effects executed on the second count section will be referred to as the "second stage effects" as appropriate, and the series of V-change effects and WIN-change effects executed on the third count section will be referred to as the "third stage effects" as appropriate.

When the count section is displayed in the initial state, the information displayed on the count section is the white letter "V", when the count section is displayed in the first change state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "V", and when the count section is displayed in the second change state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "WIN".

In this embodiment, when a V-change effect is performed on the count section, the jackpot occurrence display (in this example, the red letter "V" shown in FIG. 282-51(5)) related to the occurrence of a jackpot displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 acts on the white letter "V" displayed on the count section in the initial state, and changes to the red letter "V" displayed on the count section in the first change state.

The arrival section of the jackpot count display can be displayed in two different display modes: an initial mode and a change mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the arrival section from the initial mode to the change mode is called the arrival section change effect.

When the destination is displayed in its initial state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in white letters, and when the destination is displayed in its variable state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in red letters.

<[When hitting a jackpot] Timing of the jackpot count display and change>
In this embodiment, when it is decided in the jackpot performance decision process (see FIG. 282-43) to display a jackpot count display, the jackpot count display can be displayed in the jackpot game state every time a jackpot occurs such that the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3, and the display mode of each count section corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value is changed in the order of from the initial mode to the first change mode and then the second change mode.

In this embodiment, a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more is a jackpot that occurs when the time-saving state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed is controlled. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving state, the probability of a jackpot via a small jackpot occurring when the display result becomes a "small jackpot" and a jackpot via a V prize is higher than a jackpot occurring when the display result becomes a "jackpot" (see FIG. 282-2 (B2)). Therefore, in this example, when explaining the occurrence of a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more, an example of a jackpot via a small jackpot occurring is used, but the same applies to a jackpot occurring when the display result becomes a "jackpot", so an explanation is omitted.

(1) <When the jackpot count value = 1 occurs>
(1-1) During the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the end of the right-hit notification of the first round to the end of the second round), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, each count section and the arrival section are both displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 282-51(5)).

(1-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the passage of the first predetermined period), the jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 282-51 (6)).

(1-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts and the first specified period has elapsed to when the second specified period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from the first change state to the second change state. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in their initial states (see FIG. 282-51 (7)).

(2) <When the jackpot count value is 2>
(2-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the big win round period in the big win game state (in this example, the period from the timing of the V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the big win round period), the big win count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section is continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section are all continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 282-56 (20)).

(2-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the passage of the first predetermined period), the jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 282-56 (21)).

(2-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from the first change state to the second change state. Also, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in their initial states (see FIG. 282-56 (22)).

(3) <When the jackpot count value is 3>
(3-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the big win round period in the big win game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the V win occurs during the small win game period to the end of the second round of the big win round period), the big win count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the arrival section are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 282-59 (11)).

(3-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), the jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the first and second count sections continue to be displayed in the second change state, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 282-59 (12)).

(3-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the second change performance is executed for the third count section, and the third count section changes from the first change state to the second change state. The first count section and the second count section continue to be displayed in the second change state, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 282-59 (13)).

(3-4) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first and second predetermined periods have elapsed to the timing when the third predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a reaching part change performance is executed for the reaching part, and the reaching part changes from the initial state to the changing state. The first count part, the second count part, and the third count part continue to be displayed in the second changing state (see FIG. 282-59 (14)).

<Timing of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the a time-saving state, which is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this example, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 during the waiting period for the start of the variable display and the variable display period based on the fact that the jackpot count display flag described below is set (see Figures 282-58 (1) and (2), and Figures 282-61 (1) to (3)).

However, in the time-saving state [Dream Rush] that is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, even during the variable display period when the jackpot count display flag is set, the jackpot count display is erased from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 and is not displayed during the period when the super reach performance is being executed (see Fig. 282-58 (3) and (8), and Fig. 282-61 (4) to (7)). When it develops into a super reach performance, the display result is a "time-saving small hit" (via a small hit) and a performance is performed to notify whether or not a jackpot will occur, or the display result is a "normal small hit" and a performance is performed to notify whether or not the state will fall back to normal. The information (jackpot count display) that notifies the player of the current number of jackpot occurrences (jackpot occurrence count value) has a lower priority for the player than information related to the Super Reach performance that notifies the display results of the variable display currently in progress (the performance image of the Super Reach performance), so the jackpot count display is not displayed when the Super Reach performance is progressing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super reach performance is progressing, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the jackpot count display may be displayed even when the super reach performance is progressing.

<Display mode of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the a time-saving state which is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the same display manner as the display manner immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during the jackpot before being controlled to the a time-saving state.

In this example, in the a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH] that is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value = 1, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display mode as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 1) (the first count section is displayed in the second change mode, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section are all displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 282-51 (7))).

In addition, in the a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH] that is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value = 2, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display mode as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 2) (the first and second count sections are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the arrival section are displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 282-56 (22))).

[Jackpot performance determination process]
Fig. 282-43 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 282-43 in the effect control process during a jackpot (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 280. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a jackpot (and the effect not to be executed) by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 282-43.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the type of the jackpot in question is a "3R regular jackpot" (step S02TM5010).

If the type of the jackpot is a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (YES in step S02TM5010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is not a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM5010), that is, if the jackpot type is any of the "10Ra pattern time-saving jackpot", "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot", etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM5020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM5020), i.e., if the jackpot occurrence count value is any value between 1 and 3, the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM5030) and sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM5040).

The jackpot count display flag is a type of flag that is set when it is decided that the jackpot count display will be displayed at the start of a jackpot or when a V win occurs during a small jackpot. This jackpot count display flag is a flag that indicates that the jackpot count display will be displayed in the jackpot game state, small jackpot game state, or time-saving state, and is erased at the same timing as when the first flag or second flag described above is erased (reset).

After processing step S02TM5040, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (step S02TM5050).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (YES in step S02TM5050), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the first stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the first count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5060), decides to execute the required number of jackpots notification presentation [2 times] (step S02TM5070), and ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 1 (NO in step S02TM5050), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (step S02TM5080).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (YES in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the second stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the second count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5090), decides to execute the required number of jackpots notification presentation [1 time] (step S02TM5100), and ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 2 (NO in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (step S02TM5110). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 (NO in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (YES in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute a third stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the third count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5120), decides to execute a reach section change presentation (step S02TM5130), and ends the process.

[Small hit performance decision processing]
Fig. 282-44 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small win. The effect control CPU 120 executes the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 282-44 in the small win effect process (step S174) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 280. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a small win start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a small win (and the effect not to be executed) by the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 282-44.

In this example, during the small win open process that is executed when the game is controlled to a small win game state, if a V win occurs, a process is executed to update the big win occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the V winning flag is set (step S02TM6010). If the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM6010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM6010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM6020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3 (a jackpot via a small jackpot at the first jackpot (jackpot occurrence count value = 1) is irregular), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM6030), sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM6040), and ends the process.

[Processing for determining effects when waiting for fluctuation start]
Fig. 282-45 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during the waiting period for the start of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 282-45 during the waiting period for the start of the variable display (step S170) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 280. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo command, it determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the waiting period for the start of the variable display by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 282-45.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM7010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM7010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM7010), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM7020) and ends the process.

[Processing for determining effects at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the special pattern, it transmits a display result designation command that specifies the display result, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special pattern will be performed and that the display time of the special pattern and the presentation content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.) will be determined based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 00 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, or miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, etc.); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the change time of the special pattern and the presentation content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the display result has been determined, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a pattern determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 282-46 is a flowchart showing the effect judgment process executed at the start of the change. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect judgment process at the start of the change shown in Figure 282-46 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 280. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variable pattern designation command, and determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variable pattern by the effect judgment process at the start of the change shown in Figure 282-46.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM8010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM8010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM8010), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020).

In this way, this process for determining the effect at the start of fluctuation determines whether or not the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the process for determining the effect while waiting for the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 282-45) should be continued to be displayed at the start of fluctuation.

[Fluctuation performance judgment processing]
Fig. 282-47 is a flow chart showing the effect judgment process executed during the execution period of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect judgment process during the variable display shown in Fig. 282-47 in the effect processing during the variable display (step S172) of the effect control process processing shown in Fig. 280. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the execution period of the variable display by the effect judgment process during the variable display shown in Fig. 282-47.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM9010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM9010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM9010), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020) and determines whether it is time for the fluctuation pattern to develop into a super reach (step S02TM9030).

The CPU 103 can obtain information regarding the elapsed time of the currently being executed variable display in the special symbol variable processing (S112) of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 278, which includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary and a process of determining whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable time corresponding to the variable pattern. Then, in step S02TM9030, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on that information, whether the current variable time is the timing to develop into a super reach in the variable pattern.

If it is not time for the variation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (NO in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it is time for the fluctuation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (YES in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display (step S02TM9040) and ends the process.

In this way, this process of determining the effects during fluctuation determines whether the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the process of determining the effects when waiting for the fluctuation to start (see FIG. 282-45) should be continued to be displayed during fluctuation, or whether it should be erased during fluctuation, etc.

[Example of the first hit being a "3R regular jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when the first "3R normal jackpot" occurs while the machine is controlled in [normal mode] will be explained using Figures 282-48 to 282-49.

Figure 282-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each of the effects associated with the first hit of the "3R pattern normal jackpot" occurring when controlled in [normal mode], and Figure 282-49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image associated with the first hit of the "3R pattern normal jackpot" occurring when controlled in [normal mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode], a variable display of the first special pattern is executed, which results in a "jackpot" ("3R pattern normal jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode].

First, as shown in FIG. 282-49(1), when the presentation mode is controlled to the [normal mode], at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 282-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, determines and stops the combination of determined decorative symbols (in this example, "222") that results in a "jackpot" (3R pattern normal jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special pattern stop processing (see Figure 282-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-49 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 282-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start designation command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to [normal mode], and displays a jackpot start image (in this example, the word "FEVER") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-49(3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 282-48), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot round game image. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") showing the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, and a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00000") showing the total number of prize balls awarded.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win a prize at the second start prize opening or the large prize opening (here, the large prize opening).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-49 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot play state (timing T4 shown in FIG. 282-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, displays a jackpot end image (in this example, a total prize ball count display (the letters "TOTAL 00450") showing the total number of prize balls awarded, and ally characters) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared during the jackpot end process (see Figure 282-23).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-49 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the big win game state (timing T5 shown in FIG. 282-48), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode], and displays in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is common to the combination of fixed decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "222"). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is displayed. At this time, a background image corresponding to [normal mode] (in this example, a clear background image including the sun and mountains) is displayed as the background image.

[Example of the first hit being a "10Ra time-limited jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when the initial hit of the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Jackpot" occurs while controlled in [Normal Mode] will be explained using Figures 282-50 to 282-52.

Figure 282-50 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the first "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortening Big Hit" occurs when controlled in [Normal Mode], and Figures 282-51 and 282-52 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to the first "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortening Big Hit" occurring when controlled in [Normal Mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], the display results in a variable display of the first special symbol, which is a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Ra time-limited jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH].

First, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode], at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 282-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, determines and stops the combination of determined decorative symbols (in this example, "555") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "555") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special pattern stop processing (see Figure 282-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 282-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start designation command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to [normal mode], and displays a jackpot start image (in this example, the words "Dream Fever") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51(3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 282-48), the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as explained in FIG. 282-49(3), and displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to enter the jackpot, and the letters and arrow image are emphasized more than in the constant right-hit promotion image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot round play start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. However, this jackpot round play start image has a lower display priority than the highlighted right hit promotion image. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the highlighted right hit promotion image and the jackpot round play start image are displayed in that order. However, in this example, since the display area for the jackpot round play start image and the highlighted right hit promotion image are shared (the entire screen of the image display device 5), only the highlighted right hit promotion image is visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (4), the performance control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right-hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 282-50). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot round play start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round play start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the letters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round play, a jackpot right-hit promotion image including the letters "Aim for the attacker!!" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to enter the jackpot winning hole, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot round play start image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the initial state of the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 282-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence indication (in this example, a red "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes a V-change presentation on the first count section, changing the first count section from the initial state (white letter "V") to the first change state (red letter "V") (timing T6 shown in FIG. 282-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the first count section, changing the first count section from the first change state (white letter "V") to the second change state (red letter "V") (timing T7 shown in FIG. 282-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 3") corresponding to the currently being played round in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00330") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-51 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T8 shown in FIG. 282-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation and displays, on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached (the text "2 more jackpots until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH").

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-52 (9), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpots notification presentation, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 282-50).

[Example of the first hit being a "10Rb time-saving jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is initially hit when controlled in [normal mode], and then a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" is hit when controlled in [invincible RUSH], will be explained using Figures 282-53 to 282-56.

Figure 282-53 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each of the related effects when the first hit of the "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [normal mode], and then when controlled in [invincible RUSH], a jackpot of the "10Rb time-saving jackpot via a small time-saving jackpot" occurs. Figures 282-54 to 282-56 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the related effect images when the first hit of the "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [normal mode], and then when controlled in [invincible RUSH], a jackpot of the "10Rb time-saving jackpot via a small time-saving jackpot" occurs.

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], the display of the first special pattern, which results in a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), is executed, and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [Invincible Rush], and during this [Invincible Rush], the display of the second special pattern, which results in a "time-saving small win", is executed, a V win occurs in the small win, and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-54 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode], at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, determines and stops the combination of determined decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special pattern stop processing (see Figure 282-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-54 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to [normal mode], executes the first part of the 3000 notification presentation, and displays the words "Dream Fever" on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-54 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the second part of the 3000 notification presentation, and while the word "Dream FEVER" is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, a cracked image is superimposed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, making the screen appear cracked (timing T3 shown in FIG. 282-53). The cracked image has a higher display priority than the word "Dream FEVER". Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the cracked image and the word "Dream FEVER" are displayed in that order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-54 (4), the performance control CPU 120 executes the third part of the 3000 notification performance, erases the letters "Dream Fever" and the crack image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 282-53).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-54 (5), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth part of the 3000 notification performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the letters "3000" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 282-53).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the reel does not move when the 3000 notification performance is executed, but this is not limited to the above, and the reel may move when the 3000 notification performance is executed. For example, when the fourth part of the 3000 notification performance is executed, the movable body 02TM100 may be moved from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-54 (6), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fifth part of the 3000 notification performance, and displays the words "3000FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 282-53).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot" occurs, the 3000 notification presentation consisting of parts 1 to 5 is executed, thereby notifying the player that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the first jackpot and the 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the jackpot that is essentially confirmed to be the next jackpot.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 282-54 (7) to 282-55 (11) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 282-51 (3) to (7) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-55 (12), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes a special notification presentation to notify the player that the game state will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the jackpot game state ends, displays the words "3000 FEVER" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a caption including the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T12 shown in FIG. 282-53).

This caption display is the same image as the caption display displayed when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH], and by displaying the caption display during the jackpot round period before control is switched to [Invincible RUSH], it is possible to notify the player that control will be switched to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the end of the jackpot game state.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00450").

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-55 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the big win game state and starts the b time-saving state (timing T13 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [Invincible RUSH] and displays in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 a combination of fixed second decorative symbols of the same type as the combination of fixed decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "777"). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a promotion image for right-hitting at the start of time-saving in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This right-hit promotion image at the start of the time-saving feature includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs the player to hit to the right in order to win in the second start winning hole.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on being controlled by [Invincible Rush], displays a caption including the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period controlled by [Invincible RUSH], a prize ball count display (corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the previous jackpot) (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01500") is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the b time-saving state controlled after the "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so by continuing to display the prize ball count display corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the previous jackpot even after the jackpot, the special feeling of the b time-saving state is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-55 (14), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special pattern that results in a "miss" display based on the occurrence of a new start winning at the second start winning port (timing T14 shown in FIG. 282-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the second decorative pattern in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-55 (15), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T14 shown in FIG. 282-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "142") indicating that the display result is a "miss" in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "142") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

After this, the variable display is executed m (m ≥ 1) times, and all display results are assumed to be "misses." Then, as shown in Figure 282-55 (16) and onwards, the display result in the next variable display is assumed to be "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-55 (16), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is a "time-saving small win" (timing T16 shown in FIG. 282-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (17), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in FIG. 282-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "small time-saving win" in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (18), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T18 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start designation command, displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to enter the V winning hole.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the emphasized right-hit promotion image in a jackpot game state is displayed during the jackpot round game period after the jackpot fanfare period has ended, and the emphasized right-hit promotion image in a small-hit game state is displayed during the small-hit fanfare period, but this is not limited to the above form. The emphasized right-hit promotion image in a jackpot game state may be displayed during the jackpot fanfare period, and the emphasized right-hit promotion image in a small-hit game state may be displayed during the small-hit fanfare period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (19), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game period (timing T19 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small win game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right hit promotion image that includes the text "Aim for the V!!" to win a V and an arrow image that instructs a right hit, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (20), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during a small win game, at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a specified valid period (timing T20 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a big win occurrence indication (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section in the second change state, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section in the initial state.

When the CPU 103 ends the small win game state, the big win occurrence count value is updated from 1 to 2 in the small win end process (see Figure 282-24).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (21), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the big win game state (timing T21 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V change presentation for the second count section, changing the second count section from the initial state (white letter "V") to the first change state (red letter "V").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 3") corresponding to the currently being played in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01800") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (22), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the second counting section, changing the second counting section from the first change state (red letter "V") to the second change state (red letter "WIN") (timing T22 shown in FIG. 282-53).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01830").

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (23), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T23 shown in FIG. 282-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation and displays, on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached (the text "One more jackpot until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH")

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (24), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the presentation of the required number of jackpots notification, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, the first stage effect is executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and a special notification effect is executed to notify players that they will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the jackpot game state ends, and during the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot, the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display.

By executing the special notification effect at the [first jackpot], it is possible to notify the player that the second stage of the jackpot count display will be executed, i.e., that it is virtually certain that there will be 1 remaining before the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, giving the player a sense of specialness about the "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot".

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, the player will be able to clear the majority (2/3) of the value they should aim for on the jackpot count display (the mode switching determination value of 3), making the "10Rb time-saving jackpot" feel more special than other types of jackpots on the first hit.

In the above embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, the first stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed on the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed on the second count section of the jackpot count display during the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot.

However, it is not limited to this form, and during the [first jackpot], the first stage effect is executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) may be executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display at a different timing from during the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot.

As examples of the execution timing at which the second stage presentation is executed in response to the jackpot count display, (1) to (3) are shown below.
(1) The jackpot round period during the [first jackpot] (for example, the timing immediately after the first stage performance)
(2) The jackpot ending period during the [first jackpot]. (3) The period controlled to the b time-saving state after the [first jackpot] (for example, the first fluctuation of the b time-saving state).

For example, in the case of (1) above, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first jackpot, during the [first jackpot], a first stage presentation may be executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and then a second stage presentation may be executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display.

In other words, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, which is controlled to the b time-saving state after a jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so even though a "second jackpot" has not actually occurred, at the time of the "first jackpot," a second stage presentation may be executed along with the first stage presentation for the jackpot count display.

[Example of a performance when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3]
When the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the player is under control of [Dream RUSH], an example of the presentation that occurs when a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs, which results in a jackpot occurrence count value of 3, will be explained using Figures 282-57 to 282-59.

Figure 282-57 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each of the effects associated with the occurrence of a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 when controlled by [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, and Figures 282-58 and 282-59 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with the occurrence of a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 when controlled by [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2.

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH], the display result is a "time-saving small win" ("10Ra time-saving small win via time-saving small win"), and the second special pattern variation display is executed with a variation pattern of "Super Reach A time-saving small win", a V win occurs in the small win, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and in this jackpot game state the jackpot occurrence count value becomes 3 (mode switching judgment value). Also, the jackpot count display corresponding to the state of jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-58(1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 282-57), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and the second count section in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58(2), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T2 shown in FIG. 282-57), the performance control CPU 120 brings about the reach state by displaying the first decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in a frozen state in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small patterns in a frozen state. That is, the small patterns are continuously displayed in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, without being displayed in a frozen state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58 (3), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a Super Reach (timing T3 shown in FIG. 282-57), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a challenge presentation, and displays the words "BOMB Challenge" and an image resembling a rock on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display of a reduced first decorative pattern, which is a reduced version of the display of the first decorative pattern that was being displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination in the variable presentation determination process (see FIG. 282-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58 (4), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, and displays the words "Explode the rock and get the jackpot!!" and an image resembling a rock on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 282-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, and displays an ally character performing the action of throwing a bomb across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 282-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, and displays an image simulating a bomb exploding across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 282-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a successful presentation of the challenge presentation, and displays an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge (in this example, the word "SUCCESS" and the ally character making a peace sign) across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T7 shown in FIG. 282-57).

Next, at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 282-57), the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result will be a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, while displaying an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge across the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues to be executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-58(8), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 282-59 (9) and (10) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 282-56 (18) and (19) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-59 (11), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 during a small win game is opened, the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period (timing T11 shown in FIG. 282-57), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a big win occurrence display (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has updated the big win occurrence count value from 2 to 3 in the small win end process (see FIG. 282-24), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the words "3 consecutive wins!!" in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and the second count section in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-59 (12), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the big win game state (timing T12 shown in FIG. 282-57), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from the initial state (white letter "V") to the first change state (red letter "V").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-59 (13), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from the first change state (red letter "V") to the second change state (red letter "WIN") (timing T13 shown in FIG. 282-57).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 3") corresponding to the currently being played round in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03330") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-59 (14), the performance control CPU 120 executes a reach section change performance for the reach section, changing the reach section from its initial state (white letters "PREMIUM FEVER") to a changed state (red letters "PREMIUM FEVER") (timing T14 shown in FIG. 282-57). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays two types of ally characters on the left and right sides of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03360").

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-59 (15), the performance control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 (at the timing of T15 shown in FIG. 282-57). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays, on the entire screen of the image display device 5, an reached jackpot display (in this example, the words "PREMIUM FEVER") notifying that the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching determination value (3).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03450").

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-56 (16), when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot play state (timing T16 shown in FIG. 282-57), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end command, displays the word "READY" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" is about to start (the "entry fluctuation" is about to start).

[Example of a normal small win]
When the big win occurrence count value is 2 and the [Dream RUSH] is in control, a small win of a "normal small win" occurs, and a V win cannot be achieved with this small win. An example of the presentation will be explained using Figures 282-60 to 282-62.

Figure 282-60 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to a case where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is in [Dream RUSH], and a V cannot be won with this small hit, and Figures 282-61 and 282-62 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image related to a case where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is in [Dream RUSH], and a V cannot be won with this small hit.

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], the display result is a "normal small win" and the variation pattern is a "Super Reach B normal small win", and the second special pattern variation display is executed, and no V win occurs in the small win, and it is controlled to the normal state. Also, it is assumed that the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 282-60), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and the second count section in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (2), the performance control CPU 120 displays a fall suggestion display 02TM400 (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing an "!" and the word "WARNING") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 282-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (3), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T3 shown in FIG. 282-60), the performance control CPU 120 erases the fall suggestion display 02TM400 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and brings about the reach state by displaying the first decorative pattern (in this example, "2") in a frozen state in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small patterns in a frozen state. That is, the small patterns are continuously displayed in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, without being displayed in a frozen state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (4), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a super reach (timing T4 shown in FIG. 282-60), the performance control CPU 120 executes a fall-inducing performance, and when a reach state is established in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, it temporarily stops a special pattern (in this example, a decorative pattern of the letters "END") in the pattern display area 5C. At this time, the special pattern is displayed in a display mode with high transparency (for example, 50% transparency), which is a display mode that suggests that it has been temporarily stopped.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination made in the during-variation presentation determination process (see FIG. 282-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (5), the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Destroy it!" and an operation prompt display 02TM31B prompting the user to operate the push button 31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 282-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (6), at the timing when the player operates the push button 31B (timing T6 shown in FIG. 282-60), the presentation control CPU 120 stops and displays a special symbol in the symbol display area 5C, indicating that the display result will be a "normal small win." At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T7 shown in FIG. 282-60), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "2 [END] 2") indicating that the display result is a "normal small win" in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "222") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282-61 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T8 shown in FIG. 282-60), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, displays a result image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This result image is an image that includes an indication of the total number of awarded winning balls (in this example, "TOTAL 03000") and an ally character.

In this small win game state, the operating port of the V-judging winning device 87 opens in the first opening pattern, which opens once and has an opening time of 0.04 seconds, making it extremely difficult to win a V, and in this example, the small win game state ends without a V win occurring.

Next, the contents shown in FIG. 282-62(9) are similar to those shown in FIG. 282-49(5), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Fire interval and hold consumption speed]
In this embodiment, the player operates the ball-hitting operation handle 30, which allows the game ball to be launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area. Then, when the game ball hit into this game area enters (wins) the start winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and determining the display result and the variation pattern is executed based on the extracted random number value. In addition, after the reserved information and the number of reserved memories are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the predictive judgment.

Therefore, the more game balls that are launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area per hour, the more opportunities there are for the game ball to enter the starting winning hole, and the more opportunities there are for a lottery to be held to determine whether or not there will be a big win (small win), providing an even more advantageous playing environment for the player.

However, in pachinko machines, it is prohibited to launch more than 101 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. In other words, it is possible to launch up to 100 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. To maximize the number of game balls that are shot into the play area, a configuration is adopted in which 100 game balls are launched from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. When this configuration is adopted, the interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds per game ball (seconds/ball).

In order to generate a start winning by hitting a game ball into the game area, the game ball must enter the start winning hole. This pachinko game machine is configured with a winning ball device (e.g., a variable winning ball device) that forms a start winning hole (e.g., a second starting winning hole) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, so when a game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole, the following steps (1) to (3) must be taken.
(1) Pass through the passing gate → drawing of normal symbols (2) Display result of normal symbols is “normal hit” → variable winning ball device is opened (3) Enter into the variable winning ball device that is now in the open state Furthermore, (X) the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills and numerous obstacle nails that change the direction and speed of the game ball flow, and (Y) if the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes, it is taken into the outlet located at the bottom of the game area, so it is virtually impossible for all of the game balls launched to clear steps (1) to (3) and enter the starting winning hole.

Therefore, if the launch interval per game ball is 0.6 seconds, taking into account the above-mentioned (X) and (Y) and steps (1) to (4), the interval between game balls entering the starting winning hole (hereinafter referred to as the "winning interval") will be 0.6 + α (α > 0) seconds.

Also, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved memory of a special pattern (a variable display whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) that corresponds to the start winning that occurred during the period until the currently executed variable display ends, the variable display of the next reserved memory will start when the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (variable display period) and the pattern determination period corresponding to this variable display have elapsed. Hereinafter, this period, which is the combination of the variable display period and the pattern determination period, until the next reserved memory starts will be referred to as the "reserved consumption period" as appropriate.

<Table showing the relationship between launch interval and hold period>
FIG. 282-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between the firing interval and the reserved consumption period in this embodiment. FIG. 282-63 shows the relationship between the firing interval, the winning interval (hereinafter referred to as [Int01] as appropriate), the variable display period, the pattern determination period, the reserved consumption period (hereinafter referred to as [Int02] as appropriate), and the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02]. In this example, a case will be described in which a player operates the ball-hitting operation handle 30, and 100 game balls are fired from the ball-hitting device in 60 seconds and shot into the right game area, and one of the fired game balls wins the second start winning hole.

((A) When the variable display period is less than 0.2 seconds)
As shown in FIG. 282-63(A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) with an extremely short variable display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 0.05 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.55 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]>[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (A))
Figure 282-64 is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval [Int01], the reserved consumption period [Int02], and the number of reserved memories in the case of (A).

In this example, the value of "α" in the winning interval of 0.6+α seconds is a unique value for each winning interval. For example, the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the first start winning shown in FIG. 282-64 is 0.5 seconds, and the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the next start winning is 1.3 seconds. The same applies to FIG. 282-65 and FIG. 282-66.

As shown in Figure 282-64, in the case of (A), i.e., when [Int01] > [Int02], the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds) is shorter than the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds), so the reserved consumption period ends before a new start winning occurs. Therefore, the second reserved memory count becomes "1" only when a start winning occurs, but is "0" at other times.

((B) When the variable display period is 0.2 seconds)
As shown in FIG. 282-63(B), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.7 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]≦[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (B))
Figure 282-65 is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval [Int01], the reserved consumption period [Int02], and the number of reserved memories in the case of (B).

As shown in Figure 282-65, in the case of (B), that is, when [Int01] ≦ [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds), so a new starting winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the second reserved memory count increases over time (the second reserved memory count is a maximum of "4").

(C) When the variable display period is greater than 0.2 seconds
When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (longer than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 1 second, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 1.5 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]<[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (C))
Figure 282-66 is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval [Int01], the reserved consumption period [Int02], and the number of reserved memories in the case of (C).

As shown in Figure 282-66, in the case of (C), that is, when [Int01] < [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (1.5 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the second reserved memory count increases over time (the second reserved memory count is a maximum of "4").

As shown in FIG. 282-64, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) with an extremely short variable display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, a pachinko game machine with a fast speed of depleting reserved memory can be realized, but since the second reserved memory cannot be stored, it is not possible to execute a pre-reading preview performance that predicts the expected probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending), which leads to a decrease in interest in the pre-reading preview performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 282-66, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (variable display period: 1 second) is primarily selected, it is possible to store the second reserved memory, making it possible to execute a pre-execution preview performance in the variable display, but it is not possible to realize a pachinko game machine that consumes the reserved memory quickly, which leads to a decrease in interest in terms of the speed at which the reserved memory is consumed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 282-65, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is primarily selected, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes the reserved memory while accumulating the second reserved memory, so that it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance in the variable display before execution, and it is possible to increase interest in terms of the look-ahead preview performance and the speed at which the reserved memory is consumed.

In this way, in a pachinko gaming machine capable of firing up to 100 gaming balls from a ball firing device in 60 seconds, by adopting a configuration in which the "ultra-high speed miss" variable pattern, in which the variable display period is 0.2 seconds and the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds, is executed at a high rate when controlled in [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] as in this embodiment, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory while also realizing a pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing pre-reading preview performances and the like in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending).

(Effect 02-1)
As shown in Figures 282-15 and 282-16, as well as Figures 282-18 and 282-19, in the time-saving state, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern, in which the fluctuation display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed is higher than the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern, in which the fluctuation display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed when the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2).

In addition, as shown in Fig. 282-51, Fig. 282-55, Fig. 282-56, Fig. 282-58, and Fig. 282-59, the jackpot count display 02TM300 regarding the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value, and the required number of jackpots display ("X more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") are displayed on the image display device 5.

According to such a gaming machine, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value, the variable display period is more likely to be shorter than the specified period (0.5 seconds for the pattern determination stop period) than when the mode switching judgment value has not been reached, so the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the time-saving state is increased, which is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when controlled to the time-saving state, the player will be highly interested in how many times the jackpot game state is controlled, and will play with a desire to make the jackpot game state continuous. In addition, assuming that such variable display control is performed, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display related to the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching judgment value are displayed, providing performance information that is in line with the player's interests, and further increasing the interest when controlled to the time-saving state.

(Effect 02-2)
As shown in Figures 282-1 (1) and 282-3 (A1), when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an even number pattern and controlled to a "pattern 3R normal jackpot", the game state is controlled to a low base state without transitioning to a time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends; when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7 and controlled to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", the game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends; when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7 and controlled to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends; and when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern 7 and controlled to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state and cases where it is controlled to the time-saving state, based on the variable display executed when controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when controlled to the time-saving state, there are cases where it is controlled to the time-saving state a and cases where it is controlled to the time-saving state b, so that the player can be drawn to the display result of the variable display executed in the normal state.

(Effect 02-3)
As shown in Figures 282-51 to 282-52 and Figures 282-54 to 282-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd pattern (such as "555" or "777") and a 10R jackpot is controlled, the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by at least one step.

With this type of gaming machine, the jackpot occurrence count value is related to the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display, so the player will pay attention to the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display, and since the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state can be increased.

(Effect 02-4)
As shown in Figures 282-54 to 282-56, when a 10R jackpot is controlled based on the display result of the decorative pattern variable display executed while controlled in the normal state becoming an odd number 7 ("777"), the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by one step, and is changed by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time-saving state.

With this type of gaming machine, the player's advantage after the end of the jackpot game state is associated with the number of stages at which the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display change, further increasing interest in the changes in the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display.

(Effect 02-5)
As shown in Figures 282-54 to 282-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number 7 ("777") and the reel is controlled to a 10R jackpot, a 3000 notification effect is executed, which suggests that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, including the prize balls for 10 rounds of the first jackpot (1500 balls) and the prize balls for 10 rounds of the next jackpot that is essentially confirmed (1500 balls).

With this type of gaming machine, when the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, it is suggested that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the 1500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state and the 1500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the b time-saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so the player's sense of anticipation can be increased before the machine is controlled to the b time-saving state.

(Effect 02-6)
As shown in Figure 282-4 (A1), when controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed while controlled to the normal state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 ("pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), when controlled to a 3R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers other than 7 ("333", etc.) ("pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot"), the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] is continued after the end of the jackpot game state.

With such a gaming machine, even if the game has been controlled to the b time-saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, which prevents the b time-saving state from ending, and prevents dissatisfaction among the player. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite the game being controlled to the b time-saving state, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state based on this, by making it possible to control to the b time-saving state, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state regardless of the type of special symbol.

(Effect 02-7)
As shown in Figure 282-4 (A1), when controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed while controlled to the normal state being "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," when controlled to a 10R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 (such as "777") ("Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot"), it is controlled to the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH] which is controlled to the normal state when a normal small jackpot occurs and no V is won.

With this type of gaming machine, when an irregular situation occurs in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner despite being controlled to the b time-saving state, and the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" has been reached, the machine is controlled to the a time-saving state, thereby ensuring the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state regardless of the type of special symbol. Furthermore, by preventing the machine from being controlled to at least the b time-saving state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

(Effect 02-8)
As shown in Fig. 282-55 to Fig. 282-56, the information displayed in the second count section (letter "V", letter "WIN") is displayed larger and more emphasized in the order of information displayed in the first count section (letter "V", letter "WIN") according to the jackpot occurrence count value. Also, it is possible to increase the luminance of the light emitted in the order of the second count section > the first count section according to the jackpot occurrence count value, and it is also possible to shorten the blinking interval (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the manner in which the jackpot count display shows the number of times remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot count display.

(Effect 02-9)
As shown in Fig. 282-18 and Fig. 282-19, when it is controlled in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to execute a variable display of a "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the display result is a "miss" (missing pattern), and the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 282-19, among the variable displays that are executed when controlled in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] and that result in a "miss" display, if the number of reserved memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (including a jackpot via a small jackpot).

(Effect 02-10)
As shown in Figures 282-15 and 282-16, the fluctuation pattern table referenced when controlled in the time-saving state [Dream RUSH] a does not contain a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)."

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between the time-saving state "Dream Rush" and "Super-high-speed Hyper Rush" by the difference in the variable display period, which allows the player to emphasize the continuous occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and to experience the uniqueness of the time-saving state "Super-high-speed Hyper Rush".

(Effect 02-11)
As shown in FIG. 282-17 (1), in the first variable display when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed RUSH] is controlled for the first time, if the display result is a "miss," a variable display of a "entry variable miss (entry performance + ultra-high-speed miss)" variable display pattern with a variable display period of 30.2 seconds is executed.

As shown in Figure 282-18 (1) and Figure 282-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern (30.2 seconds) of "entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + super-high speed miss)" is a fluctuation display period longer than any of the fluctuation patterns executed when the display result is "miss" in the fluctuation display when continuously controlled to the a time-saving state [super-high speed RUSH] (any of the fluctuation patterns of "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds), "super-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds), "Super reach C miss" (10 seconds), and "Super reach B miss" (20 seconds)).

As shown in Figures 282-7 to 282-10, in the fluctuation display of the "entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + ultra-high speed miss)" fluctuation pattern, an accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect and a mode start indication effect are executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern, can indicate to the player that they have entered the a time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-12)
As shown in Figures 282-17 (1), 282-18 (1), and 282-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern of the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds) is such that in the first period from the start of the fluctuation until 30 seconds have elapsed, an accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect and a mode start suggestion effect are executed, and in the second period from this first period until 0.7 seconds have elapsed, a decorative pattern fluctuation display period (0.2 seconds) and a pattern determination stop period (0.5 seconds) are provided to actually notify the display result.

In addition, as shown in Figures 282-28 (2) to (5) and Figures 282-9 (18) to 282-10 (21), the display of the decorative symbols to notify the actual display results during the second period has a presentation style common to the "ultra-fast miss" (0.2 seconds) change pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the "enter fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern suggests to the player that he or she has entered the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and even though the actual fluctuation display period is not as short as the "ultra-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, the player can feel that the fluctuation display period has become extremely short since the first fluctuation display upon entering the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-13)
As shown in FIG. 282-6, an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in which the unit pseudo-fluctuation display period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 282-7 to FIG. 282-10, in the fluctuation pattern of "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), in the first period from the start of the fluctuation to the passage of 30 seconds, a mode start notification performance is executed after the execution of an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance.

According to such a gaming machine, the first period from the start of the fluctuation pattern of the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds) to the lapse of 30 seconds is effectively utilized to enter the a time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER
The variable display period will be shortened when the time-saving state [hyper-high speed HYPER RUSH] is entered, and the user will be informed of the transition to a presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving state [hyper-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-14)
As shown in Figures 282-34 and 282-35, in the central area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a first pre-reading performance is being executed using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display being executed (a fixed icon including the word "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that has not been fixed and stopped).

Also, as shown in Fig. 282-36 and Fig. 282-37, a second pre-reading effect is executed to display a second pre-reading image (an image including a part of a combination of pseudo third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result of the stopped display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 will be a "small time-saving win").

As shown in Figures 282-42 (1) and (2), when the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Also, when the display result is a "small time-saving hit," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win). In addition, the first suggestive effect, which is executed with a relatively high probability, is an effect using decorative symbols and is executed in a symbol display area that is easy for the player to notice, so that the player can feel the shortness of the variable display period in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] while increasing the sense of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-15)
Among the look-ahead notice effects, the symbol giant effect has a higher execution rate than the reserved look-ahead notice effect (not shown). Also, the combined value (ratio) of the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect and the symbol giant effect is higher than the combined value of the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead notice effect (not shown). With this gaming machine, the player can feel the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-16)
As shown in FIG. 282-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern is scrolled from the back of the screen to the front (the third decorative pattern is enlarged and then reduced) unlike the vertical scroll of the screen, and when the "miss" variable display is executed continuously,
(1) The third decorative pattern is displayed (enlarged) in a manner that is larger in size and has a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed variable display,
(2) It is displayed (reduced display) in a smaller size and with a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed changing display, and (3) it is displayed in the same size and with the same transparency as the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed changing display (stopped display).

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a "miss" are executed consecutively, the period during which the third decorative symbol is displayed within the range the player is focusing on can be lengthened, and the transparency of the third decorative symbol changes within the range the player is focusing on, so the high speed of the variable display in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] can be more strongly felt.

(Effect 02-17)
As shown in FIG. 282-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is different from the mode of scrolling up and down on the screen, but is a mode from the back of the screen to the front (the third decorative symbol is enlarged and then reduced). When the variable display that becomes a "miss" is executed continuously, the combination of the third decorative symbol is as follows:
In the above-mentioned (1), the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the immediately preceding variable display,
In the above-mentioned (2), the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
In the above-mentioned (3), the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a big hit via a small hit) is being executed. In addition, at least a part of the third decorative pattern used in the variable display of the previously executed "ultra-high-speed miss" is also used in the variable display of the later executed "ultra-high-speed miss," allowing the player to feel the sense of speed from the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss," while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive presentation information presented with the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss."

(Effect 02-18)
As shown in Fig. 282-28, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area is composed of a number pattern, a base pattern that is added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponds to the outline of the number pattern, and a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and displayed on the entire screen. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 282-26, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state [Dream RUSH], the first decorative pattern is composed of only a number pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative symbols are emphasized in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], making it easier to recognize the decorative symbols when the period of time for the variable display is short, and emphasizing the sense of speed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

(Effect 02-19)
As shown in FIG. 282-18(1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is being controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo-fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 282-11, Figure 282-12 and Figure 282-13, when the change display of the change pattern of "pseudo change miss" (2.8 seconds) is executed, a uniform speed pseudo change performance is executed in which a unit pseudo change (temporary stop and re-change of decorative patterns) is executed four times with a cycle of [change display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + pattern confirmation stop equivalent period 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds].

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a big hit via a small hit) is being executed. Also, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a variable display of a "pseudo variable miss" variable display pattern with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding a situation where a variable display is not being executed as much as possible, and by making the player see as if multiple variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is not lost.

(Effect 02-20)
As shown in FIG. 282-18(1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is being controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the “pseudo fluctuation miss” (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other fluctuation patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to minimize the loss of frequency of the variable display and the sense of speed in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-21)
As shown in FIG. 282-15, when the time-saving state [Dream RUSH] is being controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) is not selected, and the fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation miss" (10 seconds) can be selected.

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clearly identify the characteristics of the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and also makes it possible to avoid situations where the fluctuation display is not being executed as much as possible, even when controlled in the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH].

(Effect 02-22)
As shown in FIG. 282-27, a first logo cycle change performance that changes the first logo display and a second logo cycle change performance that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the change period (0.5 s) in the second logo cycle change performance is shorter than the change period (5 s) in the first logo cycle change performance.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win). Also, in the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], where the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss" variable pattern is executed with a high probability, the manner in which the second logo display changes is frequent, emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period in the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-23)
As shown in FIG. 282-27, a first logo cyclical change performance that changes the first logo display and a second logo cyclical change performance that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display, and the light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display.

With this type of gaming machine, the first logo display can inform the player that the machine is in the a-time-saving state [Dream Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area, while the second logo display can inform the player that the machine is in the a-time-saving state [Super-high-speed Hyper Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area.

(Effect 02-24)
When the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is controlled, the first system display can be displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The first system display is a moving image including the characters "Hit to the right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

In addition, when controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The second system display is a moving image that includes the characters "Right hit" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

The arrow movement period in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the arrow movement period in the first system display is 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the first and second system displays can inform the player of the area into which the gaming ball should be launched, and can further emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-25)
When controlled in the time-saving state [Dream RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed, along with a first rotation corresponding display as a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

In addition, when controlled in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as a second rotation-compatible display as a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

The rotation period of the second rotation-compatible display is set to 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation-compatible display is set to 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display (hold display, active display) rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to the a time-saving state, and when it is controlled to the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH], further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

(Effect 02-26)
As shown in FIG. 282-14, in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when the display result shows a "jackpot" and the display of the "direct jackpot" variation pattern is executed, the jackpot round play associated with the start of the jackpot game state is started without executing the pattern matching performance.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win) is being executed. Also, in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible not to stop displaying the decorative symbols when controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the flow of the game from the variable display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot gaming state is emphasized, giving the impression that the game has been suddenly controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-27)
As shown in FIG. 282-5, in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display is executed that results in a "time-saving small win", a symbol alignment effect is executed, and a combination of third decorative symbols indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small win" is displayed/confirmed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 282-14, when a variable display is executed in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] that results in a "Big Win" (not including a big win via a small win), the symbol alignment effect is not executed, and the third decorative symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big win" (including a big win via a small win) is being executed. Also, in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small win" is executed, the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area, clarifying the flow of the game and directing the player's attention to playing so that the game ball passes through the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when a variable display that results in a "jackpot" is executed, the third decorative pattern is not stopped, so that the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot game state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot game state is emphasized, giving the impression that the player has been suddenly controlled into the jackpot game state.

(Effect 02-28)
As shown in Figures 282-15 (2) and 282-16 (2), in the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH], when the display result becomes a "jackpot", a changing display of the changing pattern of the "Super Reach A Jackpot" is executed, and based on the display result becoming a "jackpot", a success effect including a pattern matching effect is executed, and the combination of first decorative patterns indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small hit" is displayed/confirmed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the a-time-saving state [Dream Rush] and the a-time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush] can be clarified by the difference in the display of the decorative symbols, creating a special feeling when the display result becomes a "jackpot" in the a-time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush].

(Effect 02-29)
In both cases, when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a-time-saving state [Dream Rush] and when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a-time-saving state [Super-high-speed Hyper Rush], the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot pattern (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the period from when the jackpot game state starts until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state can be made even shorter when controlled to the time-saving state a [Dream RUSH] and when controlled to the time-saving state a [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], preventing the player from having to wait until the prize balls are awarded after the display result is announced. In particular, in the time-saving state a [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 can be controlled to the open state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see a continuous flow from the start of the fluctuation to the transition to the jackpot round game.

(Effect 02-30)
The special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and when a jackpot occurs based on the result of the variable display of the second special pattern being a "jackpot" in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] or the b time-saving state [invincible RUSH], it is possible to cause the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light at a timing controlled to the jackpot game state (not shown).

When controlled to the time-saving state, the second special symbol is displayed with high frequency, and the display result is often judged as a "small win," resulting in a big win. However, when controlled to the time-saving state, if the display result is judged as a "big win," players are left feeling disappointed that they would have been better off winning in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot," and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!") is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to direct the player's attention from the image display device 5 to the big winning hole, thereby reducing the disappointment felt by the player at the occurrence of a jackpot due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot."

(Effect 02-31)
As shown in Figures 282-32 and 282-33, a series of second change effects are executed, comprising: (2A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (2B) a maximum action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum action position → initial position; (2C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (2D) a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) in which a second action effect is executed in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display), thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display (normal mode → red mode).

In this type of gaming machine, the second action effect of the second action change effect and the second corresponding display change effect of the second action change effect are executed by linking the movable body 02TM100, an image (ally character 02TM30B) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100, and the corresponding display (pending display, active display), thereby increasing the interest when the corresponding display changes compared to when only a display that simply acts on the corresponding display or a display that changes the corresponding display is executed.

(Effect 02-32)
As shown in Figures 282-29 to 282-31 and 282-58, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character appearing in the super reach A performance (challenge performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who succeeds in a challenge in the success performance in the challenge performance are the same character. Also, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character appearing in the super reach D performance (battle performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who wins against an enemy character in the victory performance in the battle performance are the same character (not shown).

With such a gaming machine, the association between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character displayed on the image display device 5 can create a sense of unity in the series of presentations, while also making the player realize that the ally character is an important character to the player, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the ally character.

(Effect 02-33)
As shown in Figure 282-41 (1), when the changing display of the first special pattern is being executed, the percentage (95%, 90%) of the first or second change performance being executed when the display state of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to a red state is higher than the percentage (20%) of the first or second change performance being executed when the display state of the corresponding display changes to a blue state.

As shown in Figures 282-30 and 282-31, a series of first change effects are executed, which are comprised of: (1A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (1B) an intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the intermediate action position to the initial position; (1C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) in which a first action effect is executed in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

With such a gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the presentation that changes the display mode of the corresponding display, and it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first action presentation to be executed when the movable body 02TM100 is operated.

(Effect 02-34)
As shown in Fig. 282-30 and Fig. 282-31, in the first change presentation, a first corresponding display change presentation (first action change presentation) is executed to change the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (1D) first action presentation. Also, as shown in Fig. 282-32 and Fig. 282-33, in the second change presentation, a second corresponding display change presentation (second action change presentation) is executed to change the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (2D) second action presentation.

As shown in FIG. 282-41 (1), when the display state of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to a red state while the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed, the rate at which the second change performance is executed (50% to 80%) is higher than the rate at which the first change performance is executed (15% to 40%).

This type of gaming machine can diversify the action effects in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, and can draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. In addition, by executing an action effect in which a highly visible ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the corresponding display will change to a more promising form.

(Effect 02-35)
As shown in FIG. 282-30 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the intermediate performance position to the initial position, the first change performance (1C) character appearance performance is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 282-32 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the maximum presentation position to the initial position, the second transformation presentation (2C) character appearance presentation is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this type of gaming machine, the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B can be emphasized, and the coordination between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B can accentuate the presentation effect of the ally character.

(Effect 02-36)
As shown in Figures 282-30 and 282-31, (1A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (1B) an intermediate action effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate effect position → initial position, (1C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) is executed in which a first action effect is executed in which the ally character throws a bomb at the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

As shown in Figs. 282-32 and 282-33, (2A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (2B) a maximum movement effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position to the initial position, (2C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (2D) a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) is executed in which a second action effect is executed in which the ally character throws three bombs at the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

With such a gaming machine, the change precursor effect can make the player look forward to the movement of the movable body 02TM100 and the appearance of an ally character. It can also make the player interested in whether the first or second action effect will be executed.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, (i) the display result of the variable display is "jackpot", based on which the display result is "jackpot", and (ii) the display result of the variable display is "small hit", based on which the display result is "small hit", based on which the display state is controlled to a small hit, based on which the game medium can enter the V winning area in the V winning device, and based on the game medium entering the V winning area, based on which the game medium enters the V winning area, based on which the game state is controlled to a jackpot. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is a gaming machine having a pattern of "1 type + 2 type mixed machine" having a pattern of "1 type jackpot" and "2 type jackpot" as a pattern for controlling to a jackpot gaming state (i + ii), but it is not limited to such a form, and various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to gaming machines having different playability.

For example, the presentation shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a [V-type high probability machine]. In a [V-type high probability machine], a normal state, which is a low probability state, and a high probability state (a gaming state in which high probability control is executed) are provided. In addition, high probability state A and high probability state B are provided. As jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which high probability control is not executed, an "a high probability jackpot" in which high probability control is executed, and a "b high probability jackpot" in which high probability control is executed are provided. Different tables are referenced when determining the jackpot type depending on the type of high probability state.

In the a probability change state, the next jackpot is confirmed, but there is a 75% chance that it will be a "probability change jackpot" and a 25% chance that it will be a "normal jackpot." On the other hand, in the b probability change state, the next jackpot is confirmed, and there is a 100% chance that it will be a "probability change jackpot." For example, in the a probability change state, there is a 75% chance that it will be a "10R probability change jackpot" and a 25% chance that it will be a "normal jackpot with no balls," and in the b probability change state, there is a 100% chance that it will be a "10R probability change jackpot." In other words, in the a time-saving state, the next jackpot is confirmed, but there is a 75% chance that prize balls are actually awarded and the time-saving state continues after the jackpot, while in the b time-saving state, the next jackpot is confirmed, there is a 100% chance that prize balls are actually awarded and the time-saving state continues after the jackpot.

For example, the following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state. Each type of jackpot has different contents regarding whether or not time-saving control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state and whether or not special variable control (a special variable control, b special variable control) is performed.
(X1) "3R normal jackpot" (40%)
The time-saving control is not executed, and the probability of winning is not executed either (X2) "10Ra probability of winning" (40%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a-variable control is also executed (X3) "10Rb variable jackpot" (20%)
Time-saving control is executed, and b-variable control is also executed.

a. The following types of jackpots are provided as jackpot types based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state.
(Y1) "Normal jackpot without balls" (25%)
The time-saving control is not executed, and the probability of winning is not executed either (Y2) "10Ra probability of winning" (75%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a-variable control is also executed.

b. The types of jackpots based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state are as follows:
(Z1) "10Ra special jackpot" (100%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a-variable control is also executed.

In such a [V-type variable-type] gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display was displayed during a specified period during the jackpot game state or the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the jackpot count display may be displayed during a period different from the specified period during the jackpot game state or the time-saving state.

For example, the jackpot count display may be displayed during the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot game state, or during the period after the game develops into a super reach in the time-saving state.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled to the b time-saving state, an example is shown in which a variation display of a "high-speed normal small win" variation pattern, which has a common presentation mode with the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss", is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled to the b time-saving state, a variation display of a variation pattern of a presentation mode different from the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss" may be executed.

For example, when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled in the b time-saving state, a "long normal small win" variation pattern may be set. The "long normal small win" variation pattern may have a variation display period of 10,000 ms, and may notify the occurrence of a "normal small win" in the b time-saving state by displaying a special pattern S (a decorative pattern including the letters "SAFE") stationarily in the pattern display area 5C of the image display device 5. By notifying the occurrence of a normal small win in the b time-saving state, it is possible to give the player a sense of gain that the game state in which the normal small win occurred was better off being the b time-saving state rather than the a time-saving state, which would fall into the normal state, and the special feeling of the b time-saving state can be further enhanced.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which when the display state of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) is changed to the blue state or the red state, either the first change presentation or the second change presentation can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a configuration may be adopted in which when the display state of the corresponding display is changed to the blue state or the red state, either the first change presentation or the second change presentation can be used.

For example, when the first change performance is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to a blue state at a rate of 100%, and when the second change performance is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to a red state at a rate of 100%. Also, even when the first change performance is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed, and even when the second change performance is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", an example is shown in which a small win game state is configured so that a V win is extremely difficult, and the game state is dropped to the normal state without being controlled to the big win game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the time-saving state is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", a small win game state may be configured so that a V win is easy, and the game state may be controlled to the big win game state and then dropped to the normal state.

For example, even in the case of a "normal small win", the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is configured to open in the second opening pattern, generating a big win and awarding 10 rounds' worth of prize balls (1,500 balls). However, in this case of a "normal small win", the game is controlled to the normal state after the big win game state ends. With this configuration, prize balls can be awarded even in the case of a normal small win, reducing the disappointment felt by the player when the game is controlled to the normal state after the big win game state.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded at the time of the first hit, and 1500 prize balls are also awarded for a jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. If a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls may be awarded at the time of the first hit, and fewer than 1500 prize balls may be awarded for a jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state.

For example, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls will be awarded at the time of the first hit, and 1000 prize balls will be awarded for any jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state. In this case, a 2500 notification may be executed at the time of the first hit to notify the player that a total of 2500 (1500 + 1000) prize balls will be awarded.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases when the display size of the third decorative pattern is a common display size in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance, but the present invention is not limited to this form. In the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance, the display size of the third decorative pattern may be a different display size and the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation may be increased.

For example, in an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation, as the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases, the display size of the third decorative pattern may become larger, or the display size of the third decorative pattern may become smaller.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is hidden, while the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be hidden, and the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r may also be hidden.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is displayed only when controlled to [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], but the present invention is not limited to this example, and the "ultra-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern may be displayed when controlled to a presentation mode other than [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation display of the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern can be executed when controlled by [Dream Rush]. In this case, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [Dream Rush] is lower than the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [ultra-fast Hyper Rush].

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which during a specified period when controlled by [Dream Rush], the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern can be executed, and during a period different from the specified period when controlled by [Dream Rush], the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern cannot be executed.

For example, during the period from the 1st to the 50th fluctuation when controlled by [Dream Rush], it is possible to display the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss", but during the period from the 51st fluctuation onwards when controlled by [Dream Rush], it is not possible to display the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss".

(10) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the mode switching determination value was set to 3, but this is not limited to the above, and the mode switching determination value may be set to a value other than 3.

For example, the mode switching determination value may be set to 5, which is greater than 3, or the mode switching determination value may be set to 2, which is less than 3.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the pattern determination period of the jackpot pattern (0.5 seconds) in both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], but the present invention is not limited to this form. In both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the execution period of the fanfare effect may be longer than the pattern determination period of the jackpot pattern.

For example, in both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time-saving state [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time-saving state [Super high-speed Hyper Rush], the period during which the jackpot symbol is determined is set to 0.5 seconds and the period during which the fanfare effect is executed is set to 1.0 seconds, so that the period during which the fanfare effect is executed is longer than the period during which the jackpot symbol is determined.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, the number of reserved memories is at least 1 and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is about 90% (900/997), and the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected is about 10% (97/997), so that the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is much higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected. However, this is not limiting, and the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected does not have to be much higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected.

For example, when controlled in time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is 25%, and the rates at which fluctuation patterns A to D are selected as other fluctuation patterns are each around 20% and may be less than 25% (totaling 100%).

The characteristic part 02TM described above includes the following configurations:

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5),
In the special state (time-saving state), when the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the time that the number of times that the time that the number of times that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time ... is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the
The performance execution means is capable of displaying on the display means, when the number of times in the special state does not exceed the predetermined number of times, a specific display (jackpot count display 02TM300, "X more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") regarding the number of times of control of the advantageous state until the number of times exceeds the predetermined number of times.

With such a gaming machine, when the number of times the game is continuously controlled to the advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number, the variable display period becomes shorter than the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number, so the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the special state is increased, resulting in a more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, when the game machine is controlled to a special state, the player will have a high interest in how many times the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and will play with a strong desire to maintain the advantageous state. In addition, assuming that such control of the variable display is performed, a specific display is displayed regarding the number of times the game machine is continuously controlled to the advantageous state until the number of times the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state exceeds the predetermined number, thereby providing performance information that is in line with the player's interests, and making the game even more exciting when the game machine is controlled to the special state.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine according to the first embodiment,
The special states (time-saving states) include a first special state (a time-saving state) and a second special state (b time-saving state: invincible RUSH) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state.
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific display result (a combination of decoration patterns that becomes a jackpot pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific display results include a first specific display result (a combination of even number symbols), a second specific display result different from the first specific display result (a combination of odd number symbols excluding 7), and a third specific display result different from both the first specific display result and the second specific display result (a combination of 7 symbols),
The state control means includes:
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (3R pattern normal jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the first specific display result, the game is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends (the game is controlled to the low base state without transitioning to the time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the second specific display result, the game can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result, the game can be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the b time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to a special state after the advantageous state ends and cases where it is controlled to a special state, based on the variable display executed when controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when controlled to a special state, there are cases where it is controlled to a first special state and cases where it is controlled to a second special state, so that the player can be drawn to the display result of the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention,
The specific display can be displayed on the display means in the special state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state) and the advantageous state,
The performance execution means includes:
When the number of times is updated, the mode of the specific display can be changed in stages (the jackpot count display 02TM300 can be updated in stages from the first stage to the third stage, and the remaining number of times of "X times left until the super-high speed HYPER RUSH" can be updated).
A gaming machine characterized in that when the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becomes the second specific display result or the third specific display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols), the mode of the specific display can be changed at least a predetermined level (one level) when the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot).

With this type of gaming machine, the number of times the game has been controlled to a consecutive advantageous state is related to the state of the specific display, so the player will pay attention to the state of the specific display, and because the state of the specific display changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state can be increased.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention,
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state being the third specific display result (7 symbols), the proportion of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state being the second specific display result (odd number symbols excluding 7) (in the a time-saving state, the normal state is controlled when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, but in the b time-saving state, the normal state is not controlled even when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, so the next big win is almost certain).
When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols line-up), the effect execution means is capable of changing the mode of the specific display by more steps than the predetermined steps (updating by one step during a jackpot game state due to the 7 symbols line-up, and updating by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time-saving state).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the degree of advantage the player has after the advantageous state ends is associated with the number of stages at which the specific display changes, further increasing the player's interest in the changes in the specific display.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4,
When the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols lined up), it is possible to award a predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening) in the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is controlled based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-saving state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state, it is possible to award the predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening) in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing a grant effect (a 3000 notification effect displaying the letters "3000 FEVER") suggesting that the specified game value will be awarded multiple times (1500 x 2 times) when controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result.

This type of gaming machine suggests that when the game machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, the game value to be awarded will include the predetermined game value to be awarded in that advantageous state and the predetermined game value to be awarded in the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state controlled after the advantageous state ends, so that the player's anticipation can be increased before the game machine is controlled to the special state.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern),
The ornamental identification information variably displaying means is capable of variably displaying the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to the variably displaying of the special identification information,
As the special identification information, there are a first special identification information (first special pattern) and a second special identification information (second special pattern),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the second special pattern),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-saving state (high base state), the start condition for the second special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the first special pattern),
When the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols line-up), when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (3R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result (odd number symbols line-up other than 7), the state control means is capable of controlling to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (the b time-saving state (invincible RUSH) can be continued).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, even if the special state has been controlled, it is possible to prevent the special state from ending due to the execution of the variable display of the first special identification information, thereby preventing dissatisfaction among the player. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite the control being controlled to the second special state, and the game is controlled to an advantageous state based on this, by making it possible to control to the second special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of expectation that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 6,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern),
The ornamental identification information variably displaying means is capable of variably displaying the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to the variably displaying of the special identification information,
As the special identification information, there are a first special identification information (first special pattern) and a second special identification information (second special pattern),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the second special pattern),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-saving state (high base state), the start condition for the second special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the first special pattern),
a state control means for controlling the game machine to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols line-up), and when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-saving state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result or the third specific display result (7 odd symbols line-up), after the advantageous state ends, the game machine is characterized in that the state control means is capable of controlling the game machine to the first special state (a time-saving state: time-saving state which is controlled to the normal state when a normal small win occurs and no V is won) after the advantageous state ends.

With such a gaming machine, when an irregular situation occurs in which the first special identification information is variable displayed despite being controlled to the second special state, and the player is controlled to an advantageous state based on the second or third specific display result, by making it possible to control to at least the first special state, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information. Furthermore, by not controlling to at least the second special state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

The gaming machine of the eighth means comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
The specific display (jackpot count display) can be displayed on the display means in a first emphasis mode (a mode in which only the first count portion is emphasized) and a second emphasis mode (a mode in which the first count portion and the second count portion are emphasized) that is emphasized more than the first emphasis mode (having higher visibility than the first emphasis mode),
If the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (2),
When the number of times does not exceed a first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the first highlighted manner,
When the number of times exceeds the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the second emphasis mode.

With this type of gaming machine, the appearance of the special display can indicate the number of times remaining until the number of times the game has been controlled to be in an advantageous state in succession exceeds a predetermined number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special display.

The gaming machine of the 9th means comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled to the special state, if the display result is a specified display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of the means 10 includes:
The gaming machine according to the 9th aspect of the present invention,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (a time-saving state in the Dream RUSH mode) after the advantageous state ends,
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) when the number of times the advantageous state has been continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number (2),
In the predetermined state (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2: in the time-saving state of the Dream RUSH mode), the special variable display is not executed (the loss fluctuation pattern determination table does not include a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast loss (0.2 seconds)").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between a predetermined state and a special state by the difference in the variable display period, allowing the player to place emphasis on the consecutive occurrence of advantageous states and to experience the uniqueness of the special state.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the method of claim 10,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance is provided.
The state control means is configured to control the special state (jackpot occurrence count value=3-10000: ultra-high speed HYPER) after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when the predetermined state (jackpot occurrence count value=1-2: a time-saving state of the Dream RUSH mode) is ended.
It can be controlled to a time-saving state in RUSH mode,
When the variable display means is controlled to the special state based on the variable display executed when it is controlled to the predetermined state, it is capable of executing a special variable display (a variable display of a variable display pattern of "entry variable miss (entry performance + ultra-high speed miss)" having a variable display period longer than that of the special variable display, as a first variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (missing pattern) and having a variable display period of 30.2 seconds,
The variable display period of the special variable display is longer than the variable display period (any of the variable patterns of pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds), ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds), Super Reach C miss (10 seconds), and Super Reach B miss (20 seconds)) of the first variable display executed when the player is again controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed while the player is controlled to the special state (when the time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode a continues) and the display result becomes the predetermined display result (miss pattern);
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect (accelerated pseudo-variation effect, mode start suggestion effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the special state in response to the special variable display (missed entry variation (30.2 seconds)).

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display, which has a longer variable display period than the special variable display, can indicate to the player that a special state has been entered.

The gaming machine of means 12 includes:
The gaming machine according to the means 11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect during a first period (from the start of variation to 30 seconds from the start of variation) of a period including the variable display period of the special variable display (variable display period of 30.2 seconds) and the fixed period from the end of the special variable display to the start of the next variable display (pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds), and is capable of displaying the predetermined display result (losing pattern) in a manner common to the special variable display (variably displaying decorative patterns in a manner common to the variable pattern of an ultra-high-speed losing pattern (0.2 seconds)) during a second period (30 seconds from the start of variation to 30.2 seconds from the start of variation (remaining variable display period of 0.2 seconds) + pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds) after the first period.

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display indicates to the player that a special state has been entered, and even though the actual variable display period is not as short as the special variable display, the player can feel that the variable display period has become extremely short since the first variable display after entering the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the means 12,
A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
The ornament identification information variable display means is
During the variable display period of the decoration identification information, a re-variable display (unit pseudo-variation) can be executed in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed,
In the first period, it is possible to execute a plurality of re-variable displays (unit pseudo-variations), and it is possible to make the variable display period of the subsequent re-variable display shorter than the variable display period of the previous re-variable display (it is possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variable performance in which the variable display equivalent period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds);
The performance execution means notifies the user that a performance mode corresponding to the special state will be entered during the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) (the mode start notification performance can be executed after the execution of the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the first period can be effectively used to let the player know that the variable display period will become shorter when a special state is entered, and to notify the player that a transition to a presentation mode corresponding to the special state will occur.

The gaming machine of means 14 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A reserved storage means (RAM 102) for storing information on variable display that is not being executed as reserved storage;
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes a jackpot determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result and which are executed when controlled to the special state, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
The display area of the display means includes a first display area (a central area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of decorative patterns) and a second display area (an area on the screen edge side excluding the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) which is closer to the periphery of the screen than the first display area and is narrower than the first display area;
The performance execution means is capable of executing, on the display means, a suggestion performance (a first look-ahead performance, a second look-ahead performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, with the reserved memory as the target, during a variable display prior to the reserved memory;
The suggestive performance includes a first suggestive performance (a first pre-reading performance in which a fixed icon including the character "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that is not fixed and stopped) that is executed in the first display area and uses decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a second suggestive performance that is different from the first suggestive performance and is executed in the second display area (a second pre-reading performance in which a second pre-reading image including an image of seven patterns aligned is displayed);
The execution rate of the first suggestion effect is higher than the execution rate of the second suggestion effect (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the special state, if the display result is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. In addition, the first suggestion effect, which is executed at a relatively high rate, is an effect that uses decorative identification information and is executed in the first display area that is likely to attract the player's attention, so that the player can feel the shortness of the variable display period in the special state while increasing the sense of expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 15 comprises:
A gaming machine according to a means 14,
There are multiple types of the first suggestion performance (first look-ahead performance, giant pattern performance), and there are multiple types of the second suggestion performance (second look-ahead performance, reserved look-ahead performance),
A gaming machine characterized in that the sum of the execution rates of all types of the first suggestive effects (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect + the execution rate of the giant symbol effect) is higher than the sum of the execution rates of all types of the second suggestive effects (the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect + the execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect), or the execution rate of any type of the first suggestive effect (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect) is higher than the execution rate of any type of the second suggestive effect (the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect).

This type of gaming machine allows players to experience the shortness of the variable display period in a special state.

The gaming machine of means 16 includes:
The gaming machine according to the first or second aspect of the present invention,
In the special state (super-fast HYPER RUSH mode a time-saving state),
The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is different from the manner in which the decoration identification information scrolls up and down on the screen, and is a manner in which the decoration identification information moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the decorative pattern expands suddenly),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when variable displays resulting in the specified display result (losing pattern) are executed consecutively, decorative identification information corresponding to a subsequent variable display is displayed in a larger size and with a higher transparency than the decorative identification information stopped corresponding to a previous variable display, and then the size of the decorative identification information becomes smaller.

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a predetermined display result are executed in succession, the period during which the decorative identification information is displayed within the range that the player is focusing on can be extended, and the transparency of the decorative identification information changes within the range that the player is focusing on, making the high speed of the variable display in the special state more apparent.

The gaming machine of means 17 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result and which are executed when controlled to the special state, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
When the special variable display is executed continuously (when the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is continuous), it is possible to execute the special variable display using the decoration identification information used for the previous special variable display and the decoration identification information which becomes the display result of the special variable display (the combination of decorative patterns which is fixed and stopped in the previous ultra-high-speed miss variation expands once as it is and becomes more transparent when the subsequent ultra-high-speed miss variation starts, and then when the combination of decorative patterns shrinks, the combination of decorative patterns changes to the combination of decorative patterns which is fixed and stopped in the ultra-high-speed miss variation).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. In addition, the decoration identification information used for a special variable display executed earlier is also used for a special variable display executed later, allowing the player to experience a sense of speed through the special variable display while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive presentation information presented with the special variable display.

The gaming machine of means 18 comprises:
The gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment,
When the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), it is capable of displaying, in response to the stopped decoration identification information (decorative pattern), first additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a base pattern that is added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponds to the contour of the number pattern) that is added to the background side of the decoration identification information, and second additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and is displayed on the entire screen) that emphasizes the decoration identification information and is displayed outside the area of the first additional information,
When the game is controlled to a predetermined state (time-saving state a in the Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state, at least the second additional information is not displayed in response to the stopped decoration identification information (neither the pedestal pattern nor the light ray effect display is displayed, or the pedestal pattern is displayed while the light ray effect display is not displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative identification information is more emphasized in the special state, making it easier to recognize the decorative identification information when the variable display period is short, and emphasizing the sense of speed when the decorative identification information is variably displayed.

The gaming machine of means 19 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
a reserved memory means (RAM 102) for storing the number of variable displays for which a starting condition (a winning entry into a starting winning hole) has been established but a starting condition (the variable display of a special symbol has not been executed and the game is not controlled to either a big win game state or a small win game state) has not been established as a reserved memory number;
A display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result when the device is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) and the reserved memory number is not 0, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result and which are executed when the number of reserved memories is not 0 under the control of the special state, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
When the device is controlled to the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed as a variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (when the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern having a longer variable display period than the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern);
This gaming machine is characterized in that in the special variable display, special control (constant speed pseudo-variable presentation) is possible in which variable display of decorative identification information (temporary stopping and re-variation of decorative patterns) is executed multiple times, the variable display period being the same as the variable display period of the decorative identification information when the special variable display is executed (a period of [variable display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + pattern confirmation stop equivalent period 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds]).

In this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. Also, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding as much as possible a situation in which a variable display is not being executed, and by making it appear to the player as if multiple special variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the special state is not lost.

The gaming machine of the means 20 includes:
The gaming machine of means 19,
Among the variable displays whose display result becomes the predetermined display result and which are executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 under the control of the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special variable display is executed at the highest rate (when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variation patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to minimize the loss of frequency and speed of variable display in special states.

The gaming machine of means 21 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the invention as defined in claim 19 or 20,
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the special control is controlled to a predetermined state (a time-saving state in the Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state, the special control is not executed, and a predetermined variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed (the "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern is not selected, and the "long variable miss (10 seconds)" variable pattern can be selected).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clarify the characteristics of the special variable display in a special state, and to avoid, as much as possible, a situation in which the variable display is not being executed even when the machine is controlled to a specified state.

The gaming machine of means 22 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a CPU 120 for controlling the performance) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A display means (image display device 5),
The special states include a first special state (a time-saving state in the Dream Rush mode) and a second special state (a time-saving state in the ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state.
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the second special state, a variable display in which a display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which a variable display period is shorter than a fixed period from the end of a variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of a "super high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which a variable display period is shorter than a pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
a rate at which a variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than a predetermined period (1 second) is higher than a rate at which a variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second);
The performance execution means includes:
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display (a first logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change effect (a first logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed;
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display (a second logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change effect (a second logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The period during which the state of the second special display changes in the second specific change performance is shorter than the period during which the state of the first special display changes in the first specific change performance (the period during which the state of the second special display changes in the second logo cycle change performance (0.5 s) is shorter than the period during which the state of the first special display changes in the first logo cycle change performance (5 s)).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, the period controlled to the special state has a high probability of selecting an extremely short variable display period when the display result is a predetermined display result, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Also, in the second special state, in which the special variable display is executed with a high probability, the cycle in which the state of the second special display changes is short, so that the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state can be emphasized.

The gaming machine of means 23 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the means 22,
A game area (2) into which a game medium is shot,
The game area includes a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area),
When the game is controlled to the normal state (low base state), it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the first game area than into the second game area (the start condition for the special symbol variation display is more likely to be satisfied),
When the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) is controlled, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the second game area than into the first game area (the start condition for the special symbol variation display is more likely to be established),
In the first specific change performance, the state of the first special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display),
In the second specific change presentation, the state of the second special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, the first special display can notify the player that the machine is in the first special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium ball is the second gaming area, and the second special display can notify the player that the machine is in the second special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium is the second gaming area.

The gaming machine of means 24 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 22 or 23,
A game area (2) into which a game medium is shot,
The game area includes a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area),
When the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) is controlled, an instruction display (a first system display and a second system display including the characters "right hit" and a rightward arrow) instructing the player to launch the game medium into the second game area can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5);
The manner of the instruction display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the right-facing arrow periodically moves from left to right),
The rate of change of the state of the instruction display in the second special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is greater than the rate of change of the state of the instruction display in the first special state (time-saving state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) (the movement period of the arrow in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the movement period of the arrow in the first system display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the instruction display notifies the player of the area into which the gaming medium should be fired, and further emphasizes the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 25 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 22 to 24,
a storage means (RAM 102) for storing information (reserved information) regarding a variable display for which a start condition is satisfied but a start condition is not satisfied, and information (information regarding a variable display being executed) regarding a variable display for which a start condition is satisfied;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A corresponding display (a reserved display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
When the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) is controlled, it is possible to rotate the corresponding display,
When the second special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, the rotation speed of the corresponding display is faster than when the first special state (time-saving state a of DREAM RUSH mode) is controlled (the rotation period of the second rotation corresponding display is 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation corresponding display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to a special state, and when it is controlled to the second special state, the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the first special state, further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

The gaming machine of means 26 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (a jackpot symbol), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of a "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display results executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) are the predetermined display results, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
The performance execution means includes:
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed, the display result of which becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decoration identification information (a "symbol matching performance" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
In the special state (time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible not to stop displaying the decorative identification information (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start a round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing the "symbol matching performance").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the special state, if the display result is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. Also, in the special state, it is possible not to stop displaying the decorative identification information when controlled to an advantageous state, so that the flow of play from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the player has been suddenly controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 27 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (a jackpot symbol), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of the special pattern) becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it is possible to control to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when the game medium is controlled to the special state,
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of a "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display results are the predetermined display results and which are executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
The performance execution means includes:
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed, the display result of which becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decoration identification information (a "symbol matching performance" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special state (time-saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode a), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the special display result (small win symbol), it is possible to statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a big win via a small win, it is possible to execute a "pattern alignment presentation"), and when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to not statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a big win symbol, it is possible to start a round display accompanying the start of the big win game state without executing a "pattern alignment presentation").

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result, during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. Also, in the special state, when a variable display whose display result is a special display result is executed, the decorative identification information is frozen to clarify the flow of the game and to direct the player's attention to playing the game so that the gaming medium passes through the specific area. On the other hand, when a variable display whose display result is a specific display result is executed, the decorative identification information is not frozen to not interrupt the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state, and the sense of speed of the variable display that is the trigger for the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly controlled.

The gaming machine of means 28 comprises:
The gaming machine according to the means 26 or 27,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (a time-saving state in the Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state (a time-saving state in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode),
In the predetermined state, when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decorative identification information (it is possible to execute a "symbol matching performance" when the symbol jackpot occurs).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the specified state and the special state can be clarified by the difference in the display of the decorative identification information, creating a sense of exclusivity when the display result in the special state becomes a specific display result.

The gaming machine of means 29 includes:
29. A gaming machine according to claim 28,
The device is provided with a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first state,
The execution rate of a variable display executed in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (losing pattern) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period (variable display of an "ultra-high-speed loss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds) is higher than the execution rate of a variable display executed in the predetermined state (time-saving state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (losing pattern) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period;
After the start performance corresponding to the start of the advantageous state ends, the special variable means is controlled to the second state (the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state after the fanfare performance ends),
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the predetermined state and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the special state, the execution period of the start effect is shorter than the determination period of the specific display result (when a jackpot occurs based on a variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the Dream RUSH mode and when a jackpot occurs based on a variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode, in either case, the execution period of the fanfare effect is shorter than the pattern determination period of the jackpot pattern).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, the period from when the advantageous state begins until the special variable means is controlled to the second state can be made even shorter when controlled to a predetermined state and when controlled to a special state, preventing the player from having to wait until the game value is awarded after the display result is notified. In particular, in the special state, control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so that the special variable means can be controlled to the second state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see a continuous flow from when the variable display begins until the game value is awarded in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 30 includes:
29. A gaming machine according to any one of means 26 to 29,
a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first state;
A special light emitting means (a light emitting device provided around the special variable winning ball device 7 or at the opening and closing part) is provided corresponding to the position of the special variable means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it is possible to control to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when the game medium is controlled to the special state,
When the vehicle is controlled to the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), the vehicle is controlled to the special state more frequently than when the vehicle is controlled to the normal state (low base state),
The performance execution means includes:
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special light-emitting means is caused to emit light (the light-emitting device of the special variable winning ball device 7 is caused to emit light) when the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result (when a symbol jackpot occurs) and when the display result is controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area while controlled to the special state (when a jackpot via small jackpot occurs), and when the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result, in response to the special variable means being controlled to the second state, an instruction display (an indication of "Aim at the attacker!!") that instructs the special variable means to fire the game medium can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).

With such a gaming machine, when controlled to a special state, the special light emitting means emits light and the instruction display is displayed in either the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a special state or the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result, so that the player is unlikely to notice that the machine has been controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result. In other words, even though the machine is controlled to a special state and is in a situation where it is easy to be controlled to an advantageous state via a special state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed that an advantageous state based on a specific display result, which can occur with the same probability even in a normal state, has occurred.

The gaming machine of means 31 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
Movable parts (movable body 02TM100),
A display means (image display device 5);
A storage means (RAM 102) for storing information related to variable display;
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
Corresponding information corresponding to the variable display (a reserved display corresponding to a variable display (reserved memory) that is not being executed, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5);
The display modes of the corresponding display include a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (red mode) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
The performance execution means includes:
A state change effect is executed in which the corresponding display is changed from the first state to the second state based on a determination result of the determination means,
It is possible to execute a movable role performance (maximum movement performance) in which the movable role is moved from a first position (initial position) to a second position (maximum performance position);
After the movable role performance is performed, a related display (the same ally character 02TM30B as the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the movable role can be displayed on the display means in response to moving the movable role from the second position to the first position;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is capable of executing an action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display (a second action change effect in which the ally character 02TM30C throws three bombs at a pending display or an active display), and also executing a behavior change effect targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect (a second corresponding display change effect in which a pending display or an active display that is hit by a bomb changes from a normal behavior to a red behavior).

With this type of gaming machine, the action effects and state change effects are executed by linking the movable role, the related display associated with the movable role, and the corresponding display, which can increase the interest when the corresponding display changes compared to when only effects that act on the corresponding display or effects that change the corresponding display are executed.

The gaming machine of the means 32 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 31,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape that imitates a specific character (ally character),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character,
The performance execution means includes:
A battle performance in which the specific character fights (a battle performance in which a friendly character fights an enemy character) can be executed on the display means (image display device 5);
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the battle presentation is executed, a victory presentation in which the specific character wins (a victory presentation in which a friendly character wins against an enemy character) can be executed when the advantageous state is controlled.

With this type of gaming machine, the association between the movable parts and the specific character displayed on the display means can create a sense of unity in the series of performances, and the player can be made to recognize that the specific character is an important character, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the specific character.

The gaming machine of means 33 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 31 or 32,
As a display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display), there is a predetermined mode (blue mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode (normal mode) and a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the performance change performance, a first performance change performance (a change from a normal performance to a blue performance) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first performance to the predetermined performance, and a second performance change performance (a change from a normal performance to a red performance) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first performance to the second performance,
the rate at which the action effect (the first action effect or the second action effect in which an ally character throws a bomb toward a pending display or an active display) targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the second aspect change effect is executed when the second aspect change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the action effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the first aspect change effect is executed when the first aspect change effect is executed;
The performance execution means includes:
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) can be moved from the first position (initial position) to a predetermined position (intermediate performance position) between the first position and the second position (maximum performance position),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to display the related display (ally character 02TM30B) in response to moving the movable role object from the specified position to the first position, execute the action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display, and execute the first state change effect targeting the corresponding display that is the subject of the action effect.

This type of gaming machine can diversify the appearance change presentation, and can also create a sense of anticipation for the action presentation to be performed when the movable role piece is activated.

The gaming machine of means 34 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 33,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing, as the effect, a first effect (a first effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward a pending display or an active display) and a second effect having higher visibility than the first effect (a second effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward a pending display or an active display);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second mode change performance is executed, the rate at which the second action performance is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the second mode change performance is higher than the rate at which the second action performance is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the first mode change performance is executed when the first mode change performance is executed.

This type of gaming machine can diversify the action effects and draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. In addition, by executing an action effect with high visibility, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the corresponding display will change to a more promising state.

The gaming machine of means 35 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 34,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating the face of the specific character (the ally character of the movable body 02TM100),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the face of the specific character,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of continuously displaying the related display (ally character 02TM30B) on the display means (image display device 5) when the movable reel is moving from the second position (maximum performance position) to the first position (initial position) after the movable reel performance is executed, and when the movable reel has moved to the first position (initial position).

This type of gaming machine can emphasize the relationship between the movable parts and the related displays, and by linking the movable parts with the related displays, it is possible to highlight the dramatic effects of specific characters.

The gaming machine of means 36 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 35,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
As the action effect, a first action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward a reserved display or an active display) and a second action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward a reserved display or an active display) having higher visibility than the first action effect can be executed,
After executing a suggestion performance (a change precursor performance) that suggests that the action performance will be executed, the movable role performance (intermediate action performance) is executed, and the first action performance can be executed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, after executing the suggestion performance, the movable role performance (maximum movement performance) is executed, and the second action performance is executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the suggestive effects can make the player look forward to the movement of the movable role piece and the appearance of a specific character. It can also make the player interested in whether the first or second action effect will be executed.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Audio control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 50 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
A display means capable of displaying a performance video;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a notification part in which the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
An introduction part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is not made to the advantageous state are common,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to a scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a movable body movement luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The control of the light emitting means by the movable body moving luminance data table is performed by sequentially using the luminance data constituting the movable body moving luminance data table and then sequentially using the luminance data constituting the movable body moving luminance data table again;
The control of the light emitting means by the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching is ended after sequentially using the luminance data constituting the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching, without sequentially using the luminance data constituting the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching again;
the last luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching is set not to control the light-emitting means using the first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching again;
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part;
The light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data last used in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means emits light at a first luminance;
A gaming machine in which the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data that is first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, thereby causing the light emitting means to emit light at a second brightness that is lower than the first brightness.

Images